STRUDS v11 Manual

Struds v11
USER MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
Struds is an ideal software solution for the usage of structural engineers for the analysis of
2D & 3D structures and the design of different R.C.C. / Steel components such as Slabs,
Beams, Columns, Footings and Trusses with design sketches running on Windows
95/98/2000/XP/NT Vista and Windows 7 platforms.
Struds has an in-built graphical data generator to model the geometry of building structure.
The basic approach is to create two-dimensional floor plans (Plane Grids) and provide
column locations with the help of which the program automatically generates 2D Plane
Frames and 3D Space Frame. Appropriate material and section properties can be created or
assigned from Struds libraries. Standard boundary conditions and different types of loads
can then be applied.
At every step of the modeling process, you will receive graphical verification of your
progress. You never have to worry about making a mistake as the deleting or editing of any
part of the geometry is possible using available menu commands. Immediate visual
feedback provides an extra level of assurance that the model you have constructed agrees
with your intentions.
When your structure geometry is complete, Struds performs analysis using Stiffness Matrix
Method and Finite Element Method for maximum solution, accuracy, speed and reliability.
After the analysis, the Post Processor mode of Struds provides powerful visualization tools
that let you quickly interpret your analysis results and numerical tools to search, report and
understand the behavior of the structure. Herein, the analysis results for different load
combinations for a part of structure or the whole geometry can be seen in the graphical as
well as the text form.
Struds then performs the integrated design by Limit State Method of all R.C.C. components
of the structure by directly reading the analysis results. All the relevant Indian Standard
codes & British standard codes are followed to confirm to the design parameters and
checks. If any component fails, the program gives you warning messages and suggests you
the possible alternatives for design. Struds prepares graphical outputs in the form of
drawings and diagrams. Design results in the text form of Schedules, Quantities and Details
are also produced. The design process is highly interactive and extremely user-friendly. You
can change the design parameters anywhere in between the design process and redesign
the structure. These changes are automatically reflected in graphical and numerical output
form. Struds also enables you to produce the working drawings in AUTOCAD.
Documentation is always an important part of analysis and design and the Windows user
interface enhances the results and simplifies the effort. Struds provides direct high quality
printing and plotting of both text and graphics data to document your model and results.
REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS
Before you start, with the actual working of Struds, however, please take a few minutes to
do following.
Read, fill out and return any forms that are included with your set. In India, there is a user
Registration Form that indicates the security lock number / License number. When you
return this form, you are entitled to free hot-line support, one-year warranty and free
upgradations in first year. After that time you can purchase the maintenance and support
option on annual basis. Outside India, the terms may vary, please contact CSC World (India)
head office at Pune or your sales personnel.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENT
The recommended minimum hardware requirements for smooth running of Struds on

Windows is as follows.
• IBM PC Pentium IV, faster the better.

• 512 MB RAM or more.
• Monitor - VGA Colour.
• Mouse - Windows compatible.
• CD Drive
• Hard Disk - 1.2 GB (Minimum)
• Printer - Colour Laser or Inkjet Printer compatible with Windows.
• Operating System - Windows95 / Windows98 / WindowsNT/ Windows2000/
Windows XP/ Windows Vista / Windows 7
• Printer / plotter even though not mandatory, your computer should have a parallel
port to attach the security lock.
INSTALLATION
This section describes the procedure that you should follow to install Struds on your
computer. Note that you must have already installed Windows95 / Windows98 /
WindowsNT / Windows 2000 / Windows XP on your computer before you install Struds.
I. Struds INSTALLATION
Installing Struds is a relatively easy process, which uses a set up program included on the CD
provided to you.
To install Struds, follow these steps.
1. Insert the Struds CD in your CD drive and close the drive.

2. Go to the Program menu - click on Windows Explorer.
3. Search your computer and click on the drive letter represented by your CD drive.
Suppose D:\ is represented by CD drive in your computer, click on D:\ to see the
contents in the CD.
4. The CD will have different directories. One of the directory is STRUDWIN. Click on
this directory to see the contents. This directory will have a file by name SETUP. Just
double click on this file. This is a program file and once you double click, it starts
installing Struds. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.
RUNNING Struds
After installing Struds, you can run the program by clicking `Start' button and selecting
options `Programs' - `Struds on Windows' - `Run Struds.
On the onset, Struds displays the STARTUP dialog box, as show below, which enables you to
create a new file, or open an existing file.
INTRODUCTION - MODEL GENERATOR
This mode enables you to create a building project graphically. The data input is done entirely by
graphical method. You are required to draw the floor plans geometry by defining the slab panels.
Then you can position the columns and provide the sectional / material properties & loading. This
input is accepted by Struds in a 2D-work plane to automatically generate 2D Plane Frames and 3D
Space Frame as desired by you for structural analysis.
Introduction - ANALYSIS MODE
This module performs the analysis of the building structure defined by you, by the advanced
"Finite Element method". You have the option of analysing the structure by the 2D Plane
Grid / Plane Frames or 3D Space Frame method. In this mode, the analysis results are
written in the text format, so that they are directly accessible for design.
Introduction - POST PROCESSOR MODE
In this mode, you can visualise the analysis results of the structure in graphical and text
form. You can understand the behaviour of the structure by viewing Bending Moment
Diagrams, Shear Force Diagrams, Free Body Diagrams, Deflected Shapes, Vector diagrams
etc. of the whole or part of the structure. In this mode, the reports of analysis results are
also generated.
Introduction - DESIGN MODE
In this mode, the data of the analysis results is automatically read from the text files,
produced by the analysis module and it is then processed for the R.C.C. / Steel design of all
the components of the selected structure. All the relevant IS codes are followed for the
design of Slabs, Beams, Columns, Footings and Trusses. In this mode, you can also generate
the detail design reports, schedules, drawings and bills of quantities for all the components.
The design process is highly interactive and the user has the choice of modifying the final
details as per his discretion.
1. FILE
This menu option contains all the basic sub menu options, to save, create, import, print and
close the building file. All these options have been listed below, and explained in greater
detail, in the respective topics.
FILE - NEW
FILE - OPEN
FILE - RETRIEVE
FILE - CLOSE
FILE - BUILDING INFORMATION
FILE - SAVE BUILDING MODEL

FILE - SAVE AS
FILE - IMPORT STAAD.PRO (.Std) FILE
FILE - IMPORT ETAB (.$ET) FILE
FILE -EXPORT - STAAD FILE ( *.std)
FILE -EXPORT - ETAB FILE ( *.$ET)
FILE - DELETE PROJECT FILES
FILE - PRINT
FILE - PRINTSETTINGS
FILE - SET PRINT AREA
FILE - PRINT PREVIEW
FILE - PRINT SETUP
FILE - EXIT
1.01 FILE - NEW
By using this option you can create a new building project.
1.02 FILE - OPEN
By using this option you can open an existing building file, for viewing or edition.
1.03 FILE - RETRIEVE
In the event of corruption of the BLD file already created, this file could be retrieved from
the Back up file(which is created on saving the BLD file), using the Building Retrieve option.
On using this option, select the backup file(*.bak), which you would like to retrieve. If the
file is retrieved successfully, Struds will give you a confirmation message, that "File has been
retrieved successfully".
To open the retrieved file, use the File - Open option.
1.04 FILE - CLOSE
This option allows you to close the building file, which is currently opened.
1.05 FILE - BUILDING INFORMATION
This option allows you to view, as well as modify the building related Project Information.
On clicking this option, the following dialog box is visible

The building information dialog box, displays the details pertaining to the Name of the
Project, Owner Name, Details of the Project, Name of your Firm, Address, and any other
comments, you would like to enter for future reference. Initially it takes information
regarding the path where the file has to be saved and the name of file by which name it has
to be saved. By default the path is C:\Strudwin\Projects and file name is New. You may
change the same. Specify the location where you want to save the .BLD file and type a name
up to 8 letters in the field provided for `File Name'. Please see that the file name does not
have wild characters like #, *,? Etc. You can select your design code, as the Indian code or
the British code, using this dialog box. You can also fix the tentative maximum building
dimensions, which you need to model. Depending upon the dimensions, which you input
out here, the screen area, having those dimensions, would be visible for modeling of the
plan. These project details would be visible in every report that is generated in Struds.
1.06 FILE - SAVE
This option allows you to save the building file. When you select this option, Struds saves
the file in specified location in startup dialog box.
Click on the `Save' button. Struds will create the .Prj file and save it.
1.07 FILE - SAVE AS
This option allows you to save the .Prj file by any other name.
Struds displays the above window again. Type the new file name in the field and click on
`Save' button. Struds makes one more copy of the BLD file and saves it by the name as
specified by you.
Important Notes:
1. When you wish to change the name of any building file of Struds, please use the Save as
option rather than renaming the file. If you rename a file, the associate files in which
analysis data is saved, remain in the previous name. This may result in failure in analyzing
the renamed file.
2. Struds creates associate files by taking first 4 characters of the BLD file name. For
example, for SAMPLE.BLD file, Struds generates files like SAMP001.xyz, SAM002.xyz etc. So
if you provide file names having similar first 4 characters to two bld files, say SAMPL1.BLD
and SAMPLE2.BLD, then the associate files generated for these two buildings will clash with
each other(if both the BLD files are saved in same folder). Hence it is recommended that you
provide file names having different first four characters
1.09 FILE - IMPORT STAAD.Pro (.std) FILE
This option is used to import any STAAD analysed file in Struds for designing purpose. To
import the file you can click on this icon. After that you will get 1 dialog box as shown
below
After selecting the option for STAAD import, follow the steps given below.
1. While Importing STAAD file following points should be considered.

a) All STAAD files UNIT should be in kN-m.
b) Whole structure should be in first quadrant i.e. in positive Z and X quadrant.
c) Footing level nodes should be at zero level (Y = 0) in STAAD modeling.
d) Load cases should have names; they should be correlated with STRUD standard load
cases.
e) Print analysis results should be mentioned in *.std file, by which analysis results will be
printed in *.ANL file.
f) Corresponding co-ordinate for Earthquake and Wind Loads are as below.
STAAD Struds
Y Z
Z Y
X X
2. After analysis of STAAD model, copy the *.std and *.ANL file (STAAD Pro output file) in
separate folder.
3. Now run the Struds and cancel the Start up dialog box.
4. Select the option File -> Import STAAD.Pro (.STD) file. You will get the following dialogue
box.
5. Select the file from the folder in which you have kept *.std and *.ANL file (STAAD Pro
output file)
6. Select the file to be imported and click “Open” button.
7. Then you will get ‘Co-relate STAAD to Struds Load cases’ dialog box as shown below.
8. Select the imported and available loads and click “OK” button. Here for Imported Load
case EQX you have to select Available Load case as EQLX+(Here for X co-ordinate of STAAD
corresponding co-ordinate of Struds is X) and for Imported Load case EQZ you have to select
Available Load case as EQY+(. Here for Z co-ordinate of STAAD corresponding co-ordinate of
Struds is Y). Click “OK” button after selecting all load cases.
9. Then you will get file imported successfully message, click “OK”
10. Now you will get the building file in Struds. Save this file.
11. Analysis of this file has already done in STAAD so it is not required to analyze in Struds.
12. Directly go for Design by selecting Mode as RCC Design.
1.10 FILE - IMPORT- ETAB (.$ET) FILE
This option is used to import any ETAB analysed file in Struds for designing purpose. To
import the file you can click on this icon. After that you will get 1 dialog box as shown
below
After selecting the option for ETABS import, follow the steps given below.
Steps for importing ETAB file are given below.

I) While Importing ETAB file following points should be considered.
A) In all ETAB files Input (.$ET file) and Output (.txt file) should be in kN-m.
B) Whole structure should be in first quadrant
C) Footing level nodes should be at zero level in modeling.
D) Load cases should have names; they should be correlated with STRUD standard load cases.
II) After analysis of ETAB model, copy the *.$ET and *.txt file (ETAB output file) in separate folder.
III) Now run the Struds and cancel the Start up dialog box.
IV) Select the option File -> Import ETAB (.$ET) file. You will get the following dialogue box.
V) Select the file from the folder in which you have kept *.$ET and *.txt file (ETAB output file)
VI) Select the file to be imported and click "Open" button.
VII) Then you will get 'Co-relate ETABS to Struds Load cases' dialog box as shown below.
VIII) Select the imported and available loads and click "OK" button.
IX) Then you will get file imported successfully message, click "OK"
X) Now you will get the building file in Struds. Save this file.
XI) Analysis of this file has already done in ETAB so it is not required to analyze in Struds.
XII) Directly go for Design by selecting Mode as RCC Design.
1.11 FILE – EXPORT – STAAD FILE (*.std)
This option allows you to create the input file for the building you have generated in Struds. The
input file could be for plane grids, Plane frames or Spaceframe. This input file could be opened in
STAAD to visualise the structure and also to perform the analysis. When you select this option,
Struds displays following window where you have to select the type of STAAD input files.
You need not give any name to the file. Struds generates files having extension *.STD which can be
opened in STAAD.
1.12 FILE – EXPORT – ETABS FILE (*.$ET)
Using this option user may export Struds file to ETABS for analysis as well as design. After exporting
the file in ETABS check the version name in the $et file and change it if it is not similar to the version
of ETABS which is installed on your machine. Then open the file using ETAB program for further
action.
1.13 FILE - DELETE PROJECT FILES
Using this option, through Struds, you can delete all the files pertaining to a particular project, which
have been created in the folder, wherein you have saved the BLD file, for that project. The following
dialog box is displayed.
These files are further subdivided into the Building, (that is the building file *.BLD, and the Back up
file *.BAK), Analysis, Design, Reports as well as the Drawing files. The Analysis files are further
subdivided, into files required for Space Frame, Plane Frame and the Plane Grid analysis. The design
files are divided into the Slab files (The slab being independent of analysis), and the Design of Beams,
Columns and Footings, either by the Space Frame, Plane Frame, or the Plane Grid method of
analysis. The report files are further bifurcated depending upon whether the reports have been
generated, for the Space frame, Plane Frame, or the Plane Grid method of analysis. Similarly the
drawing files have been segregated, pertaining to the drawings being generated for Slabs, Beams,
Columns or Footings.
1.14 FILE - PRINT
This option can be used to directly commence printing. When you select this option, Struds displays
following window.
This window displays the standard printing options of windows. Select the Name of the Printer on
which you want to obtain the print. Click on the properties button to set the properties of paper and
printer. Please note that giving page numbers should be followed by specifying pages from the
starting number to end number. If you want to print the present screen, type I and I in the fields
provided for pages option. You can also specify the number of copies of print by selecting the
number from the Copies option. Click on the OK button to proceed for printing. Select cancel if you
want to abandon the printing.
1.15 FILE – PRINT SETTINGS
This option have two sub menus one is Print settings and page settings. If you select View settings
you will get following dialog box in which you can choose colours as per requirement.
After changing the colurs click on Ok button so that the changes will be reflected. Click Cancel button
if changes are not required.
1.16 FILE - PRINT PREVIEW
By using this option you can see the preview of on screen details of the structural geometry, which is
to be printed.
1.17 FILE - PRINT SETUP
By using this option you can set the parameters for printing such as paper size, orientation etc. so as
to obtain the print out of the structural geometry.
Select the paper size from the drop-down menu of paper option. You can also select the horizontal
or vertical placement of paper by selecting the Portrait or Landscape options of Orientation.
1.18 FILE – RECENT FILES PATH
This part under file menu gives latest 4 files which are opened earlier. User can directly open
the previous opened files using these options.
1.19 FILE - EXIT
This option allows you to close the building file. If you have not saved the file before using this
option, Struds displays following message.
Click on the `YES' button if you want to save the building file. If you do not want to save the changes,
click on `NO' button. In this case, if the file is previously saved, it will be stored as it is.
2. VIEW
This menu contains several options, to view as well as edit the modeled geometry.
All these options have been listed below, and are discussed in greater detail, in the respective topics.
VIEW - SHOW / HIDE
VIEW - FLOOR PLAN
VIEW - PLANE FRAME
VIEW - SPACE FRAME
VIEW - PLANE TRUSS
2.1 VIEW-SHOW/HIDE
This menu has several suboptions, which allow you to view grid points, grid lines, etc. on a particular
floor. These options have been listed below:
VIEW - SHOW/HIDE - GRID POINTS
VIEW- SHOW/HIDE - GRID LINES
VIEW - SHOW/HIDE- ELEMENTS
VIEW - SHOW/HIDE- SLABS
VIEW - SHOW/HIDE- NODES

VIEW - SHOW/HIDE- COLUMNS
VIEW - SHOW/HIDE- WALLS
All these options have been explained in greater detail, in the respective topics
2.1.1 VIEW-SHOW/HIDE-GRID POINT
This option allows you to on or off the display of the grid points.
Select this icon to on/ off the view of the grid point
2.1.2 VIEW-SHOW/HIDE-GRID LINES
This option allows you to on or off the display of grid lines. When you select this option it will give
you the display of grid lines of that floor plan as shown below
Select this icon to put the grid lines display on or off.
2.1.3 VIEW-SHOW/HIDE-ELEMENTS
This option allows you to on or off the display of elements.
Select this icon to put the element display on or off.
2.1.4 VIEW-SHOW/HIDE-SLABS
This option allows you to on or off the display of slabs.
Select this icon to put the slab display on or off.
2.1.5 VIEW-SHOW/HIDE-NODES
This option allows you to on or off the node display.
Select this icon to put the node display on or off.
2.1.6 VIEW-SHOW/HIDE-COLUMNS
This option allows you to on or off the column display.
Select this icon to put the column display on or off.
2.1.7 VIEW-SHOW/HIDE-WALLS
This option allows you to on or off the wall view. When you select this option it will give you the
display of walls present on that floor plan as shown below
Select this icon to put the wall display on or off.
2.1.8 VIEW-SHOW/HIDE-MESHING
This option allows you to on or off the display of mesh.
Select this icon to put the node display on or off.
2.2 VIEW FLOOR PLAN
This menu has several sub-options, which allow you to view the details on a particular floor, as well
as import data, using either the DXF or the ATS format. These options have been listed below:
VIEW - FLOOR PLAN - ADD RAFT FLOOR
VIEW - FLOOR PLAN - IMPORT DXF FILE
VIEW - FLOOR PLAN - IMPORT ATS FILE
VIEW - FLOOR PLAN - EXPORT DXF FILE

All these options have been explained in greater detail, in the respective topics
2.2.1 VIEW - FLOOR PLAN - ADD RAFT FLOOR
This option allows you to add raft floor i.e to provide raft foundation in the building. When you
select this option, Struds displays following window.
This window ask you regarding confirmation for providing raft foundation. If you click on 'Yes'
button then Struds will copy base floor plan on raft floor.
2.2.2 VIEW FLOOR PLAN - IMPORT - DXF FILE
This facility enables you to import the floor centre line plan, from AutoCAD, using the DXF file
format. Before importing the plan to Struds, first explode all the entities in AutoCAD. To import a
DXF file, it is essential to create an empty floor in the building. On creation of the floor, set that floor
level, and select this option. Then select the DXF file which you want to import by giving suitable
path.On doing this, the following dialog box is displayed.
Then enter the name of the layers in which you have created the elements and columns . Select the
units for the line plan, either as Meters or Feet(This is the unit in which the AutoCAD drawing is
assumed to be drawn in). click on the check boxes if you want to import Text and colors from DXF
file. The drawing in Struds will be drawn in the unit as has been specified by the user in Project
Information, as in the STARTUP dialog box, which appears, on the creation of a new project, or on
clicking the File - Building Information option. If the drawing dimensions while importing into Struds,
are to be modified, enter a suitable multiplication factor, for the modification of the drawing.
2.2.3 VIEW FLOOR PLAN - IMPORT - ATS FILE
By using this option you can transfer the drawing file from AutoCAD to Struds having extension of
*.ats.
For detailed description about how to create *.ats file in AutoCAD please see Drafting manual.
2.2.4 VIEW - FLOOR PLAN - EXPORT - DXF FILE

By using this option you can transfer geometry of the Struds file with extension *.prj to AutoCAD
having extension of *.dxf.
2.3 VIEW - PLANE FRAME
This menu options offers you several options, to view as well as edit the plane frames.
VIEW - PLANE FRAME - SET SUPPORT

VIEW - PLANE FRAME – EQ. LOAD - + VE X
VIEW - PLANE FRAME – EQ. LOAD - - VE X
VIEW - PLANE FRAME – EQ. LOAD - + VE Y
VIEW - PLANE FRAME – EQ. LOAD - - VE Y
VIEW - PLANE FRAME – BASE SHEAR - + VE X
VIEW - PLANE FRAME – BASE SHEAR - - VE X
VIEW - PLANE FRAME – BASE SHEAR - + VE Y
VIEW - PLANE FRAME – BASE SHEAR - - VE Y
VIEW - PLANE FRAME – WIND LOAD - + VE X
VIEW - PLANE FRAME – WIND LOAD - - VE X
VIEW - PLANE FRAME – WIND LOAD - + VE Y
VIEW - PLANE FRAME – WIND LOAD - - VE Y
All these options have been discussed in further detail, in the respective topics.
2.3.1 VIEW - PLANE FRAME - SET SUPPORT
This option allows you to select support conditions for plane frames.
Set support – Fixed
If you select this option then Struds will automatically attach fixed support conditions to supports.
Set support – Hinged
If you select this option then Struds will automatically attach Hinge support conditions to supports.
2.3.2 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – EQ. LOAD
For activating this command, first of all you will have to generate EQ load by Frame Stiffness
method. Then depending on your requirement to view the diagram of resulting earthquake load you
will have to select the plane frames either in X or in Y directions and then the force direction in
which loading is applied.
2.3.2.1 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – EQ. LOAD - + VE X
This option enables you to view the EQ load in +ve X direction. You have to select any frame in Y
direction through the drop down combo box and see the sketch of the same.
2.3.2.2 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – EQ. LOAD - - VE X
This option enables you to view the EQ load in -ve X direction. You have to select any frame in Y
2.3.2.3 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – EQ. LOAD - + VE Y
This option enables you to view the EQ load in +ve Y direction. You have to select any frame in X
2.3.2.4 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – EQ. LOAD - - VE Y
This option enables you to view the EQ load in -ve Y direction. You have to select any frame in X
2.3.3 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – BASE SHEAR
For activating this command, first of all you will have to generate EQ load by Frame Stiffness
method. Then depending on your requirement to view the diagram of resulting base shear you will
have to select the plane frames either in X or in Y directions and then the force direction in which
loading is applied.
2.3.3.1 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – BASE SHEAR - +ve X
This option enables you to view the base shear in +ve X direction. You have to select any frame in Y
2.3.3.2 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – VIEW – BASE SHEAR –ve X
This option enables you to view the EQ load in -ve X direction. You have to select any frame in Y
2.3.3.3 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – VIEW – BASE SHEAR +ve Y
This option enables you to view the EQ load in +ve Y direction. You have to select any frame in X
2.3.3.4 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – BASE SHEAR –ve Y
This option enables you to view the EQ load in -ve Y direction. You have to select any frame in X
2.3.4 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – WIND LOAD
For activating this command, first of all you will have to generate wind load by Framing method.
Then depending on your requirement to view the diagram of resulting wind load you will have to
select the plane frames either in X or in Y directions and then the force direction in which loading is
applied.
2.3.4.1 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – WIND LOAD - +ve X
This option enables you to view the wind load in +ve X direction in sketch format. You will have to
select any frame in X or Y direction and see the sketch of the same by selecting the suitable option in
X or Y direction
2.3.4.2 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – WIND LOAD -ve X
This option enables you to view the Wind load in -ve X direction in sketch format. For viewing this,
you have to first generate EQ load by Frame Stiffness method. Then you have to select any frame in
X or Y direction and see the sketch of the same by selecting the suitable option in X or Y direction
2.3.4.3 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – WIND LOAD +ve Y
This option enables you to view the EQ load in +ve Y direction in sketch format. For viewing this, you
have to first generate EQ load by Frame Stiffness method. Then you have to select any frame in X or
Y direction and see the sketch of the same by selecting the suitable option in X or Y direction
2.3.4.4 VIEW - PLANE FRAME – WIND LOAD -ve Y
This option enables you to view the EQ load in -ve Y direction in sketch format. For viewing this, you
have to first generate EQ load by Frame Stiffness method. Then you have to select any frame in X or
Y direction and see the sketch of the same by selecting the suitable option in X or Y direction
2.4 VIEW - SPACE FRAME
This menu option facilitates you to view as well as edit the structure in the three dimensional view. It
further has several sub menu options, which have been enlisted below.
VIEW - SPACE FRAME - INSERT TRUSS

VIEW - SPACE FRAME - REMOVE TRUSS
VIEW - SPACE FRAME – PROPERTY
VIEW - SPACE FRAME – RENDER VIEW
VIEW - SPACE FRAME – SELECT FLOOR
VIEW - SPACE FRAME – ROTATION
VIEW - SPACE FRAME – LOAD PATTERN DISPLAY
VIEW - SPACE FRAME – SELECTION
VIEW - SPACE FRAME – ACTIVE
All these options have been discussed in further detail in the respective topics
2.4.1 VIEW-SPACE FRAME-INSERT TRUSS
By using this option you can attach the truss to the columns, by selecting the column node in All
Floor View. When you select this option you will get the following dialog box
From this dialog box you have to select the truss type and click on OK. After that select the nodes
where you have to insert the truss. Then you will get the display of truss as shown below
v
Select this icon to see the render view
2.4.2 VIEW-SPACE FRAME-REMOVE TRUSS
This option allows you to remove the truss which you have inserted in All Floor View. After selecting
remove truss option you have to select the truss element to remove that particular element.
2.4.3 VIEW - SPACE FRAME - PROPERTY
This option allows you to attach properties to the elements. When you select this option, Struds
displays following window.
On the left side of this dialog, a list is given for selection of the elements for which you want to
attach the properties. The identification numbers of the elements, which are displayed in this list,
are the Space Frame identification numbers, if the unique IDs are not set to the ON position.
However, if you choose to display the unique IDs, the same will be displayed in this dialog box also.
After selecting the element from this list click on that property tab, which you want to specify for the
selected element. Struds will display the list of predefined parameters under that property. You
should select the appropriate parameter and click on the Accept button. Struds attaches the chosen
parameter to the element. After attaching all the properties to all the elements, click on the Apply
button before pressing OK button. Struds will now exit from this window into SPACE FRAME - VIEW
window.
2.4.4 VIEW - SPACE FRAME – RENDER VIEW
This option allows you to visualize the structure how it look in 3D view when filled with concrete
material in applied structural components. When you select this option the structure will be
displayed on screen as following.
Select this icon to activate render view command.
2.4.5 VIEW - SPACE FRAME – SELECT FLOOR
This option allows you to select specific floor for observing details in 3D view. In this selected floor
you can check sections, loading etc.
When you select this option following dialog box comes on screen.
When you select any floor Struds will give its 3D view as below.
Select this icon to activate select floor command in 3D view.

2.4.6 VIEW – SPACE FRAME - ROTATION
This option allows you to rotate the 3D view of structure is required direction to see the details.
For rotation of structure you have two options as below.
Rotate about X and Y Axis : - This command rotates the structure around X and Y axis. Select this
option and click on screen as you change the cursor position the structure will rotate accordingly.
This icon will activate rotation about X and Y axis.
Rotate about Z axis :- This command rotates the structure around vertical Z axis. Select this option
and click on screen as you change the cursor position the structure will rotate accordingly.
This icon will activate rotation about Z axis.
2.4.7 VIEW – SPACE FRAME – LOAD PATTERN DISPLAY
This option allows graphical display of the loading on structure in 3D view.
When you select this option you will get following dialog box.
In this dialog box you have to select the loads which you want Struds to display.
If you select Dead load and Live load under Slab to beam load Struds will display those loads.
For other elemental loads select general loads option. For wall loads select wall load option.
If you have given line and point loads on slab options for displaying those loads is also given.
Under nodal loads you can display earthquake loads, wind loads and general nodal loads.
If you want to enlarge the graphics of display of loads you can change the scale factor accordingly
the load diagram will be modified.
Click 'Ok' button to activate the selection.
Click 'Cancel' to end the command.
This icon will activate load pattern display command.
2.4.8 VIEW – SPACE FRAME – SELECTION
This option allows selecting elements to view their details.
The selection can be done by two ways.

1) By selecting elements: - Using select element you can select those elements of which you want to
see details.
This icon can be used for selecting elements.
2) By window selection: - Using window selection you can select number of elements in single
command in particular area.
This icon can be used for window selection of elements.
The selected elements will be displayed by different color on screen. After selecting elements you
will have to use active command explained in coming pages.
2.4.9 VIEW – SPACE FRAME – ACTIVE
This option allows various functions of selected elements to view their details.
The active command can be used for various options as below.
Active all is given to activate all elements. This can be used after selecting few elements to
discontinue this command.
This icon can be used to give active all command.
Active selected is used to display the selected elements only.
This icon can be used to give active selected command.

Active previous option is used to activate the previous selected elements OR all elements before
selecting them.
This icon can be used to give active previous command.
Inactive option is used to inactivate the selected elements. Those will not be displayed on screen.
This icon can be used to give inactive command.
2.5 VIEW - PLANE TRUSS
Use this option to, either create or view a Plane Truss. This menu option has further sub options,
which have been listed below:
VIEW - PLANE TRUSS - DEFINE

VIEW - PLANE TRUSS - SET
Both these options have been discussed in detail, in the relevant topics.
2.5.1 VIEW - PLANE TRUSS - DEFINE
This option is used to open the view, in which you can create a new truss. When you click this
option, a new screen is opened, as shown below.
In this view, you can create a new truss, either from the library of Predefined trusses (Using the
option CREATE - PLANE TRUSS - PREDEFINED, or using the Element Wise creation method (Using the
option CREATE PLANE TRUSS - RAFTER/ MAIN TIE / STRUTS/ KING POST/ QUEEN)
2.5.2 VIEW - PLANE TRUSS - SET
This option is used to view a Plane Truss, which has been already created. On clicking this option, the
dialog box, as shown below is displayed.
This dialog box, displays a list of all the trusses, which are present in the BLD file. It must be
remembered, that a single BLD file, can contain more than one trusses. Select the identification
number of the truss in the List, which is to be displayed, when a particular record is clicked, the
window towards the left shows the animated view, of the geometrical details of the truss.
On clicking the OK option, of this dialog box, the control is taken to the view, in which the selected
truss is displayed.
3. CREATE
This option comprises of several sub menu options, useful for the geometrical modeling of the
structure.
These features have been enlisted below, and have been explained in greater detail, in the
respective topics.
CREATE - BUILDING
CREATE - PLANE TRUSS
3.1 CREATE - BUILDING
This option is used to create the overall skeleton of the structure, as well as the various entities, such
as slabs, elements, columns, nodes, etc. This menu option has several sub options, which have been
listed below:
CREATE - BUILDING - SLAB

CREATE - BUILDING - ELEMENT
CREATE - BUILDING - COLUMN
CREATE - BUILDING - GRIDLINES
CREATE - BUILDING - NODE
CREATE - BUILDING - DUCT
CREATE - BUILDING - PROPERTIES
CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS
CREATE - BUILDING - WALL
CREATE - BUILDING - SHEAR WALL
CREATE - BUILDING – FEM MESH
All these options have been listed in the respective pages in greater detail.
3.1.1 CREATE - BUILDING - SLAB
This option enables you to create slabs of different types. In Struds, the basic input is given in the
form of 2D floor plans. These floor plans can be divided into a number of slab panels. Here the slab is
not an element but considered as an identity surrounded by four elements in the form of supporting
beams. Slabs of different types can be created in Struds, as described in the respective topics, as
outlined below
CREATE - BUILDING - SLAB - RECTANGULAR

CREATE - BUILDING - SLAB - TRIANGULAR
CREATE - BUILDING - SLAB - TRAPEZOIDAL
CREATE - BUILDING - SLAB - FLAT RECTANGULAR
CREATE - BUILDING - SLAB - GENERAL SLAB
3.1.1.1 CREATE - BUILDING - SLAB - RECTANGULAR
By using this option, you can draw a rectangular slab panel. The load from rectangular slab on the
supporting beams is calculated by Struds automatically as per the yield line pattern given in IS: 456 -
2000. Struds also designs this slab as per the IS / BS code coefficients. The boundary conditions for
slab such as continuous/discontinuous edges are taken automatically by Struds from the plan
geometry.
When you select SLAB-RECTANGULAR option, the program asks you following input, which is
displayed, on the command line.
Ènter First Point Of Slab':
Rectangular slab can be defined by specifying its any two diagonally opposite corner points. Here
you can specify the first point by following ways.
1. You can give the co-ordinates of the first point with respect to origin. For this you can type
the X and Y co-ordinates on the command line separated either by comma or space. For
example you can type 2,3.5 or 2 3.5 to specify that the first point of slab be at co-ordinates
2.0 - X co-ordinate and 3.5 - Y co-ordinate with respect to origin.
2. You can select the point anywhere on the screen by directly clicking the mouse or pressing
Enter key. The first point of slab is thus specified where the cursor is located.
Note - If you want to specify the first point of slab on an already existing node, you can directly select
this node by clicking the cursor on this node. While clicking, care should be taken that the node lies
between the box of cursor. You can also select the node by pressing F8 key and typing the node
number.
Ènter Second Point Of Slab’:
You can specify the second diagonal point by following ways.
1. You can type the co-ordinates of the second point with respect to First Point. For example if the
slab dimension is 4.2m X 5.65m, you can type 4.2, 5.65 or 4.2 5.65.
2. You can directly click the cursor anywhere on the screen to locate the second point.
If the second point is on an already existing node, you can directly select this node by clicking the
cursor on this node. While clicking, care should be taken that the node lies between the box of
cursor. You can also select the node by pressing F8 key and typing the node number.
When you have specified the first and second point of the slab, Struds displays a dialog box to give
properties
At the top of the dialog box, icons are displayed to specify the Load transfer type from slab to
beams. You can specify the One Way, Two Way or Cantilever slab by clicking on the respective icon.
The Auto icon is to decide the load transfer of slab automatically from aspect ratio. When you click
Àuto' icon, Struds computes the length to width ratio of slab and decides whether it is a One-Way
slab or Two Way slab.
THICKNESS - There is a field to specify the thickness of the slab. By default the thickness is taken as
100 mm. You can change the thickness as per your description. The self-weight of slab is computed
from the thickness provided here. If you change the thickness, Struds will re-compute the self-weight
of slab.
MATERIAL DENSITY - You can specify the Material Density for slab in the field provided. By default
the density is taken as 25 KN/cubic meter for concrete.
DEAD LOAD - You can view the dead load (Self-weight) of slab in a field. When you change the
thickness, you can see the corresponding change in this field.
LIVE LOAD - You can specify the Live Load on the slab in the field provided. By default Struds takes
Live Load on slab as 2kN/sq-m. You can change the value of Live Load on the slab as per your
requirements. If you want to know what are the IS code provisions for Live Load for different loading
FLOOR FINISH LOAD - You can specify the extra load on the slab as due to flooring etc. in the field
provided for it.
SUNK SLAB - Sunk slab is the slab whose level is depressed with respect to surrounding slabs, for
example the slab at the bottom of toilet is depressed to accommodate pipes and waterproofing. You
can specify a slab as sunk by giving the level of slab. For example if the depression is by 300mm, you
can type 0.3m in the field provided for sunk level. This sunken slab may be filled with some material
such as brickbats. If you provide the density of this fill material in the field provided for Material
Density, Struds will calculate the extra load on slab due to this filling and show its value in the field
provided for Sunk Load.
Note - When you specify a slab as sunk, Struds considers the boundary condition of this slab as all
four edges discontinuous for design.
POINT LOAD - You can also specify a point load on a slab by clicking `Point Load' button. When you
click this button Struds shows following dialog box.
You can specify the value of vertical downward load (W) on the slab and its location - X and Y
distance from the edge of slab by giving the values in the fields. After giving the values press Àdd'
button to apply the load on the slab. You can specify one or more than one point loads on a slab.
LINE LOAD - You can also specify a Line Load on the slab like wall load by clicking the button `Line
Load'. Struds displays following dialog box.
Here you can select whether the wall is horizontal or vertical by clicking on respective icons. Then
you can specify the offset from edge (d) and the value of load (W) in the fields. You can then click the
Àdd' button to apply this load on the slab. You can apply more than one line loads on a slab by
specifying and clicking the Àdd' button.
Note - When you specify point load or line load on a slab, it is transferred accordingly on the beams
supporting the slab. Struds designs slab as panels and as such the slab itself is not analysed or
designed for this point load or line load in the present version.
After giving all the values in the `SLAB PROPERTIES' dialog box, click ÒK' button to define the slab. If
you do not want to define the slab, click `CANCEL' button.
The defined slab is displayed on the screen. The slab panel is surrounded by four Èlements'. The
four elements are connected at four corners called `Nodes'. Struds automatically gives the numbers
to Slabs, Elements and Nodes as you go on drawing the plan.
Click this icon to create rectangular slab.

3.1.1.2 CREATE - BUILDING - SLAB - TRIANGULAR
You can choose this option to define a Triangular slab. When you click this option, Struds asks you
following input.
`Select First Point of Slab':
Here you can specify the first point of slab anywhere by mouse or by giving co-ordinates with
respect to origin as in case of Rectangular slab.
`Select Second Point of Slab':
Again you can specify the second point of slab by mouse or giving co-ordinates with respect to
origin. Or you can specify the distance of the second point with respect to an existing Node by
pressing F9 key. Another way to specify any such point is by selecting snap mode. To do this, press
F2 key. Struds displays following window.
You can use the options in this window to select a point.
MIDPOINT - Click on this option and then click on any element to select its mid point.
ENDPOINT - Click on this option and click on any element, the program will select the
Nearest end point of this element as the point to be selected.
NODE - Click on this option to select any node by mouse.
OFFSET - You can click this option and select the node from which you want to give the X and Y co-
ordinates to locate a point. This is similar to using the F9 short cut key.
INTERSECTION - You can click this option to select the intersection of two elements as the point.
X OF - You can click this option to specify a point, which is horizontally in line with a node. Here the Y
and Z offsets are taken as zero by the program.
Y OF - You can click this option to specify a point, which is vertically in line with a node. Here the X
and Z offsets are taken as zero by the program.
X OF, Y OF - You can click this option to specify both X and Y offsets of the point to be defined with
respect to an existing node. The difference between F9 key or Offset option in the above window
and this option is, there you specify the X and Y offsets one by one while here you specify the X and
Y offsets in one command.
CENTER - You can click this option and click on a curved element to select the center of that curved
element as the point to be defined.
Note - The F2 key is universal in Struds and can be used anywhere to specify a point.
Once you define all the three points of a Triangular slab, Struds displays the slab properties dialog
box. You can specify the thickness, loading, material for this slab. For load transfer, Struds assumes
that the load is transferred on all the three supporting beams. So selecting the icon for Load Transfer
type in this window should always be Àuto'.
3.1.1.3 CREATE - BUILDING - SLAB - TRAPEZOIDAL
By selecting this option, you can define a Trapezoidal shape slab in plan. When you click on this
option, Struds asks following input. The Trapezoidal shape is assumed to be symmetrical.
`Select First Point’:
Here you should specify the first point of slab anywhere as in case of Rectangular and Triangular
slab.
`Select Second Point’:
Here again you can specify the second point of one edge of slab.
`Select Second Point of Line':
Here you should specify the end point of the line parallel to the first line created by selecting first
and second point of slab.
Struds then displays the Slab Properties dialog box where you can specify the thickness, loading,
material for this slab.
For load transfer, Struds assumes that the load is transferred on all the four supporting beams. So
selecting the icon for Load Transfer type in this window should always be Àuto'.
3.1.1.4 CREATE - BUILDING - SLAB - FLAT RECTANGULAR
By selecting this option we can create Flat rectangular Slab. Here after selecting the option we
specify the first point of the Slab and then the dimension of the slab. We get the slab properties
dialog box as defined in normal rectangular slabs. On clicking "OK" in the Properties dialog box we
get the following "Flat Slab Details" dialog box.
For Rectangular Columns
For Circular Columns
Here we have to specify whether we want the column section associated with the Flat Slab as
Circular or Rectangular. Also we have to specify the column X-size and column Y-size, the attributes
of the Drop and/or Capital we choose to adopt for the Flat slab. After that we click on OK. Thus the
slab gets defined with the attributes of a flat Slab.
3.1.1.5 CREATE - BUILDING - SLAB - GENERAL SLAB
Using this option, you can define slabs having any random geometry. To create a general slab, it is
essential to initially define the boundaries of the general slab. To define the slab, pick the elements
lying along the boundary of the slab, using the cursor. While selecting the elements, it must be
remembered that the elements must be selected continuously, either in an anticlockwise or
clockwise manner. Once the boundary elements have been selected, right click the mouse. This will
display a dialog box defining the basic parameters of the general slab, such as the Live Load, Dead
Loads, Floor Finish Load etc, along with the type of Load distribution, as shown below.
LOAD DISTRIBUTION IN A GENERAL SLAB:
In the general slab thus defined, load can be distributed on to the peripheral elements, in any one of
the following methods:
1) Load Distribution by C.G. method

In this method, the C.G of the general slab, that is the enclosed boundary is located, and the corners
of the slab are then joined to the C.G. The load of the each triangle formed in this manner, is then
distributed to the boundary element, using the following formulation.
Elemental Load on peripheral elements (KN/m) = Area of triangle * Intensity of load acting on the
general slab (KN/m2) / (Length of the Associated Element)
However, in the case of slabs, where one of the internal angles exceeds 180 degrees, the load
distribution cannot be done using the C.G method. In this case, the load distribution will be
automatically done by the Element Length method. The following message will be displayed therein,
and the Load distribution in this case will be done automatically by the Element Length method.
2) Load Distribution by Element Length method
In this method, the load is distributed to all the elements, lying along the boundary of the general
slab equally. The load is distributed on the peripheral elements, as per the following formulation:
Elemental Load (KN/m) = Total Area of General Slab (m2) * Intensity of load acting on the General
Slab (KN/m2) / Perimeter of the General Slab (m)
Hence in the Load distribution by Element Length method, all the boundary elements will have the
same intensity of Slab to Beam loads.
3.1.2 CREATE - BUILDING - ELEMENT
This option enables you to define, elements in the geometrical layout, at the current floor level. In
Struds, you can create elements, which are either straight or curved.
Each of these methods, have been discussed in detail, in the respective topics.
CREATE - BUILDING - ELEMENT - STRAIGHT

CREATE - BUILDING - ELEMENT – CURVED
3.1.2.1 CREATE - BUILDING - ELEMENT - STRAIGHT
Struds enables you to draw an element by using this option. Though the basic concept of drawing
plan is by defining slab panels, some times you may require drawing only beams to define geometry
where slabs are not present.
An element can be drawn in Struds, using any of the methods described below:
Create - Building - Element - Straight - Two Points

Create - Building - Element - Straight - Point, Dx, Dy
Create - Building - Element - Straight - Point, Angle, L
Create - Building - Element - Straight - Two Points
By using this option, you can define an element by specifying its both ends. The input asked by
Struds is
Ènter First Point of the Element':
You can select the first point of element by mouse or specify X and Y co-ordinates with respect to
origin. You can also use snap mode options by pressing F2 hot key or F8/F9 short cut keys.
Ènter Second Point of Element’:
Similarly you can specify the X and Y co-ordinates of the second point with respect to origin. (Not
with respect to the first point).
Click this icon to create straight element between two points.

Struds defines the element and shows its graphical representation on screen.
Create - Building - Element - Straight - Point, Dx, Dy
By using this option, you can define an element by selecting the first point and giving X and Y co-
ordinates with respect to first point. Struds asks following input.
Ènter First Point of Element':
Ènter DX':
Here you can specify X distance of the second point with respect to first point.
Ènter DY':
Here you can specify Y distance of the second point with respect to first point.
Click this icon to create straight element by specifying X and Y distances.
Create - Building - Element - Straight - Point, Angle, L
By using this option, you can define an element by selecting first point and giving the angle of the
element and distance of second point from first point.
Struds asks you following input.
Ènter first point of Element':
Ènter Angle':
Here you can type the angle of element such as 30, 45 etc. with respect to X-axis.
Ènter Length':
Here you should type the value for length of element.
Click on this icon to create straight element by giving first point of element,angle and length.
3.1.2.2 CREATE - BUILDING - ELEMENT - CURVED
By using this option you can define a curved element, in the modeled geometry. This option is active
only when you have set a floor plan. In Struds, the curved element is always circular. The following
sub options are available here.
Division Of Curved Elements
When you create a curved element, Struds automatically divides it into four three nodded finite
elements. For more accuracy in case of larger span of curved beams, you may want to increase the
number of three nodded finite elements. When you select this option, Struds displays following
window.
Change the number of finite elements you want in the curved beam in the field provided and click on
the OK button. The curved beam you create now onwards will have the number of divisions as
specified by you.
Following four ways can draw the curved element.
Create - Curved Element - Three Point

Create - Curved Element - Start Center End
Create - Curved Element - Start Center Angle
Create Curved Element - Start Center Radius
Create - Curved Element - Using Architectural Entity
Create - Curved Element - Three Point
This option allows you to draw the curved element by specifying the first, end and any intermediate
point. The input asked by Struds is as follows.
Ènter First Point of Curve':

You can select the first point of the curved element by mouse or specify X and Y co-ordinates with
respect to origin. You can also use snap mode options by pressing F2 hot key or F8/F9 short cut keys.
Ènter Second Point of Curve':
You can select the second point anywhere along the curved element by mouse or specify X and Y co-
ordinates with respect to origin. You can also use snap mode options by pressing F2 hot key or F8/F9
short cut keys.
Ènter Third Point of Curve'
You can select the end point of the curved element by mouse or specify X and Y co-ordinates with
Click this icon to create curved element by defining three points.
Create - Curved Element - Start Center End
This option can be used to define a curved element by specifying the start and end points of curve
and the center of the circle of whose circumference this element is a part. Struds asks for following
input.
Ènter First point of Curve':
Ènter Center of Curve':
You can select the center of the curved element i.e. the center of the circle on whose this curve lies
by mouse or specify X and Y co-ordinates with respect to origin. You can also use snap mode options
by pressing F2 hot key or F8/F9 short cut keys.
Ènter End Point of Curve':
You can select the end point of the curved element by mouse or specify X and Y co-ordinates with
Click this icon to create curved element by giving start point, center and end point.
Create - Curved Element - Start Center Angle
This option can be used to define a curved element by specifying the start point of curve, the center
of the circle of whose circumference this element is a part and the angle formed by the curve at
center. Struds asks for following input.
Ènter First point of Curve':
Ènter Center of Curve':
You can select the center of the curved element i.e. the center of the circle on whose this curve lies
by mouse or specify X and Y co-ordinates with respect to origin. You can also use snap mode options
by pressing F2 hot key or F8/F9 short cut keys.
Ènter Angle of Curve':
Here you can type the value of the angle formed by the curve at its center. You can also use the
mouse to graphically define the angle.
Click this icon to create curved element by giving first point, center and angle of curve.
Create Curved Element - Start Center Radius
You can draw a curved element using this option by specifying the start point, end point of the
element and radius of the circle of whose circumference it is a part. The input asked by Struds is as
follows.
Ènter Start Point of Curve':
You should select the first point of the curved element by mouse or specify X and Y co-ordinates with
Ènter End Point of Curve':
You should select the end point of the curved element by mouse or specify X and Y co-ordinates with
Ènter Radius of the Curve':
Here you should type the value of radius of the circle on whose circumference the curved element
lies. You can also use the mouse to graphically define the radius.
Click this icon to create curved element by giving start point, end point and radius of curve.
3.1.3 CREATE - BUILDING - COLUMN
This option enables you to create columns, in the modeled structure; as well as to set the primary
attributes pertaining to the dimensions of the columns. The following sub options are available,
which have been further discussed in greater details in the respective pages.
CREATE - BUILDING - COLUMN - SET PARAMETERS

CREATE - BUILDING - COLUMN - AUTO ADD
CREATE - BUILDING - COLUMN – LOCATE
3.1.3.1 CREATE - BUILDING - COLUMN - SET PARAMETERS
Select this option to specify the basic sizes of columns. When you select this option Struds displays
following window.
At the top of window two fields are available to specify the minimum size of a column. Struds will
assume this size for the topmost floor columns. The width here is the dimension of column parallel
to X axis and depth is the dimension of column parallel to Y-axis. This size could be same for all the
floors or go on increasing for the down floors. If you want that the columns have same size for all
floors, click on the `Constant' option. If you want that the column sizes are increasing from top to
bottom floors, select Ìncrement' option. Now the increase in size can be specified in the field
provided below. The increment can be after every floor or after every two floors etc. Specify this
interval in the field provided for Ìncrement After'. The increase in size could be for Width, Depth or
for both the dimensions. Specify the dimensions, which you want to increase by selecting the
options for Width, Depth or Both. Click on the close button to close the window. The default
parameters are as shown in the above window. If you do not specify any column sizes before
generating Plane Frames or Space Frame, Struds assumes column sizes as per above default.
3.1.3.2 CREATE - BUILDING - COLUMN - AUTO ADD
This option allows you to mark columns serially exactly at the nodes or away from nodes. When you
The nodes show a blinking column starting from node no.1 to the last node consecutively. You can
press Y key from keyboard or click on the Y icon in above window to mark the column at the node
where it is blinking.
Similarly you can press N from keyboard or click on N icon to skip locating the column at that node.
If you want to locate a column towards left from the blinking node, you can press L from keyboard or
click on L icon. Struds displays a window.
Here you can type the value of the offset distance to the left of node where you want to locate the
column.
If you want to locate a column to the right of the blinking node, you can press R or click on the R
icon. Again Struds displays a window.
Type the value of the offset distance to the right of the blinking node where you want to mark the
column.
If you want to locate a column to the upside of the blinking node, you can press U or click on the U
Type the value of the distance to the upside of the blinking node where you want to mark the
column.
If you want to locate a column below (down) the blinking node, you can press D or click on the D
Type the value of the distance to the downside of the blinking node where you want to mark the
column.
Select this option for Auto Adding of columns.

3.1.3.3 CREATE - BUILDING - COLUMN - LOCATE
By using this option, you can locate columns anywhere, in the modeled geometry by specifying its
exact location. This command remains active, only if have set any floor plan, and not in the 3D view,
or the Plane Frame Edit view. This can be done in following ways. The input asked by Struds on
command line is
Ènter a point for column':
Now you can locate the column –
1. By clicking mouse at the position where the column is to be located.

2. By specifying X and Y co-ordinates of the point with respect to origin.
3. Using snap mode options by pressing F2 key.
4. Specifying the location of column with respect to an existing node by pressing F8 or F9 keys.
Select this option for locating columns.
3.1.4 CREATE-BUILDING-GRID SYSTEM
This option allows you to create the grid system in your geometry. When you select this option
Struds shows you the following dialog box:
By using this dialog box you can change the number and spacing of the grid lines. When you on the
option for grid system Struds shows you the all grids lines in your geometry as shown in below:
Select this icon to on or off the grid system option
3.1.5 CREATE - BUILDING - NODE
By using this option, you can create a node anywhere by specifying its location. This can be done in
following ways. The input asked by Struds on command line is
`Define a Node at a Point’:
By clicking mouse at the position where the node is to be located.
By specifying X and Y co-ordinates of the point with respect to origin.
Using snap mode options by pressing F2 key.
Specifying the location of Node with respect to an existing node by pressing F8 or F9 keys.
Select this option to create a node
3.1.6 CREATE - BUILDING - DUCT
This is similar to drawing the slab panel except that in this case the program creates four beams
between which there is no slab. When you draw a slab panel, the program creates the slab panel as
well as the supporting beams. Here the program creates only surrounding beams with a void in
between.
The response asked by Struds is as follows.
Ènter First Point of Duct':
The Duct can be defined by specifying it's any two diagonally opposite corner points. Here you can
specify the first point by following ways.
You can give the co-ordinates of the first point with respect to origin. For this you can type the X and
Y co-ordinates on the command line separated either by comma or space. For example you can type
2,3.5 or 2 3.5 to specify that the first point of slab be at co-ordinates 2.0 - X co-ordinate and 3.5 - Y
co-ordinate with respect to origin.
You can select the point anywhere on the screen by directly clicking the mouse or pressing Enter key.
The first point of duct is thus specified where the cursor is located.
Note - If you want to specify the first point of duct on an already existing node, you can directly select
this node by clicking the cursor on this node. While clicking, care should be taken that the node lies
between the box of cursor. You can also select the node by pressing F8 key and typing the node
number.
Ènter Second Point Of Duct':
You can specify the second diagonal point by following ways.
You can type the co-ordinates of the second point with respect to First Point. For example if the duct
dimension is 4.2m X 5.65m, you can type 4.2, 5.65 or 4.2 5.65.
You can directly click the cursor anywhere on the screen to locate the second point.
If the second point is on an already existing node, you can directly select this node by clicking the
cursor on this node. While clicking, care should be taken that the node lies between the box of
cursor. You can also select the node by pressing F8 key and typing the node number.
3.1.7 CREATE - BUILDING - PROPERTIES

This option enables you to create Materials and Sections, and attach them. The following sub
options are available, which are further discussed in greater detail, in the respective topics.
CREATE - BUILDING - PROPERTIES - DEFINE

CREATE - BUILDING - PROPERTIES – ATTACH
3.1.7.1 CREATE - BUILDING - PROPERTIES - DEFINE
This option enables you to create sectional and material properties to the elements in the modeled
structure.
The procedure has been discussed in the following topics:
CREATE - BUILDING - PROPERTIES - MATERIAL

CREATE - BUILDING - PROPERTIES - SECTION
3.1.7.1.1 CREATE - BUILDING - PROPERTIES - MATERIAL
By using this option, you can create material properties to be assigned to the elements drawn in the
plan geometry. By default the standard properties of various grade of concrete are available with
Struds. When you select this option Struds displays following window.
You can change the properties of any material by simply overwriting in the fields provided in the
window.
ADD- Click this option to save the material properties if you have add a new material .
Remove - You can delete any material type available by selecting it and clicking on this option.
Modify – To change material properties which has already defined.
Apply To Beam – To assign the selected material to the beam.
Apply To Column – To assign the selected material to the columns
CLOSE - Click this option to close the window for Material Properties.
3.1.7.1.2 CREATE - BUILDING - PROPERTIES - SECTION
This option allows you to define the sectional properties to be assigned to the elements in plan
geometry. You must provide sectional properties to all the elements in plan otherwise the program
will not be able to perform the analysis of the defined structure.
When you select this option, Struds displays following window.

In this window you can select the type of sectional properties you want to define by clicking on the
RCC or Steel option.
SECTION ID - Struds automatically assigns an identification number to every section you define.
NAME - You can give any name to the each of the sectional properties. By default
Struds assumes names sec1, sec2, and sec3. etc. If you want to provide any other name, you can
overwrite the default name after giving the section dimensions.
SECTION TYPES - Struds displays two options for this. One RCC section and another is Steel Section.
When you select RCC Section Struds will display following dialog box
SECTION SHAPE - Struds gives you the drop down from where you can select the required section
shape.
When you select the shape of section, Struds asks for corresponding input. For example for
rectangular section, you are asked to provide the width and depth. For Circular Section, you are
asked to give the diameter.
In case of L and T sections, if you specify the web width and web depth, Struds will automatically find
out the thickness of flange and width of flange from the data of connecting slabs when you attach
the section to an element.
On the right side of the `Section Define' window buttons are available to invoke different options.
ADD - Click this option to save the section properties if you have modified them.
MODIFY - Select this option to modify the section properties which you already defined.
REMOVE - You can delete any section available by selecting it and clicking on this option.
APPLY TO BEAM - Click this option to apply the selected material to the beam.
APPLY TO COLUMN - Click on this option to apply the material to columns.
CLOSE - Click on close option to close the window.
ADD TO CUSTOM SECTIONS - By using this option, you can create your own library of different
sections. After defining a section, select it and click on this option. The created section will be saved
and can be used for future building projects.
LOAD CUSTOM SECTION - When you start a new project and want to access the Custom sections,
which you had added to your library, you can load them to the new project just by clicking on "Load
Custom Sections". After using this option, all the sections from your library will be made available in
the sections list.
CLOSE - Click on this button to close the window.
Select the name of any defined section and then click on this option to see the various sectional
properties automatically computed by Struds from its dimensions. When you select this option,
Struds displays following window.
Following fields are available in this window indicating different sectional properties.
A - Cross sectional area
Iyy - Moment of Inertia about Y-axis
Izz - Moment of Inertia about Z-axis

Iyz - Moment of inertia about X axis (in YZ plane)
J - Torsional Constant
SFXZ - Shape Factor in XZ plane
SFXY - Shape Factor in XY plane
DSHY -Deformed shape factor in Y axis
DSHZ -Deformed shape factor in Z-axis.
NOTE - By default Struds always calculates the torsional properties of every section. Sometimes
(specially in case of beam design by GRID method) you may want not to consider the effect of
torsion. In such case you can overwrite the torsional constant as one and proceed for analysis and
design.
When you select the section type as Steel Section then you will get following dialog box
LIBRARY - When you select this option Strud will open one dialog box which gives you the verious
sections, as given below
From this you can select the necessary sections.
Rest of the options is same as for RCC sections.
You can choose this option to define section.
3.1.7.2.3 CREATE - BUILDING - ATTACH – FLAT SLAB SECTION
Using this option you can assign the default sectional properties or sections to different elements in
case of a flat slab building. On selection of this option, Struds attach the default flat slab section
normally calculated as depth equal to depth of slab and width of beam equal to half the span of slab.
3.1.8 CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS
This option offers you the utility to define the support conditions for the modeled geometry,
depending upon the structure type, which is to be analysed. It also offers the facility to release the
member end actions as well as define the Master Slave relationship.
The sub options present have been listed below, which are then discussed in detail, in the respective
topics.
CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - SUPPORT

CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - MASTER SLAVE
CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - RELEASE
CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - RELEASE REPORT
3.1.8.1 CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - SUPPORT
This option enables you to define the support conditions at the nodes. The support conditions need
to be defined separately, for every structure type. Depending upon the structure type, for which the
support conditions are to be defined, you can choose any of the following sub options.
CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - SUPPORT - PLANE GRID

CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - SUPPORT - PLANE FRAME
CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - SUPPORT - SPACE FRAME
3.1.8.1.1 CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - SUPPORT - PLANE GRID
This option allows you to define the support conditions for the Plane Grid structure type. When you
select this option, Struds displays following screen.
Towards the left of this window, you have a splitter, which enlists the various options, using which
you can impose the boundary conditions, for the Plane Grid structure. In the central portion of this
window, the geometrical layout of the current floor is displayed.
You can set the current floor, by using the combo box, available at the top left, of this window. Every
time, the floor level, in this combo box is changed, the floor plan at the selected level will be
displayed in the central portion of this window. You can apply boundary conditions, to any node, on
the current floor, using the support option.
When this view is opened, all the other menu options would be disabled, other than the display
related options. These would be enabled, only if you end this command, using the close button, in
the splitter.
In the splitter window, towards the top, there is a drop down menu that displays the list of already
defined boundary groups. You can select the boundary group you want to attach or detach from this
list. The check boxes for following options are available below this drop down window that indicate
the properties of the boundary group you have selected from the drop down menu.
U - Displacement about X-axis
V - Displacement about Y-axis
W - Displacement about Z-axis
Rx - Rotation about X-axis
Ry - Rotation about Y-axis
Rz - Rotation about z-axis
However, only those checkboxes, corresponding to the displacements relevant to the Structure type
would be highlighted. As such, when the support conditions are to be defined for the Plane Grid,
only the check boxes, pertaining to 'W', 'Rx', and 'Ry' would be activated. Following buttons are
available to modify the group properties and their definition.
DEFINE GROUP
This option allows you to define a new boundary group. When you select this option, Struds displays
following window.
Struds automatically takes up an identification number to the new group you want to define. At the
left the icons for standard support conditions such as Fixed, Hinged, Horizontal Roller and Vertical
Roller are available. Select the icon as per your requirement. If you want to specify a support
condition different from these, click on the icon for ùser' to specify user defined support condition.
Click on the check boxes to specify the properties of the boundary group. Then select ÒK' button to
define the group. Now this group will be available in the list of the drop down menu and can be
attached to any node.
EDIT GROUP
This option allows you to modify the properties of an already defined boundary group. First select
the group you want to modify from the list in the drop down menu and then click on the Edit Group
button. Struds again displays the window for boundary group define. You can modify the properties
by selecting appropriate icons or check boxes. Click on OK button when over.
DELETE GROUP
By using this option you can remove the boundary group from the defined list. First select the group
you want to delete from the list in the drop down menu and then click on the Delete Group button.
ADD NODE
By using this option you can attach a defined boundary Group to a node. First select the boundary
Group you want to attach from the drop down menu. A box cursor appears on the screen. Select the
nodes you want to attach this boundary group to, by cursor one by one. Struds highlights the nodes
where this boundary group is attached.
DELETE NODE
By using this option you can remove the support conditions (Boundary Group) from a node. First
select the boundary Group you want to remove from the drop down menu. A box cursor appears on
the screen. Select the nodes you want to detach this boundary group by cursor one by one.
CHANGE SUPPORT
This option allows you to change the support conditions at any node. When you select this option, a
box cursor appears on the screen. Select the node at which you want to modify the support
conditions. Struds displays following window.
In this window Struds displays the existing support conditions at the selected node. You can change
any of the properties by selecting appropriate check boxes. Click on Òk' button when over. If you do
not want to change the support conditions, click on the `Cancel' button.
CLOSE
This option allows you to end this command, close the screen for support options, and again opens
the floor view.
3.1.8.1.2 CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - SUPPORT - PLANE FRAME
This option is similar to the one described above. However, using this option, you can define the
boundary conditions, for the Plane Frame structure type.
To attach the constraints to the Plane Frames, select the Plane Frame, using the combo box available
at the top of the Floor view. Once the selected Plane frame is displayed, click this option. This will
open the screen as has been displayed below:
This window also has a splitter towards the left, which has all the options to attach different
boundary conditions to the Plane Frames. All the options are similar to the ones described above.
However, it must be remembered that in this view, only the checkboxes, pertaining to valid Plane
Frame support conditions, will be active here, that is only the U (Displacement about X axis), V
(Displacement about Y axis), and Rz (Rotation about z axis), will be active. All the other options are
similar to those that have been described above.
It must be remembered that all the options, apart from the display related ones would be
unavailable, until this command is active. Once you end this command, using the Close button, all
the other menu option would be available
3.1.8.1.3 CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - SUPPORT - SPACE FRAME
Using this option, you can assign the boundary conditions, to the nodes, in the modeled geometry,
for the Space Frame structure Type.
In this case, since the Space frame structure Type involves a three Dimensional consideration, the
boundary conditions can be attached to the nodes, floor wise.
On selecting this option, the screen shown below is displayed.
This window displays the floor plan of the current floor, towards the center. Towards the left of this
window, is a splitter, which enables you to attach the boundary condition to the nodes.
The options, in this Splitter are similar to the ones, which are described below, However, it must be
remembered that in this view, since the constraints can be imposed along all the six directions of
movement, all the six check boxes, will be activated in this view.
When you select this option to attach the boundary conditions for the Space Frame structure type,
another level called as the "Footing Level" is automatically added in the combo box, comprising the
floors available in the structure. When, you set the "Footing level" as the current floor level, the
screen will appear somewhat as shown below:
This view displays the plan of the footing nodes. By selecting this level, in the list of floors, you can
attach the selected boundary conditions, to the footing nodes, for the Space Frame structure type.
The "Footing Level", would be present in the list of available floors, only till this command, for
constraints are active. Once you end this command, by using the CLOSE option in the Splitter, this
level would be automatically deleted from the list of available floors, so that you cannot modify or
edit the geometry at this level.
It must be remembered that all the other menu options, apart from the ones related to display
would be unavailable, until this command is active. Once you end this command, using the Close
button, all the other menu option would be available.
3.1.8.2 CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - MASTER - SLAVE
This constraint is used to simulate the condition when there is wide column. Due to the presence of
the wide column the actual span of the beam is not the distance between the nodes but the distance
between the outer edge of the wide column. So when there are wide columns then the actual
stiffness of the beam will be more then when it is taken from node to node. On clicking Master-Slave
relation we get the following dialog box.
Before this we have to create nodes at the outer edge of the wide column. Then we select the main
column node and click on "Add Master". To add a Slave node, select a node from the Node List, and
click on the Add Slave button. The peripheral nodes, as well as any nodes lying within the periphery
of this Wide Column are to be selected as Slave nodes. After that we click on the "Accept" button to
create the Master-slave constraint between these two nodes
If want to remove the Master Slave relation ship, select the Master node from the list of Available
Master nodes, and click the option Remove Master. If you want to delete any slave node, click the
option Remove Slave. On doing, the text box, containing the list of slaves, changes to a drop down
list, in which you can select the Slaves, which you want to delete. This has been shown below.
To delete, the slave node, of any Master, select the Master node, from the list of Available Masters,
and then select the option "Remove Slave". Now from this drop down list of "Slaves of Master",
select the slave node, which is to be deleted. Facility for Multiple Selection is available here. Once
you have selected the Slave nodes, which are to be deleted, click on the 'Remove' option. Now click
the 'Accept' option.
3.1.8.3 CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - RELEASE
This option enables you to apply releases, to the elements on the current level, as well as the column
elements beneath the current level.
When you select this option, the view shown below is opened.
In this view, towards the right is displayed the geometry of the current floor level. Towards, the left,
are available various options, which enable the user to release any of end actions of the member, at
one or both the nodes. The releases conditions applied can also be displayed in the diagram.
Four buttons are provided in this view, which enable you to automatically release the respective end
actions, as described below, on click of the Accept button:
Pinned - Pinned: Releases Mx and My at the start and end node of the element
Fixed - Pinned: Releases Mx and My at the end node of the element
Pinned - Fixed: Releases Mx and My at the start node of the element
Fixed - Fixed: Restrains all the degrees of freedom at the start and end node of the element.
To apply the same release condition, to multiple elements, select the elements initially. The
elements can be selected using any of the three options:
1) Select Element: This option enables the user to select an element, using the cursor.
2) Select Gridline: If all the elements, wherein the releases are to be applied, lie along a single
gridline, this option can be conveniently used.
3) Select Column: This option enables the user to select a column element below the set floor level.
Once the elements are selected, using any of the above three methods, they are listed in the
Selected Elements list, which is displayed at the top.
If any of the elements need to be removed from this list, select these elements from the list, and
click the option Remove Elements From Selection.
Now apply the releases, by checking the check boxes, pertaining to the end actions, which are to be
released, at the first and the second node. Now click the Accept option. Once the releases are
applied, these release conditions are reflected in the figure shown towards the right, by the colour
change of those releases.
If the user desires to see the release conditions that are applied, click the option Display Releases.
The releases applied are displayed in the form of a regular hexagon, as shown below:
Each division of the hexagon represents a particular end action, as shown above. In representing the
release conditions, the division/divisions, corresponding to the end action / actions, which have
been released, is/are represented in the white color, whereas the other divisions retain the blue
color.
For example, the condition, Pinned - Pinned, that is having the moments, Mx and My released at
both the ends, is represented as shown below.
3.1.8.4 CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - RELEASES REPORT
This option is used to view the releases, which have been applied to the elements, in the form of a
HTML format. This menu has two sub options, which are used to view the release conditions, as
mentioned below:
CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - RELEASES REPORT - CURRENT LEVEL
CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - RELEASES REPORT - ENTIRE STRUCTURE
3.1.8.4.1 CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - RELEASES REPORT - CURRENT LEVEL

This option enables you to view the details of the elements at the current floor level, the nodes of
which have been released. The report displays in the HTML format, the identification number as well
as the degrees of freedom, which have been released at the first and second node of these
elements.
If the flag for the Unique I.D's is not switched ON, the I.D's displayed in this report, will represent the
Space Frame element, and node I.D's. However, if you switch on the flag for Unique I.D’s (Using the
option Display - Unique I.D's), the element and node I.D's, displayed in this report, will represent the
unique I.D's
3.1.8.4.2 CREATE - BUILDING - CONSTRAINTS - RELEASES REPORT - ENTIRE

STRUCTURE
This option enables you to view the details of the elements in the complete structure, the nodes of
which have been released. The report displays in the HTML format, the identification number as well
as the degrees of freedom that have been released at the first and second node of these elements.
Again in this report also, if the option for the Unique I.D's is switched ON, the Element and Node
I.D's displayed in this report, would correspond to the Space Frame I.D's, as against, if the flag is
switched ON, the I.D's would represent the unique I.D's.
3.1.9 CREATE - BUILDING - WALL
This menu option includes several sub options used to define, attach as well as detach the Wall
loads. These have been listed below:
CREATE - BUILDING - WALL - DEFINE

CREATE - BUILDING - WALL - ATTACH
CREATE - BUILDING - WALL – DETACH
3.1.9.1 CREATE - BUILDING - WALL - DEFINE
By using this option you can define the physical attributes of the wall so that it can be attached onto
a beam. Struds will automatically calculate the imposed load due to wall on the corresponding
beams. When you select this option, the program displays following window
The options available have been discussed below:
Add - You can click on this option after defining a new wall. You can type any name up to 8 digits for
the field provided for the Name. Type the thickness of wall and its height in their fields. There is a
drop-down menu for material types for wall such as BRK (Brick Masonry), Stone, RCC, Siporex, Solid
Concrete Blocks, Hollow Concrete Blocks etc. When you select any of these materials, its
corresponding density is automatically considered and is displayed in the field provided for density.
If you want to overwrite the value of density, you can do so by clicking in the field of Density and
typing your own value. After that you have to click on Add option, so that the wall which you have
defined will get Add.
Delete- If you want to delete any perticular wall then you can use this option. At the time of deleting
any wall you have to select that wall and then click on Delete option, so that the wall which you have
selected will get deleted.
Modify - If you want to modify any perticular wall then you can use this option. At the time of
modifying any wall you have to select that wall, then made the necessary changes and then click on
Modify option, so that the wall which you have selected will get modified.
If you have a wall with variable height you can define it just by checking the checkbox for variable
height in the above dialog box. On checking it the above dialog box changes to the following format.
Here we can define the height of the wall at different positions specified by A and B and then click on
"Define" to define the variable wall.
APPLY - Click on apply option to apply the wall to the geometry.
REMOVE - Click on Remove and then select the element and then click on right button of mouse to
remove the wall from the selected element.
CLOSE - Click on this button to close the window.
You can choose this option to define wall.

3.1.10 Scope Of Shear Wall
Special Features: -
1) Shear wall of Straight, L Shape and C Shape can be created depending on the shape of wall
and location of wall in Plan.
2) Wall of any size and thickness can be created, analysed and designed.
Limitations in creating Shear Walls: -
1) Mirror of shear walls is not possible.
2) Copy of shear walls on same floor is not possible.
3) Raft foundation cannot be provided to Shear wall building.
CREATE - BUILDING - SHEAR WALL- STRAIGHT

CREATE - BUILDING - SHEAR WALL- L TYPE
CREATE - BUILDING - SHEAR WALL- C TYPE
3.1.10.1 CREATE - BUILDING - SHEAR WALL - STRAIGHT
This option is used to define the Grid type of shear wall.
To generate a grid type of shear wall select this option first then you will have to select the two
nodes between which you want to create the shear wall. After defining the two nodes you will get a
dialog box in which you will have to fill the information regarding Wall name, Wall thickness, Wall
material.
Click OK button to create the wall and click Cancel button to cancel the command.
You can select this option to define straight shear wall.
3.1.10.2 CREATE - BUILDING - SHEAR WALL - L SHAPE
This option is used to define the L type (L Shape) of shear wall.
To generate an L Type of shear wall select this option first then you will have to select the three
nodes between which you want to create the shear wall and which will form the L shape shear wall.
After defining all three nodes you will get a dialog box in which you will have to fill the information
regarding Wall name, Wall thickness, Wall material.
You can select this option to define straight shear wall.
3.1.10.3 CREATE - BUILDING - SHEAR WALL - C SHAPE
This option is used to define the C type (C Shape) of shear wall.
To generate a C Type of shear wall select this option first then you will have to select four nodes
between which you want to create the shear wall and which will form the C shape shear wall. After
defining all four nodes you will get a dialog box in which you will have to fill the information
regarding Wall name, Wall thickness, Wall material.
You can select this option to define C Shape shear wall.
3.1.12 CREATE – PLANE TRUSS
This menu offers you several options for the creation of truss geometry.
The truss geometry can be created from an inbuilt library of trusses, supported by Struds, in which
case, the truss is said to be a predefined truss, or else, it can be actually created, element wise, as
shown below.
CREATE - PLANE TRUSS - PREDEFINED

CREATE - PLANE TRUSS - ELEMENTWISE
Both these methods have been discussed in greater detail below:
3.1.11.1 CREATE - PLANE TRUSS – PREDEFINED
This window shows list of Truss types on the left side and geometry on right side. Select your truss
type by clicking in the list and then click on OK button Struds will shows selected truss geometry of
the selected truss.
Then the following dialog box appears where we have to feed in the data pertaining to the Truss.
Here all the parameters are shown in the diagram for the convenience of the user.
After putting all the values we click on "OK". On clicking on OK the Truss gets drawn as shown below.
3.1.11.2 CREATE - PLANE TRUSS – ELEMENTWISE
Using this option, you can generate the truss geometry, element wise.
In Struds, every element, which is created, must belong to the group of either 'Rafter', 'Main tie',
'Struts', 'Kingpost' or the 'Queen'.
All these elements can be created by any one of the methods, described below:
TWO POINT
By using this option, you can define an element by specifying its both ends. The input asked by
Struds is
Ènter First Point of the Element':
Ènter Second Point of Element':
Similarly you can specify the X and Y co-ordinates of the second point with respect to origin. (Not
with respect to the first point).
POINT, DX, DY
By using this option, you can define an element by selecting the first point and giving X and Y co-
ordinates with respect to first point. Struds asks following input.
Ènter First Point of Element':
Ènter DX':
Here you can specify X distance of the second point with respect to first point.
Ènter DY':
Here you can specify Y distance of the second point with respect to first point.
POINT, ANGLE, LENGTH.
By using this option, you can define an element by selecting first point and giving the angle of the
element and distance of second point from first point.
Struds asks you following input.
Ènter first point of Element':
Ènter Angle':
Here you can type the angle of element such as 30, 45 degrees etc.
Ènter Length':
Here you should type the value for length of element.

4. MODIFY
Depending upon the modeled geometry, Struds offers two options to two different options to edit
the same.
MODIFY - BUILDING
MODIFY - TRUSS ELEMENT
Both these options have been discussed in greater detail, in the respective topics.
4.1 MODIFY - BUILDING
This menu option includes several sub options, which have been listed below, for the modification of
the building skeleton, as well as the various entities.
These have been discussed in detail, in the respective topics.
MODIFY - BUILDING - SKELETON

MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB
MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT
MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN
MODIFY - BUILDING – NODE
MODIFY - BUILDING - GRID LINE
MODIFY - BUILDING - SHEAR WALL
MODIFY - BUILDING – ALL
MODIFY - BUILDING – ENTITY
MODIFY - BUILDING - FOOTING LEVEL
DXF IMPORT - LAYER TABLE
4.1.1 MODIFY - BUILDING - SKELETON
This option is used to define the overall skeleton of the structure, which you want to model. On
clicking this option, the dialog box, as shown below appears:
This dialog box also appears, at the start, when you model a new BLD file. It has various fields, which
have been described in detail below.
No Of Floors: This field displays the total number of floors, which are present in the existing
structure.
Floor Description: This field is used to display the name of the floor.
Level Description: This field is used to display the name of the level in the floor (The level of the
floor denotes the height of the floor from the footing top).
Height Of the Floor: This field displays the height of the floor.
Level Of the Floor: This field displays the level of the floor.
At the bottom of this dialog box, is displayed a list, describing the details of all the floors, in the
structure. The Left Most column of this list displays the complete Floor description, in terms of the
Name of the Floor, as well as the name of the level, if any is associated with that floor, the Floor to
floor height, along with the level of the floor. As mentioned earlier, the level of any floor denotes the
height of that floor from the footing top.
The other options, present in this dialog box, include:
This option is activated, only once, when you generate the skeleton of the building
for the first time that is when you create a new BLD file. In this dialog box, if you define the number
of floors, to be greater than one, and you specify some value in the fields provided for "Height of the
Floor", and "Level of the Floor", then when you click this option, the building skeleton will
automatically be generated. In this the structure will have the number of floors, which have been
defined by you, at the onset, and all the floors, will have the same height, again taken up from the
parameters, which you have specified, in the beginning. Using this command, the level of any floor is
obtained as the summation of the height of the previous floor and the level of the previous floor.
This option offers, a very easy method to generate the entire skeleton of the building, using a single
click.
This option allows you to add a floor in the building. Enter the description of the floor,
and the level, which is to be added. Enter the value of the Height as well as the Level of the new
floor, which is to be added, and now click the Add option. Depending upon the level of this floor, the
floor, will either be added at the top (If the level of this floor is higher than the level of the last
previously defined floor), or will be inserted, in between two floors.
This option is used of you want to Modify the details of any of the Floors, which are
present in the structure. You can modify the Floor Description, the Level Description, Height, as well
as the Level of any Floor. Click on the name of the Floor, whose details are to be modified, in the list
below. This name of this floor will now be highlighted, in the list below. The details of this floor will
at the same time be displayed in all the text boxes, which appear above. Make the necessary
modifications, in any of these fields, and click the Modify option. On doing this, the details, of this
floor would be modified.
This option is used to delete a particular floor. Select the name of the floor, which is to
be deleted, in the list of floors, which is shown below. Now click the Delete option. This will delete
the highlighted floor.
This option allows you to copy the floor plan geometry from one floor to another. This
option can be used to generate more than one floor with same plan geometry by drawing only one
floor. Thus you can make a number of copies of a typical floor plan. You can then open any of these
floor plans by using VIEW - FLOOR PLAN - SET FLOOR option and modify the geometry as per your
requirement. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
This dialog box has two drop down menus. The Top drop down menu, called as the "Source Floor",
as well as the Bottom drop down menu, called as the "Destination floor", both contain a list of all the
available floors, which are present in the building.
In this dialog box, select the source floor that is the floor, from which you want to copy the floor
geometry. In the "Destination Floors" drop down, select all the floors, onto which you want to copy
the geometry from the "Source Floor". Multiple selections are available for selecting multiple
numbers of floors, in the Destination List.
When you click the OK button, the source floor geometry would be copied to the destination floor /
floors. If any the destination floors already have some entities, they will be over written by the data
from the source floor.
This option is used to define a Level in an existing floor. To add a level, select the
floor in which you want to add a Level, by clicking on the name of the floor, in the drop down list,
and then select this option. On clicking this, it displays the dialog box, as shown below:
Enter the name of the level, as well as the height of the level, and then click on the Ok button. This
level would now be added to the floor. It would also be added in the list of floors, which are
displayed, in the list below.
4.1.2 MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB
This menu option is used primarily to modify the attributes of slabs, as well as to copy and mirror the
slabs. It has several sub menu options, which have been discussed below:
MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - DELETE

MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - COPY
MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - MULTIPLE COPY
MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB – MIRROR
MODIFY-BUILDING-SLAB-MOVE
MODIFY-BUILDING-SLAB-MOVE SLAB WITH ENTITIES
MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - PROPERTIES
MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - MULTIPLE SLABS
MODIFY – BUILDING – SLAB - CONVERT TO DUCT
MODIFY – BUILDING – SLAB – REGENERATE SLAB ID’S
All these options have been discussed in further detail, in their respective topics.
4.1.2.1 MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - DELETE
This option enables you to delete one or more slabs on the current level.
This option remains activated, in the floor plan view.
To delete the slab, on any level, set that floor level initially, using the combo boxes provided towards
the top left.
When you click this option, a box cursor appears on screen, which enables you to select the slabs,
which are to be deleted. You can also use the Window selection method, for quick selection of the
slabs, which are to be deleted.
The response by Struds is as follows.
`Select Slabs<Right Button When Over>. Press A for All’:

Select the slab/ slabs, which are to be deleted. If all the slabs are to be deleted, press the
button 'A'. The selected slabs, will be highlighted,
Once you have finished, click the right button of your mouse. On doing this, Struds displays a
message asking for the confirmation, whether, you would like to delete all the slabs, which are
highlighted. If you select the 'Yes' button, here, all the selected slabs, would be deleted. On the
other hand, if you would not like to proceed with the deletion of the selected slabs, you can click the
'No' option.
In this command, all the elements and nodes connected to this slab and not connected to any other
slab, elements or columns are also deleted automatically by Struds.
You can select this icon to delete the slab.
4.1.2.2 MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - COPY
This option allows you to copy one or more slabs, on the current floor. From one place to other
place. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. The response by Struds is as
follows.
`Select Slabs' <Right Button When Over>: Press A for all
You can select the slabs, which are to be copied using the cursor, one by one, by clicking the left
button of the mouse. The selected slabs are highlighted by Struds. Once your selection is over, click
the right button of the mouse. If you want to select all the slabs for copying, just press A from
keyboard. Struds will automatically select all the slabs for copying.
Another way of selecting the slabs is by using the window option. To use this option, select the
icon by mouse, and create a window by selecting two diagonal points by mouse. The slabs
that are fully inside this window are selected by Struds for copying. The slabs partially covered by
this window are not selected. Click the right button of the window to indicate that the selection by
window is over. Struds then displays following command.
`Select Base Point'
You should specify the reference point of the selected slab(s) by locating it by mouse. The reference
point should be any of the corners of any of the selected slabs. You can also specify this node by
using F8 /F9 key or using snap mode by pressing F2 key.
`Select Other Point’:
You should specify the point where you want to insert the copied slab(s). This point can be specified
by any of the following ways.
By clicking mouse at the point where you want to copy the slab(s).
By specifying the node by pressing F8/F9 keys.
By using any of the snap mode options by pressing F2 key.
Struds then copies the slabs and displays them on the screen. All the properties of slab such as
dimensions, material, thickness, loading etc. are also copied in to two. Struds also automatically
gives the numbers to copied slabs, elements and nodes.
Using this method, you can copy the slabs from one floor, to another floor. For this, first set the
floor, from which the slabs are to be copied, select the slab(s) to be copied, select the base reference
point, on this floor, then change the floor, using the combo box provided, at the top left of the
screen,
You can select this icon present on toolbar to copy the slab.
NOTE - When the slabs are copied, the supporting elements / beams are also generated by Struds.
But it does not copy the properties of elements from source to destination. If you want that the
elements should also be copied with their properties along with the slabs, then use the MODIFY -
BUILDING - ALL - COPY option.
4.1.2.3 MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - COPY - MULTIPLE COPY
This option enables you to create Multiple copies of a single slab, using a single command. This
option may be extremely useful to generate extremely quickly geometry, which is in the form of a
symmetrical grid.
To use this option, select the slab, which is to be copied, using the cursor, which appears, when you
select this option. On doing this, the dialog box, as shown below is displayed.
This dialog box has four fields, as described below:
No Of Rows: Input the number of rows, in which the selected slab is to be copied
No Of Columns: Input the number of columns, in which the selected slab is to be copied
X Distance: Input the horizontal distance, which is to be maintained between two adjacent slabs,
once the selected slab has been copied.
Y Distance: Input the vertical distance, which is to be maintained between two adjacent slabs, once
the selected slab has been copied.
In the diagrammatic view shown above, the No Of Rows is chosen as 3, the No: of Columns is
chosen as 2, the X distance is taken as 1 meter, and the Y distance is taken as 0.5 meter.
On clicking the OK option, the geometry which is created on that floor, is shown below:
Using this option, however, you can create multiple copies of a single slab only.
You can select this icon for multiple copy of slab.
4.1.2.4 MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - MIRROR
By using this option you can create a mirror image of all or selected slab panels about any axis.
When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. The response from Struds is as
follows.
You can move the cursor onto the slab you want to make mirror of and click the left button of the
mouse. If you want to select more than one slab, select those slabs one by one by cursor. Struds
highlights the slabs selected by you. Once your selection is over, click the right button of the mouse.
If you want to select all the slabs for mirror, just press A from keyboard. Struds will automatically
select all the slabs.
icon in the tool bar using the mouse, and create a window by selecting two diagonal points by
mouse. The slabs that are fully inside this window are selected by Struds. The slabs partially covered
by this window are not selected. Click the right button of the window to indicate that the selection
by window is over. Struds then displays following command.
`Type Mirror Line Axis X or Y':
Here you should type either X or Y for the axis about which you want to create the mirror image. The
response from Struds is as follows.
`Select /Type Point to Define Mirror Axis':
Here you specify any point, which lies on the axis of mirror. This point can also be a node which you
can select by cursor or by using F8 /F9 keys. You can also use the snap mode option by pressing F2
key to specify the point on this axis.
Struds then displays the mirror image of the slabs you have selected.
For example, if you want to create the mirror image of the slabs shown below:
Select these slabs initially, and then type the mirror axis. For the mirror axis chosen as the Y axis, the
point defining the mirror axis, is taken as node number 3, and the offset distance chosen as 0
meters, in both the X and Y direction, the generated geometry is shown below.
You can select this icon to mirror slab.
4.1.2.5 MODIFY-BUILDING-SLAB-MOVE
This option allows you to move the slab from one possition to another one. When you select this
option, a box cursor appears on the screen. The response from Struds is as follows.
You can move the cursor onto the slab you want to move and click the left button of the mouse. If
you want to select more than one slab, select those slabs one by one by cursor. Struds highlights the
slabs selected by you. Once your selection is over, click the right button of the mouse. If you want to
select all the slabs for move, just press A from keyboard. Struds will automatically select all the slabs.
icon in the tool bar using the mouse, and create a window by selecting two diagonal points by
mouse. The slabs that are fully inside this window are selected by Struds. The slabs partially covered
by this window are not selected. Click the right button of the window to indicate that the selection
by window is over. Struds then displays following command.
`Select base point':
Here you should either type the co-ordinates of base point or left click on point. The response from
Struds is as follows.
`Select second point':
Here again you should either type the co-ordinates of second point or left click on point. The
Struds then displays the move image of the slabs you have selected.
For example, if you want to move the slabs shown below:
Select these slabs initially, and then type or select the base points about which you have to move the
selected slab. After that slab will get move and the generated geometry is shown below.
You can select this icon to mirror slab.

4.1.2.6 MODIFY-BUILDING-SLAB-MOVE SLAB WITH ENTITIES
By using this option you can move the slab with all the entities attached to that slab , for example
columns, shear wall, etc.
For that you have to follow the same procedure which is used to move the slab.
Select this icon to move the slab with entities.
4.1.2.7 MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - PROPERTIES
By using this option you can change the properties of any one slab. When you select this option, a
box cursor appears on the screen. The response from Struds is as follows.
`Select the Slab to Edit':
You should select the slab of which you want to modify the properties by moving cursor onto the
slab and clicking left button of mouse. If the selected slab is not a general slab, Struds displays the
dialog box for the Slab Properties for the selected slab, as shown below.
You can overwrite the properties of the slab such as Load Transfer, Thickness, Density, Material, and
Loads etc. and click OK button. The modified properties of slab are saved by Struds.
However, if the slab selected is a General slab, the dialog box as shown below, is displayed
Using this dialog box, you can modify all the attributes of the General slab, selected. Since the load
distribution in a General slab, varies from that of the other slabs, and is done by the 'C.G Calculation
Method' or the 'Element Length Method', this dialog box, enables, you to toggle between only these
two methods of load distribution for the General Slab. Again, in the General slab, you cannot apply
any additional Point Loads or Line Loads, as in the other slabs.
You can select this icon to edit the slab properties.
4.1.2.8 MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - MULTIPLE SLABS
By using this option you can change the properties of more than one slab in one stroke. When you
select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. The response from Struds is as follows.
`Select Slabs<Right Button When Over>' Press A for All:
You should select the slabs of which you want to modify the properties by moving cursor onto the
slabs and clicking left button of mouse. Struds displays the following window.
You can overwrite the properties of the slab such as Load Transfer, Thickness, Density, Material, and
Loads etc. and click OK button. These properties are assigned to all the selected slabs irrespective of
their previous attributes. The modified properties of these slabs are saved by Struds.
If using the multiple slab edit command, only general slabs are selected for editing, it displays the
dialog box as shown below, wherein the load distribution details are shown for the general slabs,
that is either by the Element Length method, or the C.G method. However, If using the Multiple slab
edit command, some of the slabs selected for edition are either Rectangular/ Triangular or
Trapezoidal, and some of the slabs are general slabs, the dialog box, as shown above will be
displayed, wherein the load distribution will be affected only for the rectangular slabs and the
trapezoidal slabs.
In this dialog box, all properties, which can be edited, are as described above. However, in this case,
the load Transfer Type is replaced by the option "C.G calculation method" or "Element Length
Method". The user can select any of the options, for transfer of loads to the peripheral elements of
the general slabs. Again, in this case, if the user opts for Load distribution using the C.G method, and
if it cannot be done for any one of the general, it will display the following message:
And the load distribution pattern for this slab will be automatically set to the Element Length
Method.
You can select this icon to edit multiple slab properties.

4.1.2.9 MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - CONVERT TO DUCT
By using this option you can convert any slab to duct. To select this option path is given below.
After selecting slab to be converted to duct right click the mouse button.
After clicking the right button of mouse that particular slabs will be deleted and duct will be formed.
Select this icon to convert the slab to duct.
4.1.2.10 MODIFY - BUILDING - SLAB - REGENERATE SLAB ID
By using this option you can regenerate the slab ID's. If in case you have same ID's to different slabs
that time Struds will not allow you to delete those slabs as well save this building. In such particular
case use this option to regenerate the slab ID's.
You have to give this command for all floors separately to come up of the error.
4.1.3 MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT
This menu option is used to edit the properties of the elements, as well as to perform Copy and
Mirror operations.
This has several sub menu options, which have been enlisted below:
MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - DELETE

MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT – COPY
MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT – MOVE
MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - MOVE ELEMENT WITH ENTITY
MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - MIRROR
MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - CONVERT TO EDGE / BEAM
MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - MARK / UNMARK CANTILEVER
MODIFY - BUILDING – ELEMENT – DROP DEPTH FROM FLOOR LEVEL
MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - RENUMBER ELEMENTS
MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - REMOVE ZERO LENGTH ELEMENTS
All these options have been discussed in greater detail, in the respective topics.
4.1.3.1 MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - DELETE
You can use this option to delete an element. The response by Struds is as follows.
`Select the Element to be deleted':
A box cursor appears on the screen. You can move this cursor along the element to be deleted and
click the mouse. Struds will delete the selected element.
You can also use the window selection to select multiple elements for deletion. To use the window
option, click the option, and select the rectangular area, comprising of the elements, which
are to be deleted. All the elements, which completely lie in this area, would be deleted. Struds would
not delete the elements, which lie partially in the area covered by the window. The nodes connected
to this element and not connected to any other slab, element or column are also deleted
automatically. It should be noted that you couldn’t delete the element or beam, which is supporting
a slab. This option is used to delete any element, which is not the lying along the boundary of any
slab, for example, an element that surrounds a duct.
You can select this icon to delete elements.
4.1.3.2 MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - COPY
This option allows you to copy one or more elements from one place to other place. When you
select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. The response by Struds is as follows.
`Select Elements' <Right Button When Over>: Press A for all
You can move the cursor along the element you want to copy and click the left button of the mouse.
If you want to copy more than one element, select those elements one by one by cursor. Struds
highlights the elements selected by you. Once your selection is over, click the right button of the
mouse. If you want to select all the elements in the plan for copying, just press A from keyboard.
Struds will automatically select all the elements for copying.
Another way of selecting the elements is by using the window option. To use this option, select the
icon by mouse, and create a window by defining two diagonal corners by mouse. The
elements that are fully inside this window are selected by Struds for copying. The elements partially
covered by this window are not selected. Click the right button of the window to indicate that the
selection by window is over. Struds then displays following command.
`Select The Point to Copy From'
You should specify the reference point of the selected elements by locating it by mouse. The
reference point should be any of the nodes of any of the selected elements. You can also specify this
node by using F8 /F9 key or using snap mode by pressing F2 key.
`Select the Point to Copy To’:
You should specify the point where you want to insert the copied element(s). This point can be
specified by any of the following ways.
By clicking mouse at the point.
Struds then copies the elements and displays them on the screen. All the properties of element such
as section, material, imposed loads etc. are also copied in to. Struds also automatically gives the
numbers to copied elements and nodes.
You can select this icon to copy the element.

4.1.3.3 MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - MOVE
This option allows you to move one or more elements.. When you select this option, a box cursor
appears on the screen. The response by Struds is as follows.
`Select Elements' <Right Button When Over>:
You can move the cursor along the element you want to mirror and click the left button of the
mouse. If you want to copy more than one element, select those elements one by one by cursor.
Struds highlights the elements selected by you. Once your selection is over, click the right button of
the mouse.
icon by mouse, and create a window by selecting two diagonal points by mouse. The elements
that are fully inside this window are selected by Struds. The elements partially covered by this
window are not selected. Click the right button of the window to indicate that the selection by
`Select the Base point':
Here you should either type the co-ordinate of base point about which you have to move the
element. The response from Struds is as follows.
`Select /Type Point second point':
Here you specify the other point to move the element. This point can also be a node which you can
select by cursor Struds then displays the moved image of the elements you have selected as shown
below:
You can choose this icon to move the element
4.1.3.4 MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - MOVE ELEMENT WITH ENTITIES
This option allows you to move the element with all the entities attached to that element, for
example columns, shear wall, etc.When you select this option, The response by Struds is as follows.
`Select Elements' <Right Button When Over>:
the mouse.
`Select the Base point':
Here you should either type type the co-ordinate of base point about which you have to move the
element. The response from Struds is as follows.
`Select /Type Point second point':
Here you specify the other point to move the element. This point can also be a node which you can
select by cursor Struds then displays the moved image of the elements you have selected .
Select this option to move the element with entities.
4.1.3.5 MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - MIRROR
This option allows you to create a mirror image of one or more elements. When you select this
option, a box cursor appears on the screen. The response by Struds is as follows.
`Select Elements' <Right Button When Over>: Press A for all
the mouse. If you want to select all the elements in the plan for making mirror, just press A from
keyboard. Struds will automatically select all the elements.
Here you specify any point that lies on the axis of mirror. This point can also be a node which you
Struds then displays the mirror image of the elements you have selected.
You can choose this option to mirror element
4.1.3.6 MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - CONVERT TO EDGE / BEAM
This is used to convert the beam element into an edge element, and vice versa. That is, using this
option, if a previous element is a beam element, it will be converted into an Edge element and on
the other hand, if you select an element, which is an Edge element, this option will convert it into a
beam element.
This option to convert a beam element, into an edge element, is generally used, when you want to
model a slab, wherein beam elements, are not present along all the edges. In such a case using the
above option we convert those peripheral slab elements, where beams are actually not present into
edge elements.
When you convert a beam element, into an edge element, this element is highlighted, in green, as
shown below.
You can switch off the display of the edge elements, using the option DISPLAY - EDGE ELEMENTS.
However, by default, this flag will be automatically set to the ON position, when you use this option.
4.1.3.7 MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - MARK / UNMARK CANTILEVER
This utility is provided to convert any of the beam elements, at the selected floor level into
Cantilever elements, and vice versa. That is, on using this option, an element, which was previously
not marked as a cantilever, will be converted into a cantilever, and on the other hand, the element,
which is already a cantilever element, can be deprived of its Cantilever status
The conversion of an element, into a Cantilever element, is used for the consideration of vertical
earthquake forces, in the design of these elements.
Click on this option and select the element, which is to be marked as a Cantilever, by locating it using
the mouse cursor. Select the supporting node of the cantilever element. On conversion, the Display
Cantilever flag is automatically set to on position, and both the Cantilever Element as well as its
Support Node will appear blue, as shown below.
4.1.3.8 MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - DROP DEPTH FROM FLOOR

LEVEL
This function is used to change the beam level for detailing purpose. If in case any beam is required
at lower level that time you can use this command.
After selecting this option select the element which you want to drop from default level.
On right clicking the mouse button you will get following dialog box.
Enter the value of drop. Click on OK button. In 3D view also you will get this drop reflected.
In beam DXF file the detailing will change accordingly.

4.1.3.9 MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - RENUMBER ELEMENTS
This option is used to renumber the nodes, beam, column and inclined elements at a selected floor
level. On selecting this option, the dialog box shown below appears. This option remains active, only
if the flag for displaying the Unique ID's is set to the ON position (DISPLAY - UNIQUE ID's).
A drop down menu is available for selection of the floor level at which renumbering of the entities is
to be done.
The following options are available for renumbering of the entities.
RENUMBER ENTITIES
RENUMBER ENTITY (NODES/BEAMS/COLUMNS/INCLINED ELEMENTS IN THE VERTICAL

PLANE) ALL
If this option is selected, all the entities (Nodes/Beams at the selected floor level or
Columns/Inclined elements, below the selected floor level) will be renumbered using the start
number as specified in the edit box for Start no of the entities.

PLANE) SELECTED
By choosing this option, the selected entities (Nodes/Beams at the selected floor level or
Columns/Inclined elements, below the selected floor level) can be renumbered, by manually
specifying the new identification numbers for each of the selected entities.

PLANE) ALL AND SELECTED
If the options 'RENUMBER ENTITY' as well as 'RENUMBER ENTITY SELECTED' are both chosen, the
selected entities (Nodes/Beams at the selected floor level or Columns/Inclined elements, below the
selected floor level), can be renumbered using the start number as specified in the edit box for Start
no of entities.
SELECTION OF ENTITIES TO BE RENUMBERED
The entities that are to be renumbered can be selected using any one of the following methods:
1) LOCATE
In this method, the entities can be selected by using the mouse for selection. The entity lying within
the aperture box will be selected for renumbering
2) GRID
In this method, if the entities to be renumbered are located along a particular grid, they can be
selected by using this method and clicking on that grid.
3) RANGE
In this method, the entities lying within a specific number range can be renumbered. The increment
for the entity numbers can be specified using the 'Step' option.
4) WINDOW
The entities to be renumbered can be selected using the window option.
SEQUENCE OF RENUMBERING
SELECT RENUMBERING ORDER
This option allows you to decide the sequence of renumbering the entities.
The sequence of renumbering can be selected by clicking on any one of the options shown above.
Struds renumbers all the selected entities as per the sequence specified by you.
CHECK UNIQUE I.D'S
This option displays the complete details, pertaining to the identification number (Space Frame I.D
and Unique I.D) as well as the location of all the entities, which have a common unique I.D.
4.1.3.10 MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - REMOVE ZERO LENGTH

ELEMENTS
This function is used to delete all the zero length elements, which may have been created, while
modeling the structure. If these elements are not deleted, the analysis will not be completed
successfully because of the presence of these zero length elements.
If you want to know, whether any zero length elements have been created in the structure, you can
use the option ANALYSIS - PREANALYSIS ENQUIRY. This will give you a list of zero length elements, if
any have been created.
4.1.4 MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN
This option is used to make modifications related to columns, in the modeled geometry. This has the
following sub options, as have been listed below:
MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - DELETE

MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN – DELETE COLUMN WITH NODE
MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - ORIENT
MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - GROUP
MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - REGENERATE
MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - GET SIZES FROM DESIGN
MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN – OFFSET (SELECT / UNSELECT)
All these options have been discussed in detail, in the relevant topics.
4.1.4.1 MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - DELETE
This option allows you to delete any of the existing columns in the plan geometry. When you select
this option a box cursor appears on the screen. You can delete a column in any of the following
ways. Struds displays following command at the command line.
Ènter a point’:
Now you can delete the column by any of the following methods.
By clicking mouse on the node where the column is located.

By specifying X and Y co-ordinates of the node on which the column is located with respect to origin.
Specifying the location of column with respect to an existing node by pressing F8 or F9 keys.
You can choose this icon to delete column.
4.1.4.2 MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - DELETE COLUMN WITH NODE
This option allows you to delete any of the existing columns with node to which that particular
column is attached in the plan geometry. When you select this option a box cursor appears on the
screen. You can delete a column with its node in any of the following ways. Struds displays following
command at the command line.
Ènter a point’:
Now you can delete the column by any of the following methods.
By clicking mouse on the node where the column is located.
By specifying X and Y co-ordinates of the node on which the column is located with respect to origin.
You can choose this icon to delete column with node.

4.1.4.3 MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - ORIENT
This option allows you to modify the sizes of columns and change their orientation. When you select
this option, Struds displays following screen, as shown below.
In this view, the plan of the current floor is displayed towards the centre of the window. Towards the
left of this window, there is a splitter, wherein there are numerous options, to change the shape,
size as well as the orientation of the columns, as well as to move the column.
To view the floor plan, at any floor, set that floor, using the combo box, provided at the top left, to
change the floor levels.
When, you select this option, all the other options, apart from the display related options are
inactive. These options will be activated, only when you close this view, using the CLOSE option
available at the bottom of the splitter.
Towards the top of the Splitter window, icons as shown below are displayed.
These icons can be used to flush the columns with respect to connecting beams. The flushing effect
shall be taken into account while preparing centerline diagrams and key plans of every floor. The
icons are self explanatory for flushing types. To flush a column, first click on the `Select Column'
button. A box cursor appears on the screen. Select the column by the cursor. Struds highlights the
selected column. Now click on the icons for flushing and see the graphical representation on screen.
NOTE - While analysing a structure, Struds assumes that the columns are centrally loaded. The
additional eccentricity moments due to flushing are not considered by the program. So for designing,
Struds takes minimum eccentricity as per IS code. You can change the value of eccentricity if you
want.
Flush X
Select this option when the beams along X-axis connecting a column are having different widths and
you want to flush the column with one of these beams. To use this option, first select the column,
select this option and click on the flush buttons to visualise the flushing on screen.
Flush Y
Select this option when the beams along Y-axis connecting a column are having different widths and
you want to flush the column with one of these beams. To use this option, first select the column,
select this option and click on the flush buttons to visualise the flushing on screen.
Rotate
This option allows you to rotate a column along the axis of connected beams. To use this option, first
click on the `Select Column ' button. A box cursor appears on the screen. Select the column by the
cursor. Struds highlights the selected column. Click any where on the screen. Now press the Ènter'
key from the keyboard repeatedly to see the rotation of column along beam axis.
Select Column
When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. You can select any column by the
cursor to change its size, orientation or flushing.
Select Multi Column

This option is used when we want to select more than one column to change the orientation. When
we use this option and then choose the columns, the chosen columns turn blue. All the columns
starting and ending at the same level can only be selected together.
Rotate by 90
This option should be used after the columns are selected by the above option. On using it the
selected columns rotate by 90 degrees.
Move Column
This option can be used to move a column along the axis of connecting beams. When you select this
option Struds displays following window.
Type the value of X and Y offset in the fields to specify the distance by which you want to move the
column. The sign for left (along X) and below (for Y) should be negative. When you move a column,
the effect in the drawings and centerline diagram is taken by Struds automatically. However, the
extra moments due to eccentricity are not considered for analysis.
Shape & Size
Click on this button to see or modify the sizes of columns in the selected group. When you select the
option for rectangular columns, Struds displays following window.
If your building has Circular columns, then on selecting the circular columns we get the following
dialog box, wherein the diameter of the column needs to be specified.
If the option for 'L' shaped columns is selected, the following dialog box will be displayed, wherein
the dimensions for Total Depth 'D', Width of the section 'b', Thickness of flange 'tf', and the
Thickness of the web 'tw' need to be assigned.
On choosing the 'T' shape option, the following dialog box is displayed. The breadth of the flange 'bf',
total depth of the section 'D', thickness of the flange 'tf', and thickness of the web 'tw' need to be
specified.
For all the above options, the dialog box shows the floor & level number and size of column at that
level in the window. Below this the fields to specify the dimensions of the column are present. To
modify the sizes of the column of a particular floor, select that floor by mouse and type the new
values of the section dimensions in the fields provided. Click on the save button. Struds changes the
dimensions and shows it in the window. You can also use the ÀUTOSIZE' option to modify the
column sizes. To use this option, first select the floor 1 and put on the option of ÀUTOSIZING' by
clicking the check box. You can now specify the minimum dimension in the field and the increment
in size. You can also specify whether you want the increment along the width, depth or both sides by
clicking on to the appropriate radio button. If you want to provide constant column size for all floors,
give the value of increment as zero or click on the constant radio button. You can also specify the
interval of increment in the field provided for Ìncrement After' field. Click on the save button. Struds
automatically assigns the sizes to column at all floors as per the parameters specified by you and
shows them in the window.
Save
Click on this button to save the change in the column sizes of the selected group.
Close
Click on this button to close the window.

Click this button to activate column orient command.
4.1.4.4 MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - GROUP
You can group the columns having same sizes and orientation at all floors by using this option.
Providing column sizes and orientation will be easy for large number of columns in the building.
When you specify the size to a column group, all the columns in that group shall have the specified
size and orientation. When you select this option Struds displays following screen.
When you choose this option, the screen shown below appears.
Towards the left of the screen, is a splitter window, which constitutes, the various options, which
entail you to group the columns. Towards the central portion of this window, the floor plan
geometry of the current floor is visible. You can change the current floor, by using the combo box,
which is provided at the top left corner of the screen. This combo box contains a list of all the floors,
which are currently present in the BLD file. You can select any floor from this combo box, and set
that as the current floor.
In this view, the Column number (For example C1, C2, C3...), as well as the Group Identification
number (For example CG1, CG2, CG3...), to which the column belongs is displayed.
The functionality available, using the options, available in the splitter window, have been defined
below:
Group - Define
Group - Delete
Column - Add
Column - Delete
Close
There is a drop down menu that indicates the column groups present. You should select the column
group number to add columns or delete columns from it. When you select a particular column group
in this list, the columns that belong to this group will be highlighted.
Group – Define
Select this button to define a new column group. When you select this button, Struds automatically
takes up the id number for new column group. Struds displays a message like this
Click on the `Yes' button if you want to define the new column group. You can now add columns in
that group by selecting the COLUMN - ADD button.
Group – Delete
You can use this option to delete a column group from existing column groups. When there is
already some column in this group, Struds will remove this column from this group and then delete
that group before displaying following message.
Column – Add
By using this option, you can add columns in a group. First select the group in which you want to add
columns from the drop down menu and then select this option. A box cursor appears on the screen.
Select the columns by the cursor one by one to add them in the selected group. If the column is
already present in any other group, Struds displays following message.
Click on the `YES' button if you want to remove the column from existing group and add to the
selected group. Press Esc key to come out of this option.
Column – Delete
This option allows you to remove a column from its group. First select the group from which you
want to remove columns from the drop down menu and then select this option. A box cursor
appears on the screen. Select the columns by the cursor one by one to remove them from the
selected group.
Close
Click on this button to save and come out of the Grouping option.
4.1.4.5 MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - REGENERATE
If you have made any changes to the column and you want to regenerate the columns without
disturbing the changes you made to the columns then this option comes handy.
4.1.4.6 MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - GET SIZES FROM DESIGN
In the pre-processor we set certain dimension to the columns. These dimensions are considered for
the analysis also. But while designing the columns, these may be changed, so that all the design
checks are satisfied. If we want to re -analyse the structure with the new sections, we can update
the sections from the design module just by clicking the option "Get sizes from Design". On clicking
it, it will automatically update the respective column dimensions.
4.1.4.7 MODIFY - BUILDING – COLUMN – OFFSET (Select / Unselect)
When two members such as a beam and column are connected at a point, there is some
overlap of the cross-sections. In many structures, the dimensions of the members are large,
and the length of the overlap can be a significant fraction of the total length of the frame
element. Defining end length offsets along the length of frame elements can account for
these finite dimensions of structural elements.
When a line object is used to model a frame section, the line object is assumed to be
located at the centroid of the frame section. Thus, when line objects (frame sections)
intersect in a model, it means that the centroids of the associated frame objects intersect. In
a real structure, that is not always the case. For example, it is not unusual for one or more
floor beams in a building to frame eccentrically into a column.
Overlapping Beam
portion
X offset
Y offset CG
Column Beam
As soon as users select this option following dialog box will appear on the screen.
After selecting this option the support width effect will be considered at preprocessor level
and accordingly the end moments and span moments are calculated for beam design.
Internally the master slaving for wide columns will be done by the software.
If we make the flag of Consider Column Rigid end offset at beam bottom on then the master
slaving will be done for beam depth and accordingly column moments and axial load will be
calculated.
4.1.5 MODIFY - BUILDING - NODE
This menu option has sub options useful for deletion as well as renumbering the nodes at the
current floor level.
Both these options have been discussed in greater detail, in the respective topics.
MODIFY - BUILDING - NODE – DELETE

MODIFY - BUILDING - NODE – COPY
MODIFY - BUILDING - NODE – MOVE
MODIFY - BUILDING - NODE - MIRROR
MODIFY - BUILDING - NODE - RENUMBER NODES
4.1.5.1 MODIFY - BUILDING - NODE - DELETE
This option allows you to delete any node. Please note that this node should not be attached to any
element or column. If you try to delete such a node, the program gives a warning message.
The response by Struds is
Ènter a point':
Here you can select the node to be deleted by any of the following methods.
By clicking mouse on the node.
By specifying X and Y co-ordinates of the node with respect to origin.

Specifying the location of node with respect to an existing node by pressing F8 or F9 keys.
You can choose this icon to delete node.
4.1.5.2 MODIFY - BUILDING - NODE - COPY
This option allows you to copy the node. When you select the response from Struds is
ENTER IDS/SELECT NODES BY MOUSE CLICK <RIGHT BUTTON WHEN OVER>:
Here you can select the node to be copied by any of the following methods.
Once your selection is over, click the right button of the mouse. The response from the Struds is
SELECT POINT TO COPY FROM:
Here you have to select the point i.e. node from which you have to copy the original node. After that
Struds displays the message
SELECT POINT TO COPY TO:
Here you have to either give the co-ordinates of point or select the point by clicking on that point
where you want to copy the node.
After that Struds displays the copied image of node.
Select this icon to copy the node.

4.1.5.3 MODIFY - BUILDING - NODE - MOVE
By using this option you can move the node from one position to another one. After selecting this
option you will get the following message
ENTER IDS/SELECT NODES BY MOUSE CLICK <RIGHT BUTTON WHEN OVER>:
Here you can select the node to be moved by any of the following methods.
Once your selection is over, click the right button of the mouse. The response from the Struds is
SELECT BASE POINT:
Here you have to select the point i.e node from which you have to move the original node. After that
Struds displayes the message
SELECT OTHER POINT :
Here you have to either give the co-ordinates of point or select the point by clicking on that point ,
this will be your second base point to move the node.
After that Struds displays the moved image of node.
You can select this icon to move the node.
4.1.5.4 MODIFY - BUILDING - NODE - MIRROR
The procedure of this option is same as described in MODIFY - BUILDING - ELEMENT - MIRROR
4.1.5.5 MODIFY - BUILDING - NODE - RENUMBER NODES
This option is the same as MODIFY - BUILDING - NODE - RENUMBER ELEMENTS.

4.1.6 GRID LINES
This menu contains several options to modify the Grid Lines as given below:
GRID LINES-DELETE
MODIFY-GRID LINE-MOVE
MODIFY - GRID LINES - OFFSET
All these have been discussed in detail, in the respective topics.
4.1.6.1 GRID LINES-DELETE
By using this option you can delete the grid line. For that you have to select the option Delete which
is available under the Modify. After that you have select the grid which you want to delete and press
Enter, your selected grid line will delete. If selected grid line is associated with any entity then Struds
will give you the following massage.
4.1.6.2 MODIFY-GRID LINES-MOVE
This option allows you to move the grid lines. When you select this option Struds will ask you for the
following steps:
SELECT GRID LINE TO MOVE:
At this step you have to select the grid lines which you want to move and then pess Enter or right
click the mouse. After that Struds ask you the next step,
ENTER POINT TO DEFINE DIRECTION:

At this stage you have to type the co-ordinates of the point where you have move the grid line. After
that press Enter.
ENTER OFFSET:
Here you have to give the offset distance to move the grid line.
After performing these steps the selected grid lines will move.
4.1.6.3 MODIFY - GRID LINES - OFFSET
This option allows you to create the offset for the existing grid line.
The procedure for creating the offset for grid line is same as dicribed in the option MODIFY-GRID
LINES-MOVE
4.1.7.1 MODIFY - BUILDING - SHEAR WALL – MODIFY
Using this option you can edit the wall name, the grade of concrete attached to any specific wall or
the thickness.
On selecting the option Modify -> Building -> Shear Wall -> Modify option you will get the following
dialog box displayed on the screen.
Using the drop down combo box you can select the wall which you want to modify and change
either the name or the grade of concrete or thickness for specific floor.
Select Apply button to apply the changes. The thickness can vary for different floors as columns.
Select OK option to modify these changes and select cancel option to cancel the changes.
You can select this icon to modify the properties of shear wall.
4.1.7.2 MODIFY - BUILDING - SHEAR WALL – DETACH
This option can be used to delete the attach shear wall from the structure.
Select the option Modify -> Building -> Shear Wall -> Detach to delete any shear wall from the
structure.
To delete the wall you will have to select any element to which wall is attach. Select the element and
right click the mouse button to detach the shear wall. Then you will get one message on screen as
below.
Select Yes option to detach from all floors and select No option to cancel the command.
After deleting the shear wall all created nodes will remain as it is and only the attached wall section
will be deleted.
You can select this icon present on toolbar to detach shear wall.
4.1.8 MODIFY - BUILDING - ALL
This option enables you to edit all the entities, that is the Slabs, Beams as well as the Columns at the
set floor, using a single command.
The editing features available are as listed below:

MODIFY - BUILDING - ALL - COPY
MODIFY - BUILDING - ALL - MIRROR
4.1.8.1 MODIFY - BUILDING - ALL - COPY
When you use the copy option for slab or element, only slab properties or element properties are
copied from one place to other place. But by using this option, you can copy the all the slab,
elements and columns of a selected (or all) portion from one place to other place. When you select
this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. The response by Struds is as follows.
`Select Entities' <Right Button When Over>: Press A for all
You can move the cursor onto the slab panels, which you want to copy and click the left button of
the mouse. If you want to copy more than one slab panels, select those slabs one by one by cursor.
Struds highlights the slab panels selected by you. The selected portion is slabs and their supporting
elements. Once your selection is over, click the right button of the mouse. If you want to select all
the slab panels and their elements for copying, just press A from keyboard. Struds will automatically
select all the existing plan geometry including slabs, elements and columns for copying.
Another way of selecting the portion is by using the window option. To use this option, select the
icon by mouse, and create a window by selecting two diagonal points by mouse. The part of
geometry that is fully inside this window is selected by Struds for copying. The part partially covered
by this window is not selected. Click the right button of the window to indicate that the selection by
`Select Point to Copy From':
You should specify the reference point of the selected plan geometry by locating it by mouse. The
reference point should be any of the nodes in the selected geometry. You can also specify this node
by using F8 /F9 key or using snap mode by pressing F2 key.
`Select Point to Copy To’:
You should specify the point where you want to insert the copied geometry. This point can be
specified by any of the following ways.
By clicking mouse at the point

Struds then copies the selected plan geometry and displays them on the screen. All the properties of
slab and element such as dimensions, material, thickness, loading, section, walls etc. are also copied
in to two. Struds also automatically gives the numbers to copied slabs, elements and nodes.
4.1.8.2 MODIFY - BUILDING - ALL - MIRROR
When you use the mirror option for slab or element, only slab properties or element properties are
mirrored from one place to other place. But by using this option, you can create a mirror image of all
the slabs; elements and columns of a selected (or all) portion of plan geometry. When you select this
option, a box cursor appears on the screen. The response by Struds is as follows.
`Select Entities' <Right Button When Over>: Press A for all
You can move the cursor onto the slab panels and click the left button of the mouse. If you want to
create a mirror of more than one slab panels, select those slabs one by one by cursor. Struds
highlights the slab panels selected by you. The selected portion is slabs, their supporting elements
and columns. Once your selection is over, click the right button of the mouse. If you want to select
all the slab panels and their elements, just press A from keyboard. Struds will automatically select all
the existing plan geometry including slabs, elements and columns for creating the mirror image.
Another way of selecting the portion is by using the window option. To use this option, select the
icon by mouse, and create a window by selecting two diagonal points by mouse. The part of
geometry that is fully inside this window is selected by Struds for making mirror image. The part
partially covered by this window is not selected. Click the right button of the window to indicate that
the selection by window is over. Struds then displays following command.
Here you specify any point that lies on the axis of mirror. This point can also be a node which you
Struds then displays the mirror image of the whole / part of the plan geometry you have selected.
4.1.9 MODIFY-ENTITY
By using this option you can modify any entity in your geometry. For using this option you have to
click on Entity option which is present under the Modify, after that select the entity which you want
to modify, then press Enter, Struds will give you the following window containing the various
options.
From this you can select the necessary option to modify the entity.
4.1.10 MODIFY - BUILDING - FOOTING LEVEL
Using this option, you can modify the level of the base of the footing. This option is generally useful,
in the case of the structures located on sloping terrains, where all the footings may not lie at the
same level.
This option enables the user to raise the level of the base of the footing, above the 0.0 level, which is
assumed as the base of the lowermost footing.
If you want raise the level of the footing beneath any column, select the column using the cursor. At
the prompt, enter the height of the column below the last segment of the column terminating in the
footing is located (say 'a' meters).
The footing level will now be raised up, by a distance equal to the floor height - distance given by the
user ('a' meters).
4.1.11.1 DXF IMPORT - LAYER TABLE
This option allows you to modify the layer of DXF file which you have import in Struds. When you
select this option Struds will display the following dialog box
In this dialog box you can see all the layers present in your DXF file and you can ON or OFF the any
particular layer o all the layers from this dialog box.
DXF COLORS - Click on this option if you want to import the layer with their colors.
IMPORT TEXT - Click on this option if you want to import the DXF file with text.
4.1.12.2 DXF IMPORT - DELETE
By using this option you can delete the DXF file which you have imported to Struds.
4.2 MODIFY - TRUSS ELEMENT - DELETE
This option enables you to delete the elements of either a Pre Defined or User Defined truss. When
you select this option, a box cursor will appear, which will enable you to select the truss elements,
which are to deleted.
The response by Struds will be
'Select Elements <Right Button when over>. Press A for All '
You can also use the Window selection option to select Multiple truss elements, which are to be
deleted. This can be done, by clicking the Windows icon available.
Once you have selected all the elements, which are to be deleted, use the right click option of your
mouse. On doing so, Struds asks for confirmation, as to whether the selected elements are to be
deleted.
If you click the 'Yes' option, these elements would be deleted, or click the 'No' option to cancel the
deletion command.
4.2.1 MODIFY - TRUSS ELEMENT - SET BETA ANGLE
By this option you can change the beta angle of truss element of your truss building which you have
defined earlier.
For that you have to go to the All Floors, then go to Modify - Truss Element - Set Beta Angle. After
selecting this option Struds will display the following steps:
ENTER IDS/SELECT ELEMENTS <RIGHT BUTTON WHEN OVER>: At this step you can either type the
element id or select the element by mouse, when you finish with the selection click on right button
of mouse. then next step will be
ENTER BETA ANGLE: Here you have to type the required Beta Angle and then press Enter key. It will
change the angle of the selected truss element.
5. LOAD
This main menu option comprises of the entire sub menu options related to the loading acting on
the building. Each of these has been listed below, and discussed in greater detail, in the respective
topics.
LOAD - LOAD CASES

LOAD – ELEMENTAL / NODAL LOADS
LOAD – CONSIDER SELFWEIGHT
LOAD - DEFINE SOFT STOREY
LOAD - SELECT PLANE FRAME FOR EQ
LOAD - GENERATE EQ LOAD
LOAD - WIND PARAMETERS
LOAD - GENERATE WIND LOADS
LOAD - TRUSS LOAD PARAMETERS
LOAD - GENERATE TRUSS LOADS
LOAD - REMOVE EQ LOADS
LOAD - REMOVE WIND LOADS
LOAD - REPORTS
5.1 LOAD - LOAD CASES
This option allows you to select between the valid load cases, before analysing the structure,
depending upon the structure type, which you consider.
LOAD - LOADCASES - PLANE GRID

LOAD - LOADCASES - PLANE FRAME
LOAD - LOADCASES - SPACE FRAME
LOAD - LOADCASES - PLANE TRUSS
5.1.1 LOAD - LOADCASES - PLANE GRID
This option allows you to select load cases for Plane Grid structure type. These load cases are used
for analysis and design modules. For this structure type DL & LL are the only load cases.
When you select this option, the dialog box, as shown above appears. This dialog box, has separate
columns listing the 'Available Load Cases', which lists all the load cases, which are valid for that
structure type, and the 'Selected Load Cases', which is a list of all the load cases, which you have
selected from the list of available load cases.
To add a particular Load Case, in the list of selected Load Cases, select that load case, in the list of
Available Load Cases, towards the left, and use the 'Select' option. This will add this Load case to the
list at the right of the dialog box. Multiple selecting is available here.
On similar lines, if you want to delete a particular Load case, from the list of 'Selected Load case', use
the 'Delete' option. Once a particular Load case has been deleted from the list of Selected Load
cases, the loads pertaining to this load case would not be considered, in the analysis as well as the
Design of the structure.
To close this dialog box, use the 'OK' button, whereas to cancel the changes made, use the 'Cancel'
button.
5.1.2 LOAD - LOADCASES - PLANE FRAME
This option allows you to select load cases for Plane Frame structure type.
When you select this option Struds displays following window.
The functionality of this dialog box, is similar to that described above.
5.1.3 LOAD - LOADCASES - SPACE FRAME
This option works in the same manner as LOAD - LOADCASES - PLANE FRAME
5.1.4 LOAD - LOADCASES - PLANE TRUSS
The available load cases, for an isolated plane truss structure are DL, LL, WLX+, WLX-, WLY+, WLY-.
5.2. LOAD - CREATE – ELEMENTAL / NODAL LOADS
5.2.1 LOAD - CREATE – ELEMENTAL LOADS
This option allows you to generate different type of loads to be attached in the plan geometry.
This icon can be used to define elemental load.
By using this option you can define loads that can be applied to any of the elements in the structure.
Various fields are available in this window to specify the load parameters.
LOAD ID - By default Struds gives a number to every defined load as identification.

Name - You can specify any name up to eight characters to the load you define.
There is a drop down menu for Load Types available in Struds. You can click the down arrow of this
menu and click the type of Load you want to select. The Load types available are
FULL UDL
PARTIAL UDL
POINT LOAD
WEDGE LOAD_R
WEDGE LOAD_L
TRIANGULAR LOAD
FULL UDL - When you select this option, Struds asks you to provide
W - intensity of Load
Angle of Load at which it is acting on the element. When the angle is 90 degrees it indicates that the
load is normal to the axis of element.
Please note that while providing input downward load should be given as positive. The program
however internally assigns -ve sign to all downward loads automatically.
PARTIAL UDL - When you select this option, Struds asks you to provide
W - Intensity of Load
Angle in degrees at which the load is acting with the axis of the member.
A - The distance of starting point of load from left or lower end of the element.
L - Length of the element along which the load is acting;
POINT LOAD - When you select this option, Struds asks you to provide
W - Intensity of Load
A - The distance of starting point of load from left lower end of the element.
WEDGE LOAD_R - This is the varying load where the load intensity is maximum at right end. When
you select this option, Struds asks you to provide
W - Maximum intensity of load at the right.
L - Length of the load along which the load is acting.
WEDGE LOAD_L - This is the varying load where the load intensity is maximum at Left end. When
you select this option, Struds asks you to provide
W - Maximum intensity of load at the left
TRIANGULAR LOAD - This is the varying load where the load intensity is maximum at middle and
zero at both ends. The triangle formed is a bilateral triangle having angles at base as 45 degrees.
When you select this option, Struds asks you to provide
W - Maximum intensity of load at the middle
5.2.2 LOAD - CREATE NODAL LOADS
This option allows you to define the joint loads that can be applied at any node in the plan geometry.
This option can be useful to apply any additional loads on columns. When you select this option,
LOAD ID - Struds automatically gives an identification number to every nodal load you define.
NAME - You can specify any name to the load up to four characters. By default Struds takes names
as N1, N2, N3 etc.
At the top right side Struds displays the figure for axis system adopted. Please note that the plan is
drawn in XY plane and columns lie along the Z-axis.
Following fields are available at the left side of the window to specify the load values.
Fx - Value of load along X-axis. Positive for left to right and negative for right to left.
Fy - Value of load along Y-axis. Positive for towards up on screen and negative for towards down side
of screen.
Fz - Value of load perpendicular to XY plane (the plane in which floor plan lies) and along Z-axis.
Positive for downward and negative for upward.
Mx - Value of moment about X-axis.
My - Value of moment about Y-axis.

Mz - Value of moment about Z-axis.
Following buttons are available on the right side of the window.
NEW - Click on this option to start defining new load.
EDIT - Select the name of load from the list and click on this option to modify its value.
SAVE - Click on this option to save defined load or to save the changes you have made in any load by
using edit option.
DEFINE - Click on this option after providing values for the definition of load.
HELP - Click this button to get the help for operating this window.
CLOSE - Click this button to close this window.
This icon can be used to define nodal loads.
5.3 LOAD - SELF WEIGHT
This option enables you to either consider or disregard the Self-weight of the complete structure.
When you select this option, Struds displays the dialog box, as shown below:
If you check the box, which appears in this dialog box, the self-weight for all the elements in the
Structure will be considered in the Analysis, and Design of the structure. On the contrary, if this flag
is not checked, the Self-weight for all the elements will not be considered.
5.4 LOAD - DEFINE SOFT STOREY
This utility enables you to define a Soft Storey in the modeled building.
On clicking this option, the dialog box as shown below appears.
To define a Soft Storey, select the Add option in the dialog box.
In the drop down list for the Upper Level, all the floor levels, defined in the building are listed.
Choose the appropriate floor level to represent the upper level of the Soft Storey, to be defined.
On selection of the upper level of the Soft Storey, all the floor levels, below the floor level selected
to represent the Upper level of the Soft Storey are available in the drop down list for the Lower Level
of the Soft Storey.
An appropriate value for the factor by which the member end forces of the beams and columns in
the defined soft storey are to be modified, is to be given in the text box for Factor.
To define the Soft storey, after entering the relevant details, click the Add button. On doing this the
details of the defined Soft storey will be listed below in the dialog box.
To Modify the details pertaining to any of the defined Soft Storeys, select the option Modify.
Highlight the Upper Level of the Soft Storey, the details of which are to be modified. Make the
requisite changes and click the Modify button to affect these changes.
To delete any defined Soft Storey, select the Delete option. Highlight the upper level of the Soft
storey, which is to be deleted. Now click the Remove option, to delete the soft storey defined.
Click the Close button to apply these changes.

5.5 LOAD - GENERATE EQ LOAD
When you select this option, Struds computes the horizontal EQ load on the frames and its
distribution along floors. Unless this option is used, the option for EQ LOAD REPORT is inactive.
In Struds, the earthquake load can be generated, by any of the methods mentioned below:
Generate EQ Load - Frame stiffness Basis - Direct Analysis
In this method, stiffness of a frame is calculated by applying a unit load at the top of the each Plane
Frame (Top Specified by user, default top floor). Then the base shear is distributed as per the relative
stiffness. This Base Shear is distributed at floor levels as per the IS 1893.
This option allows you to set Seismic parameters for calculation of Earthquake loads on your
structure depending upon your site conditions.

In this window you can fill your Seismic parameters (as per IS 1893 : 2002) in respective fields. Select
your Frame type as Moment Resistance Frame (i.e Framed structure with or without Infill Panels(i.e.
Framed structure without Shear walls and bracing or Other Frame (i.e. Framed structure with Shear
walls and bracing.). The next fields where we have two drop down menus are for the application of
the unit load for the Direct Analysis method. Here we can choose the floor and the level (if that floor
has more than one level) to attach the unit load.
The user can select the type of wall load transfer on to the floor. If the first option, that is "Consider
Half Wall load on Floor" is checked, half the wall load will be distributed to the floor above, and half
the wall load will be transferred to the floor below.
In the other case, that is "Consider Total Wall Load on Floor", the entire load of the wall will be
transferred to the floor below, for the purpose of seismic load computation.
Check the check box below, to consider the Torsional Effect due to the eccentricity between the
Centre of Mass and the Centre of Stiffness.
The Floor Diaphragm Action, constitutes, one of the most important features of Struds, for the
earthquake load generation. If this option is selected, the effect of the slab rigidity is taken into
account for the calculation of earthquake forces.
In this case, a floor node is created at every defined floor level. The rotation about the Global Z
axis(theta z), remains constant for all the nodes at a floor level, whereas the other two degrees of
freedom, namely translation along the Global X and Y axes(u, v) at all the nodes, can be correlated,
with the displacements at the defined Floor node.
Consideration of the rigid diaphragm effect gives a better picture of the distribution of the seismic
forces.
The LL percentage dialog box enables you to specify the different Live Load percentage at each floor
level.The user can either numerically specify a constant L.L at all floor levels except the terrace level
where the L.L percentage is taken as zero as per I.S 1893:2002, by checking the option 'Consider
constant L.L percentage at all floors', or he can manually edit the L.L percentages at various floor
levels.
Generate EQ Load - Column Reaction Basis
When you select this option, Struds calculates the base shear on the basis of the loading (dead and
live load as per code provisions) on the structure. Once base shear is calculated, it calculates floor
wise shear (i.e. Wihi2 / Wihi2). This floor shear is distributed to each column node proportionately,
based on the reactions obtained from the grid analysis of that floor.
On selection of this option you will get following window.
Generate EQ Load - Response spectrum method
In this method, the EQ load is generated dynamically by the method of Response Spectrum. In this
method, the response of the structure is worked out for the number of modes, as given by the user,
and then the design forces are combined as specified in the relevant clauses of I.S 1893.
To generate the Earthquake load by Response Spectrum method we have to specify the Response
Spectrum parameters as shown in the following dialog box.
Code | Damping | Seismic Zone | Seismic Zone Factor | Importance Factor | Gama | Modes | Soil
Type | Beta | Response Reduction Factor | Scaling of dynamic base shear | Response Spectrum
Coefficients.
Code
The Response Spectrum analysis can be done according to the provisions of I.S 1893 : 1984, as well
as the revised clauses of I.S 1893 : 2002. This option enables the user to select the relevant code for
the analysis.
Damping
The effect of internal friction, imperfect elasticity of the material, slipping, sliding, etc in reducing the
amplitude of vibration and is expressed as a percentage of critical damping.
The code does not provide explicit specification of damping for buildings. However, Appendix F of
the code indicates the values of damping for different types of structure:
a) Steel Structures 2% to 5% of the critical

b) Concrete Structures 2% to 5% of the critical
c) Brick structure in Cement Mortar 2% to 5% of the critical
d) Timber Structures 2% to 5% of the critical
e) Earthen Structures 2% to 5% of the critical
Specify the Damping factor for the entire structure. The default value of damping in Struds is 5% of
the critical damping.
Seismic Zone
On the basis of the past recorded seismic history, as well as the probability of occurance of uture
earthquakes, the Indian subcontinent has been broadly subdidvided into four seismic Zones(Zone II,
III, IV, and V). Zone II has the least probability of occurence of earthquakes of high magnitudes,
whereas the Zone V has the maximum probability of occurence of earthquakes of high magnitude,
due to which there may be heavy loss of life and property.
Seismic Zone Factor
Depending upon the geographical location and the Seismic Zone in which the structure exists, these
are the multiplying factors to be used with average spectra for response spectrum approach. The
values of the seismic zone factors are automatically updated on change of the Seismic zone,
however, if the user desires, the default value could be over written.
Importance Factor
Depeding upon the functional use of the structure as well as the hazardous consequences in the
event of the failure, the Importance factor is assigned to every structure.
Gama( )
This factor is used for the combination of shears for all the modes. The total shear force in each
storey is obtained in accordance with Clause 4.2.2.2 of IS 1893 - 1984,
Vi = ( 1 - ) ( Vir ) + * sqrt ( ( Vir )2)
where Vir = absolute value of maximum shear at the ith storey in the rth mode and the value of
gama shall be given below:
Height, H (m) Gamma,

Upto 20 0.40
40 0.60
60 0.80
90 1.00
For building of intermediate height, value of may be obtained by linear interpolation. Struds sets the
default value according to height of the structure, but user can change it
Modes
The number of modes to be used in the analysis should be such that the sum total of modal masses
of all modes considered is at least 90 % of total seismic mass. As per IS codal provisions, at least
three modes of response of the structure should be considered therefore the default number of
modes is 3 in Struds.
Soil Type
I.S 1893 : 2002, introduces a new factor to indicate the soil type on which the structure stands, in
place of the soil foundation factor, Gama, which existed in I.S 1893 : 1984. I.S 1893 : 2002, now
broadly classifies the soils into three categories, that is Rocky or Hard soils, Medium soils, and Soft
soils. This factor enables the user to make the necessary selection.
Beta
Beta is the soil foundation factor, as defined in I.S 1893 : 1984. This factor no more exists in I.S 1893 :
2002.
Response Reduction Factor
This factor depends on the perceived seismic damage performance of the structure, characterized by
ductile or brittle deformations. The ration (I/R) shall not be greater than 1.0. For structures having
ductile detailing, the Response Reduction factor is higher and vice versa.
Scaling of dynamic base shear
As per clause number 7.8.2 of IS 1893(Part 1):2002 If we generate earthquake loads by response
spectrum method, the design base shear (VB) shall be compared with a base shear (VB) calculated by
using a fundamental period Ta, where Ta is as per clause 7.6 where VB is less than VB, all the
response quantities (Member forces, displacements, story forces, story shears and base reactions)
shall be multiplied by VB / VB
In the software the facility to consider this clause or not to consider as well if considered then
whether the factor to be calculated internally or will be given by user these facilities are given.
Response spectrum Coefficients
These are the response spectrum factors along the x, y and the z direction. The default value in
Struds is 1.
User may choose an appropriate method of modal combination for analysis results. The two
methods given in software are Complete Quadratic Combination (CQC) method and Square
Root of Sum of Squares (SRSS) method.
The methods of modal combination are

1) SRSS (Square Root of Sum of Squares)
Rmax = [R12 + R22 + R32 + ….. + Rn2] 1/2
2) CQC (Complete Quadratic Combination)
n n
Rmax = [Σ X Σ Ri ρijRj] 1/2
i=1 j=1
where
Rmax = Peak response

Ri = Peak response at ith mode
β = Natural frequency ration of ith mode to jth mode
ξ = Damping ratio
If the damping ration ξ becomes 0 then both CQC and SRSS methods will give identical
results.
SRSS method was widely used but it tends to overestimate or underestimate the
combination results in the cases where the values of natural frequencies are close to each
other. The use of CQC method is increasing day by day as it accounts for probabilistic
interrelations between the modes.
5.6 LOAD - WIND PARAMETERS
This option allows you to set Wind parameters for calculation of Wind loads on your structure
depending upon your site conditions.

In this, you can input the data, in the various fields, as per your requirement.
You can also choose, the Wind Load application level, using the combo boxes, which are provided at
the bottom of the dialog box. This combo box contains a list of all the floor levels, which are
currently there in the structure. When you select a particular Wind load application level, the Wind
Loads would be applied at this level, as well as, at all the levels, above this level. By default, the
Wind Load application level is set to the lowermost level, present in the modeled geometry.
GENERATE WIND LOAD

When you select this option, Struds computes the horizontal wind load on the frames and its
distribution along floors. Unless this option is used, the option for LOAD - REPORT - WIND LOAD is
inactive.
BY FRAMING METHOD - In this method Struds computes the horizontal wind load on the frames and
its distribution along floors.
BY NOTIONAL METHOD - In this method Struds calculates the area and CG of every floor depending
on the geometry. The wind load in X and Y direction is assumed to act at this CG of floor as nodal
load. The CG node will act as master node. With help of Master slave concept and diaphragm action
Struds will distribute total wind load from CG node to all other nodes on that floor.
5.7 LOAD - TRUSS LOAD PARAMETERS
This option allows you to set the load parameters acting on the trusses. When you select this option
In this window two type of load parameters are shown as follows,
Dead Load Parameters
This option provides three fields for Self Wt. Of Truss, Self-Wt. Of Roofing Material, Self-wt. Of Purlin
with default values, you can enter your values in appropriate fields.
Wind Load Parameters
This option provides Four fields for Probability Factor (K1), Terrain, Height, Structure size factor (K2),
Topography Factor (K3), Basic wind speed (m/s) (Vb), you can enter values depending upon your site
in appropriate fields.
At the end of this window there is facility for selection of Permeability as Normal/Medium/High.
5.8 LOAD - GENERATE TRUSS LOAD
When you click on this option Struds generates the loads acting on the nodal points of the truss.
Before using this option, you need to set the truss load parameters, using the option LOAD - TRUSS
LOAD PARAMETERS.
Once you have set the parameters, using these values, the truss load will be generated.
You can view the truss loads, using the option DISPLAY - TRUSS LOADS.
5.9 LOAD - REMOVE EQ LOADS
After generating the Earthquake loads, if we want to remove them due to any reason then we can
choose this option.
5.10 LOAD - REMOVE WIND LOADS
If the wind loads have already been generated, they can be removed using this option.
5.11 LOAD - REMOVE CG WIND LOADS
If the wind loads have been generated by Notional method, they can be removed by using this
option.
5.12 LOAD - REPORT
This option enables you to view the load related reports. It constitutes the following reports.
LOAD - REPORT - EQ REPORT

LOAD - REPORT - WIND REPORT
LOAD - REPORT - ELEMENTAL REPORT
LOAD - REPORT - NODAL REPORT
LOAD - REPORT - COLUMN REPORT
5.12.1LOAD - REPORT - EQ LOAD
When you select this option, depending upon the method of EQ load generation, which you choose,
this option will enable you to view the complete details, of the EQ loads which have been generated.
Depending upon the method of generation, the report details are given below:
FRAME STIFFNESS - DIRECT ANALYSIS
COLUMN REACTION METHOD
RESPONSE SPECTRUM METHOD
5.12.1.1 FRAME STIFFNESS - DIRECT ANALYSIS
If the load is generated by the direct analysis method, this report will show you all the details,
pertaining to the calculation of the total Floor weights, Base shear, Distribution of the base shear to
the various frames, as well as the magnitude of the nodal EQ loads, which are generated.
5.12.1.2 COLUMN REACTION METHOD
If the EQ loads are generated by the Column Reaction method, the report generated will show you
all the details of the total floor weights as well as the nodal EQ loads which have been generated, in
the X+, X-, Y+, Y- directions. If the effect of torsion due to eccentricity between the Centre of
stiffness and the Centre of Mass is also accounted for, this report will also show you all the details of
the elemental forces for the first solution F1, the second solution F2, as well as the final solution
represented as F1 + 0.5(F1- F2).
5.12.1.3 RESPONSE SPECTRUM METHOD
If the EQ loads are generated by the Response spectrum method, the report will show you all the
details pertaining to the response of the building, to seismic excitation, in terms frequency as of the
time period of vibration for each mode.
It would also show all the details of the nodal EQ loads generated, in the X+, X-, Y+, and Y- directions.
If the effect of torsion due to eccentricity between the Centre of stiffness and the Centre of Mass is
also accounted for, this report will also show you all the details of the elemental forces for the first
solution F1, the second solution F2, as well as the final solution represented as F1 + 0.5(F1- F2).
5.12.2 LOAD - REPORT - WIND LOAD
When you select this option, Struds generates a HTML report for the wind load computation
depending on the method selected for wind load generation.
For Framing method of wind load generation following is the report.

There is a menu bar at top that allows you to print, store and control the display of this text report.
PRINT
This option allows you to get a print of this text report. The details of this option are given in
Appendix
CLOSE
Select this option to close the screen for text report.
For Notional method of wind load generation following is the report.

5.12.3LOAD - REPORT - ELEMENTAL LOAD
When you select this option, Struds generates a report for all the elements for their self-weight, load
transferred from slabs, wall load and any external loads. Struds displays the standard window for
SAVE FILE option and asks you to provide a name for the file. You can type the name of file in the
field provided. Struds generates a file having extension TXT that you can open in any word editor
such as MS DOS Editor, Notepad, WordPad, Word, and Excel etc. These load reports can be studied
in conjunction with the EQ load report for computation of base shear.
5.12.4LOAD - REPORT - NODAL LOAD
When you select this option, Struds generates a text report for all nodal loads applied at nodes at
every floor. Struds displays the standard window for SAVE FILE option and asks you to provide a
name for the file. You can type the name of file in the field provided. Struds generates a file having
extension TXT that you can open in any word editor such as MS DOS Editor, Notepad, WordPad,
Word, and Excel etc. These load report can be studied in conjunction with the EQ load report for
computation of base shear.
5.12.5LOAD - REPORT - COLUMN LOAD
When you select this option, Struds generates a report for all the columns and their self-weights at
every floor level. When you select this option, Struds displays the standard window for SAVE FILE
option and asks you to provide a name for the file. You can type the name of file in the field
provided. Struds generates a file having extension TXT that you can open in any word editor such as
MS DOS Editor, Notepad, WordPad, Word, and Excel etc. This load report can be studied in
conjunction with the EQ load report for computation of base shear.
5.12.6 LOAD - REPORT - PATTERN LOAD
When you select this option, Struds generates a PDF report for all the gridlines on that
particular floor showing the pattern load combinations which will be used for design of the
structure. The loads are displayed as dead load and for live loads the combinations are
shown as Alternate and adjoining etc.
6. DISPLAY
This option offers you several features related to the display. These have been listed below, and
discussed in greater detail, in the respective topics.
DISPLAY - LISTS
DISPLAY - GRID
DISPLAY - ENTITIES
DISPLAY - UNIQUE ID'S
DISPLAY - EDGE ELEMENTS
DISPLAY - CANTILEVER ELEMENTS
DISPLAY - SLAB PROPERTIES
DISPLAY - SLAB PROPERTIES ON / OFF
DISPLAY - TRUSS LOADS
DISPLAY - TEXT ORIENTATION
DISPLAY - FONT SETTING
DISPLAY - USE DEFAULT COLOURS
DISPLAY - SNAP
DISPLAY - RENDER VIEW SETTINGS
6.1 DISPLAY - LISTS
This option is used to display a list of the various entities, which have been listed below:
DISPLAY - LISTS - SLAB

DISPLAY - LISTS - BEAM
DISPLAY - LISTS - CANTILEVER ELEMENTS
DISPLAY - LISTS - NODE
DISPLAY - LISTS - MATERIAL
DISPLAY - LISTS - SECTION
DISPLAY - LISTS - LOAD
DISPLAY - LISTS - WALL
DISPLAY - LISTS - GRAPHICAL PLAN LAYOUT
DISPLAY - LISTS - ARCHITECTURAL OBJECTWISE
DISPLAY - LISTS - WALL QUANTITY REPORT
DISPLAY - LISTS - SLAB QUANTITY REPORT
DISPLAY - LISTS - ABSTRACT FLOOR QUANTITY REPORT
6.1.1 DISPLAY - LISTS - SLAB
When you select this option, Struds displays a text report, showing all the details of the slabs present
at the current floor.
At the top of this text report has a menu bar showing following options.
PRINT
This option allows you to get a print out of this text report. It again has following options.
Print – Preview
By using this option you can see the paper and the actual output you will receive after printing.
Print - Print to File
By using this option, you can create a text file of this report. When you select this option, Struds
Type the name of the file by which you want to save this text report. If you type the name as ABC,
the file generated will be ABC.TXT. This file can be opened in any text editor such as MS-DOS Editor,
Notepad, Word or Excel. The tab settings for the text is such that it automatically takes the form of
columns if you open the file in MS - Excel. You can then modify the contents of this text file and get a
print out.
Settings -Report setting
This option allows you to set the properties of this text report such as font, title, footer, units etc.
This window has two drop-down menus. The first drop-down menu displays the first number of item
from which you want to apply the changes and the second drop-down menu displays the last item
number up to, which you want to apply the changes. The items are Project Name, Title, Title of text
columns, text matter, etc. Below the drop-down menus are two check boxes. Click on these to
include the `Project File Name' or `Footer' in text report.
CLOSE
Select this option to close the window.
UNITS
Click on this option to change the units in the text report. When you select this option, Struds
The window has two drop down menus, the left drop down menu has the parameters like Slab
Thickness, Slab Dimensions and Bar Spacing of which you can change the units for outputs. The right
drop down menu gives the list of Units you can apply to these parameters. You can have any unit for
output irrespective of the unit you have employed for input. Select close button to close the
window.
FONT
Details of this option given in Appendix.
CLOSE
Select this option to close the screen for text report.
6.1.2 DISPLAY - LISTS - BEAM
When you select this option, Struds produces a text report for the input you have made for all the
elements in the plan geometry, as shown below. This report shows the Element identification
numbers, the node numbers to which every element is connected, the section / material / wall
attached to every element. This text report is similar to the one produced for slabs. For the options
of this report, please refer to DISPLAY - LISTS - SLABS.
6.1.3 DISPLAY - LISTS - CANTILEVER ELEMENTS
When you select this option, Struds produces a text report, as shown below, for the Cantilever
Elements, which have been defined at the set floor level. This report shows the element
identification numbers as well as the supporting node for the Cantilever Element, the section,
material as well as the details of the wall, if any has been attached to the element.
6.1.4 DISPLAY - LISTS - NODE
When you select this option, Struds produces a text report, as shown below, for the input you have
made for all the nodes in the plan geometry. This report shows the Node identification numbers and
their co-ordinates. This text report is similar to the one produced for slabs. For the options of this
report, please refer to DISPLAY - LISTS - SLABS.
6.1.5 DISPLAY - LISTS - MATERIAL
When you select this option, Struds produces a text report, as shown below, for the material
properties you have created in the plan geometry. This report shows the material identification
numbers and their properties such as Density, E value, and Poisson’s Ratio and Group value. This text
report is similar to the one produced for slabs. For the options of this report, please refer to Display -
Lists - Slab.
6.1.6 DISPLAY - LISTS - SECTION
When you select this option, Struds produces a text report, as shown below, for the sectional
properties you have created in the plan geometry. This report shows the Section identification
numbers, their type and their dimensions. This text report is similar to the one produced for slabs.
For the options of this report, please refer to DISPLAY - LISTS - SLABS.
6.1.7 DISPLAY - LISTS - WALL
When you select this option, Struds produces a text report, as shown below, for the wall properties
you have created in the plan geometry. This report shows the Wall identification numbers, their
heights, density, thickness and their weight. This text report is similar to the one produced for slabs.
For the options of this report, please refer to Display - Lists - Slab.
6.1.8 DISPLAY - LISTS - GRAPHICAL PLAN LAYOUT
When you select this option Struds displays Graphical grid pattern of structure, as shown below,
which enables you to view the details of the grid.
6.1.9 DISPLAY - LISTS - ARCHITECTURAL OBJECT WISE
made for all the walls, finishing in the plan geometry. This report shows the wall identification
numbers, their Total Quantity, and clears quantities with finishing quantities. This text report is
similar to the one produced for slabs. For the options of this report, please refer to DISPLAY - LISTS -
SLABS.
6.1.10DISPLAY - LISTS - WALL QUANTITY REPORT
made for all the walls, finishing (plastering, painting, pointing) in the plan geometry. This report
shows the wall identification numbers, their Total Quantity, and clears quantities with finishing
quantities. This text report is similar to the one produced for slabs. For the options of this report,
please refer to DISPLAY - LISTS - SLAB.
6.1.11DISPLAY - LISTS - SLAB QUANTITY REPORT
This feature enables you to view all the details of the slab quantities in terms of the dimensions and
area of all the slabs at the set floor, as well as the flooring and ceiling area.
The report, which appears, is as shown below:

6.1.12DISPLAY - LISTS - ABSTRACT FLOOR QUANTITY REPORT
When you select this option, Struds produces a text report for the input you have made for all the
Walls in the plan geometry with flooring and ceiling. This report shows the Wall numbers, their Total
Quantity (area) with flooring and ceiling quantities Floor wise. This text report is similar to the one
produced for slabs. For the options of this report, please refer to DISPLAY - LISTS - ABSTRACT FLOOR
QUANTITY REPORT.
6.2 DISPLAY - GRID
This option allows you to see the grids in the plan geometry.
6.2.1 Display - Grid - X Constant
When you select this option Struds highlights the continuous beam lines - grids having X co-ordinate
constant i.e. grids along Y direction, as shown below.
6.2.2 Display - Grid - Y Constant
When you select this option Struds highlights the continuous beam lines - grids having Y co-ordinate
constant i.e. grids along X direction, as shown below.
6.2.3 Display - Grid – Inclined
When you select this option Struds highlights the continuous beam lines - grids having both X and Y
co-ordinate variable i.e. grids along a inclined axis and not in the direction of X or Y-axis, as shown
below.
6.2.4 Display - Grid – Curved
Since in Struds, the curved beam is divided into a number of small elements (three noded finite
element), the curved beam is treated as a grid formed by these elements, which are highlighted
when you select this option.
6.3 DISPLAY - ENTITIES
This option allows you to put on / off the display of various entities on screen. When you select this
option, Struds displays following window.
This window has check-boxes for every entity. Click on the check box of the entity that you want to
see on the screen. The entities are as follows.
NODE
When you click on this option, you can see the node numbers on the screen. By default the checkbox
is already on. You can also press F4 key from the keyboard to put on/off the display of node numbers
without using this option. You can also see the node numbers selectively. For example if you want to
see the node numbers from 3 to 11, type 3 in the field provided for start and type 11 in the field for
end.
ELEMENT
When you click on this option, you can see the element numbers on the screen. By default the
checkbox is already on. You can also press F5 key from the keyboard to put on/off the display of
element numbers without using this option. You can also see the element numbers selectively. For
example if you want to see the element numbers from 3 to 11, type 3 in the field provided for start
and type 11 in the field for end.
SLAB
When you click on this option, you can see the slab numbers on the screen. By default the checkbox
is already on. You can also press F6 key from the keyboard to put on/off the display of slab numbers
without using this option. You can also see the slab numbers selectively. For example if you want to
see the slab numbers from 3 to 11, type 3 in the field provided for start and type 11 in the field for
end.
COLUMN
When you click on this option, you can see the columns on the screen. You can also see the column
numbers selectively. For example if you want to see the column numbers from 3 to 11, type 3 in the
field provided for start and type 11 in the field for end.
COLUMN INDEX
When you click on this option, you can see the column index numbers on the screen. You can also
see the column numbers selectively. For example if you want to see the column numbers from 3 to
11, type 3 in the field provided for start and type 11 in the field for end.
WALL
When you click on this option, you can see the graphical representation of wall and wall IDs attached
to the elements on the screen. You can also press F8 key from the keyboard to put on/off the display
of walls, without using this option. You can also see the wall and their IDs of the elements
selectively. For example if you want to see the element numbers from 3 to 11, type 3 in the field
provided for start and type 11 in the field for end.
SHEAR WALL NAME
When you click on this option, you can see the numbers assigned to shear walls.
SECTION ID
When you click on this option, you can see the section identification numbers attached to the
elements on the screen. You can also see the section IDs of the elements selectively. For example if
you want to see the section IDs for element numbers from 3 to 11, type 3 in the field provided for
start and type 11 in the field for end.
SECTION DIM
When you click on this option, you can see the section dimensions attached to the elements on the
screen. You can also press the key F2 from the keyboard to put on/off the display of section
dimensions without using this option. You can also see the dimensions of the elements selectively.
For example if you want to see the section dimensions for element numbers from 3 to 11, type 3 in
the field provided for start and type 11 in the field for end.
MATERIAL
When you click on this option, you can see the material IDs attached to the elements on the screen.
You can also see the material IDs of the elements selectively. For example if you want to see the
element numbers from 3 to 11, type 3 in the field provided for start and type 11 in the field for end
LOAD
When you click on this option, you can see the elemental load identification numbers(Apart from
loads transferred from the slabs) attached to the elements on the screen. You can also press F3 key
from the keyboard to put on/off the display of loads without using this option. You can also see the
elements to which loads are attached selectively. For example if you want to see the element
numbers from 3 to 11, type 3 in the field provided for start and type 11 in the field for end.
NODAL LOAD
When you click on this option, you can see the joint load identification numbers attached to the
nodes on the screen. You can also see the nodes to which nodal loads are attached selectively. For
example if you want to see joint loads for the node numbers from 3 to 11, type 3 in the field
provided for start and type 11 in the field for end.
BOUNDARY CONDITION
When you click on this option, you can see the boundary conditions attached to the nodes on the
screen. You can also see boundary conditions of the nodes selectively. For example if you want to
see the node numbers from 3 to 11, type 3 in the field provided for start and type 11 in the field for
end.
This icon can be used to display entities option.
6.4 DISPLAY - OFFSET COLUMNS
By using this option you can see all the columns for which offsetting is done. When you select this
option you will get the following window.
6.5 DISPLAY - UNIQUE ID'S
Setting this option to 'ON', enables you to view a unique set of numbers for the columns, nodes and
elements at any floor level, which remain the same whether seen in plane grid, plane frame or space
frame view. By default, this option is set to 'OFF'.
6.6 DISPLAY - EDGE ELEMENTS
Using this option, you can view the elements, which have been converted to the edge elements, in
the modeled geometry, at the set floor. These elements are highlighted, when you select this option.
This option remains inactive, till no edge elements have been defined on the set floor.
6.7 DISPLAY - CANTILEVER ELEMENTS
Setting this option to ON highlights all the floor elements, which have been converted to Cantilever
Elements, along with their supporting nodes. All these elements and their respective supporting
nodes are now displayed in blue, as has been shown below. This option remains inactive, till no
Cantilever Elements are defined at the selected floor level.
6.8 DISPLAY - SLAB PROPERTIES ON / OFF
When you click this option, Struds displays the properties of every slab such as dimensions,
thickness, loads etc. By default this display is off. When you select this option, the display is put on,
and a check mark appears before this option. Again when you select it, the display is put off, which
disappears once you switch it off. To control this display, select the next option.
6.9 DISPLAY - SLAB PROPERTIES KEY
This option is inactive until you select the previous option. By selecting this option, you can modify
and control the display of slab properties on screen. When you select this option, Struds displays
following window.
This window has check-boxes for thickness, dimensions, Sunk value, DL - Dead load, LL - Live Load
and FF - floor finish load. Click on the parameters you want to be displayed on the screen. By default
all the check boxes except the one for sunken value are on.
The window has also following buttons to control the display of slab properties.
UNITS
This option allows you to change the unit for slab dimensions, thickness, loads etc. When you select
this option, Struds displays following window.
This window has two drop-down menus. Select the parameters like length and load from the left
drop-down menu. Select the unit type from the right drop-down menu. Click on the `Close' button.
Struds will change the display of slab properties on the screen as per the units specified by you.
PRECISION
This option allows you to set the precision for display of values for slab properties. When you select
this option, Struds displays following window.
The values for precision denote the decimal point up to which the numerical figure is represented.
For example 12.346 has a precision value of 3 and 12.3462 has a precision value of 4. This window
denotes the default precision values for thickness, dimension, sunken value, dead load, live load and
floor finish load. You can change these values by simply overwriting on them. Click on the `Defaults'
button to revert back to the default values of precision.
ADVANCE
This option allows you to control the display of load values on slab. When you select this option,
By default Struds displays the values of dead load, live load and floor finish load separately. This
window asks you whether these loads are to be displayed separately or inclusively. It displays
following three options.
1. Display DL, LL, and FF separately.

2. Display DL and FF inclusively and LL separately
3. Display DL, LL and FF all three inclusively.
Click on the option as per your requirement and click on the ÒK' button. Struds will display the
values accordingly on screen.
6.10 DISPLAY - TRUSS LOADS
This option allows you to Select load sources and visualize loads. When you select this option Struds
This window allows you to select load source on the truss, If we want to see the dead loads on the
Truss then we click on the DL in the Load Category list and then tick on the sources of the dead load
whose magnitude we want to see.
After selecting the "Load source for the Current load Category" we click on OK. On clicking OK we see
the loads acting on the Truss along with their magnitudes.
Whilst using this option, it must be remembered that the WL X Pos, WL X Neg, WL Y Pos, WL YNeg,
are load cases only, and don’t necessarily represent the positive or negative direction of the loads.
WL X Pos, and WL Y Pos denote maximum wind pressures, acting towards the roof, in the X and Y
directions, whereas WL X Neg and WL Y Neg denote minimum wind pressures, acting away from the
roof, in the X and Y directions.
6.11 DISPLAY - TEXT ORIENTATION
This option allows you change the position of text for nodes numbers, element numbers and slab
numbers. This option may prove to be very useful when you have generated a complex plan
geometry and the numbers are too close to each other that clear identification becomes difficult.
Spacing
The default spacing of the text numbers from their corresponding entities is 3 pixels. You can simply
overwrite this value in the field provided for spacing to move the text away or closer towards the
entities.
Orientation
When you click `Horizontal' option, the text is displayed oriented along X axis irrespective of the axis
of entities. Thus the numbers of elements along X, Y or inclined axis are displayed along X-axis.
When you click on the Àligned' button, the numbers of elements are displayed with orientation
along their respective axes. Thus the element numbers for X, Y and inclined axis will be displayed
along X, Y and inclined axis respectively.
6.12 DISPLAY - FONT SETTINGS
This option allows you to control the display of size and style of the fonts for the text appearing on
screen.
Select the text for entities like Nodes, Elements, Slabs, Slab Properties, Loads and Sections from the
menu. Struds then displays the standard windows options for fonts. You can change the font size,
type etc. as per your requirement.
6.13 DISPLAY - USE DEFAULT COLOURS
This option allows you remove the highlighting of elements by display of colours obtained by using
above options of Ùse Section Colours' and Ùse Material Colours'.
6.14 DISPLAY – SNAP
This option gives you the details of various entities as listed below
SNAP - SLAB
SNAP - ELEMENT
SNAP - NODE
SNAP - WALL
SNAP - SHEAR WALL
SNAP - COLUMNS
6.14.1 DISPLAY - SNAP - SLAB
This option gives you all the details of the slab. To view the details of the slab by using snap option
select the snap option, then select Inquire - Slab option, then drag the mouse on the slab of which
you want to see the details. When you perform these steps Struds will display following window.
6.14.2DISPLAY-SNAP - ELEMENT
This option gives you all the details of the elements. To view the details of the elements by using
snap option select the snap option, then select Inquire - Element option, then drag the mouse on the
element of which you want to see the details. When you perform these steps Struds will display
following window.
6.14.3DISPLAY-SNAP - NODE
This option gives you all the details of the nodes. To view the details of the nodes by using snap
option select the snap option, then select Inquire - Node option, then drag the mouse on the node of
which you want to see the details. When you perform these steps Struds will display following
window.
6.14.4DISPLAY-SNAP - WALL
This option gives you all the details of the walls. To view the details of the walls by using snap option
select the snap option, then select Inquire - Wall option, then drag the mouse on the wall of which
you want to see the details. When you perform these steps Struds will display following window.
6.14.5DISPLAY-SNAP - SHEAR WALL
This option gives you all the details of the shear walls. To view the details of the shear walls by using
snap option select the snap option, then select Inquire - Shear wall option, then drag the mouse on
the shear wall of which you want to see the details. When you perform these steps Struds will
display following window.
6.14.6DISPLAY-SNAP - COLUMNS
This option gives you all the details of the shear walls. To view the details of the shear walls by using
snap option select the snap option, then select Inquire - Shear wall option, then drag the mouse on
the shear wall of which you want to see the details. When you perform these steps Struds will
display following window.
6.15 DISPLAY – RENDER VIEW SETTINGS
When you are in 3D view you will get the option of Display – Render view settings highlighted.
Using this option you can change the color of background as well of structural elements as per your
requirement.
AS soon as you click on the option following render view display setting dialog box will l be observed
on screen. If you select any one option like slab, beam, column etc the other window for colors will
be displayed on the screen.
You can select the color as per your requirement. On OK the same selected color will be applied in
display.
7. INQUIRE
This option has several sub menu options, which enable you to find the details, about all the
input parameters for the modeled geometry.
All these options have been discussed in greater detail, in the respective pages.
INQUIRE - COUNT ON LEVEL

INQUIRE - DETAILS
INQUIRE - STB LOADS FROM SLABS
INQUIRE - STB LOADS ON ELEMENTS
INQUIRE - LOADS ON ELEMENTS
INQUIRE - ZERO LENGTH ELEMENTS
INQUIRE - ELEMENTS WITHOUT SECTIONS
INQUIRE - EDGE ELEMENTS
INQUIRE - COINCIDENT NODES
INQUIRE - DISTANCE AND ANGLE
INQUIRE - SLAB ICON COLOUR TABLE
INQUIRE - SECTION COLOUR TABLE
INQUIRE - MATERIAL COLOUR TABLE
7.1 INQUIRE - COUNT ON LEVEL
You can select this option to get the information of total numbers of nodes, elements, slabs
and columns in the modeled plan geometry of the current floor.
7.1.1 INQUIRE - COUNT ON LEVEL - SLABS
This option shows you the count of the number of slabs that have been created, at the set
floor level.
7.1.2 INQUIRE - COUNT ON LEVEL - ELEMENTS
This option shows you the count of the number of elements that are present, at the set floor
level.
7.1.3 INQUIRE - COUNT ON LEVEL - COLUMNS
This option shows you the count of the number of slabs that have been located, at the set
floor level.
7.1.4 INQUIRE - COUNT ON LEVEL - NODES
This option shows you the count of the number of nodes that are present, at the set floor
level.
7.2 INQUIRE - DETAILS
This option is utilised, so as to obtain the complete details of the entities, such as Slabs, Elements,
Nodes, Grids, as well as the Walls, on the current floor.
INQUIRE - DETAILS - SLAB
INQUIRE - DETAILS - ELEMENT
INQUIRE - DETAILS - NODE
INQUIRE - DETAILS - GRID
INQUIRE - DETAILS – WALL
INQUIRE - DETAILS – SHEARWALL
INQUIRE - DETAILS - COLUMNS
7.2.1 INQUIRE - DETAILS - SLAB
This option allows you to inquire the geometric properties and other attributes of a selected slab in
the plan geometry. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the slab
of which you need detail information by cursor. Struds displays a window similar to the one given
below.
The window displays all the relevant information such as slab Identification Number, Dimensions,
Type, Thickness, Material Properties and Loads of the selected slab.
You can choose this icon to inquire details of slab.
7.2.2 INQUIRE - DETAILS - ELEMENT

This option allows you to inquire the geometric properties and other attributes of a selected
element in the plan geometry. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen.
Select the element of which you need detail information by cursor. Struds displays a window similar
to the one given below.
The window gives information such as Identification Number, Adjoining Nodes, Length, Material
Properties, Section Properties, and Slab to Beam Loads and Elemental Loads of the selected
element.
You can choose this icon to inquire an element.
7.2.3 INQUIRE - DETAILS - NODE
This option allows you to inquire the geometric properties and other attributes of a selected node in
the plan geometry. In this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the node of which you
need detail information by cursor. Struds displays following window.
The window gives information such as Identification Number, Co-ordinates, Support condition and
Joint Loads of the selected node.
You can select this icon to inquire node.
7.2.4 INQUIRE - DETAILS - GRID
By using this option you can see the X and Y grids in the plan geometry and their co-ordinates from
origin, as shown below. Struds highlights the grids and shows the Y co-ordinates of X grids at the
right hand side of the screen. Similarly the X co-ordinates of Y grids are displayed at the top of the
screen. The display of grids can be put off by again selecting this option. When the display is on, a
check mark appears before this option in the menu. When you put off the display of grids, the check
mark disappears automatically.
You can select this icon to inquire grid.
7.2.5 INQUIRE - DETAILS - WALL
This option allows you to inquire the geometric properties and other attributes of an attached wall
onto a selected element in the plan geometry. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on
the screen. Select the element of which you need see the wall information by cursor. Struds displays
a window similar to the one given below.
The window gives information such as Identification Number, height, wall thickness and wall density
attached to an element.
You can select this icon present on toolbar to inquire details of wall.
7.2.6 INQUIRE - DETAILS - SHEARWALL
This option allows you to inquire the geometric properties and other attributes of a shear wall onto
a selected element in the plan geometry. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the
screen. Select the element of which you need to see the shearwall information by cursor. Struds
displays a window similar to the one given below.
This way you will get details for name of shear wall, its type (Straight, L shape or C shape), Its
component (A for straight, A or B for L shape and A, B or C for C shape), Wall thickness, Material for
shear wall, Master node and slave nodes for shear wall.
You can select this icon present on toolbar to inquire details of shearwall.
7.3 INQUIRE - STB LOADS FROM SLAB
This option can be used to see the loads of a selected slab on its supporting beams. When you select
this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the slab of which you want to see the loads by
cursor. Struds displays following window.
The window shows the type, intensity, distance of the starting point from the first node of the
element, the length of the element over which the load has been applied, as well as the angle of
load and the element ids on which these loads are transferred from the selected slab. Click on the
`Close' button to close the window.
7.4 INQUIRE - STB LOADS ON ELEMENT
This option allows you to see the value of loads transferred from slab on to the selected element.
When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the element of which you
need to know the STB loads. Struds displays following window.
In this window, Struds displays the list, type and value of all the loads transferred by the surrounding
slabs onto the selected element. The type of loads is denoted as
TNGR - Triangular load with maximum intensity to the right end. (Wedge Load - Right)
TNGL - Triangular load with maximum intensity to the left end. (Wedge Load - Left)
UDLP - Partial Uniformly Distributed Load
UDL - Uniformly distributed load
It should be noted that the triangular load from slab is divided into two parts - TNGR and TNGL.
Similarly, the Trapezoidal loads are divided into three parts TNGR, UDLP and TNGL.
7.5 INQUIRE - LOADS ON ELEMENTS
This option can be used to see the value of various loads coming on an element in the plan
geometry. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
This window has a drop down menu having the list of all elements in the current floor plan. Select
the element identification number from this drop down menu. Struds displays all the loads such as
slab to beam loads, wall loads and imposed loads coming on the selected element. Click on the
`Close' button to close the window.
7.6 INQUIRE - ZERO LENGTH ELEMENTS
On selecting this option, Struds will display, if any zero length elements have been created in the
modeled geometry. You would need to delete these elements, before proceeding to the analysis,
since the analysis of the structure would not be completed successfully.
7.7 INQUIRE - ELEMENTS WITHOUT SECTIONS
This option allows you to check whether sectional properties are attached to all the elements in the
plan geometry. If any of the elements is not attached section properties, the program will not be
able to perform the analysis. Struds will display a window indicating the number of elements to
which the sections are not attached.
7.8 INQUIRE - EDGE ELEMENTS

Using this option, you can view the edge elements, on the selected floor level. When you select this
option, the edge elements are automatically highlighted, as shown below.
7.9 INQUIRE - DROP ELEMENTS
Using this option, you can view the drop elements, on the selected floor level. When you select this
option, the drop elements are automatically highlighted with a dotted line.
7.10 INQUIRE - COINCIDENT NODES
This option allows you to check the input created by you. Sometimes if two nodes are created at the
same co-ordinate, the program will be unable to analyse the structure. When you select this option,
Struds searches all nodes for their co-ordinates and displays a warning message if any coincident
nodes are found.
7.11 INQUIRE - DISTANCE AND ANGLE
By using this option you can obtain the exact distance and angle between any two points on the
screen. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. The response by Struds is
as follows.
Ènter First Point':

Select the first point of the imaginary line of which you want to see the length and angle. You can
select the point directly by cursor or by using F8/F9 keys.
Ènter Second Point':
Select the second point by cursor or using F8/F9 keys.
Struds displays a window similar to the one given below.
The window gives the co-ordinates of first and second point, the distance between two points and
the angle formed by the imaginary line connecting these two points with X axis.
7.12 INQUIRE - SLAB ICON COLOUR TABLE
Whenever you create a slab, Struds allots a colour to the slab mark depending upon the live load
intensity on every slab. Thus, if you create a plan geometry having slabs with five different live load
intensities, then Struds marks the slabs with same LL by a colour. So you can see five different
colours slab marks on the screen. When you select this option, Struds displays the colour table it has
followed for different LL intensities.
7.13 INQUIRE - SECTION COLOUR TABLE
Whenever you create a section property, Struds allots a colour to it. Thus, if you attach five different
sections to all the elements in the plan, you can see the elements having same section highlighted by
same colour. So you can see five different colours for the elements on the screen. When you select
this option, Struds displays the colour table it has followed for different sectional properties.
7.14 INQUIRE - MATERIAL COLOUR TABLE
Whenever you create a material property, Struds allots a colour to it. Thus, if you attach five
different materials to all the elements in the plan, you can see the elements having same material
properties highlighted by same colour. So you can see five different colours for the elements on the
screen. When you select this option, Struds displays the colour table it has followed for different
material properties.
8. ANALYSIS
This top level file menu has several sub menu options, related to saving the analysis files, and
performing analysis, which have been listed below:
ANALYSIS - PREANALYSIS ENQUIRY

ANALYSIS - ANALYSIS OPTIONS
ANALYSIS - PERFORM ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS – PERFORM ANALYSIS - GENERATE PATTERN LOAD
ANALYSIS - FRONT OPTIMIZATION
8.1 ANALYSIS - PREANALYSIS ENQUIRY
This option can be used to verify the input data before preparing data for analysis. If you are not
sure that the input created is not fully correct, you can use this option to check the same. When you
Important Notes:
For creating data for analysis, following criteria must be satisfied.
1. All the elements at all floors must be assigned sectional and material properties.
2. There should not be any zero length element or coincident nodes.
3. Proper boundary conditions should be attached to the nodes. That is there must be some columns
in the geometry.
In the above window Struds displays the discrepancies if any in the input regarding above
requisitions.
8.2 ANALYSIS - ANALYSIS OPTIONS
This option enables you to save the analysis related files, depending upon the structure type, before
performing the analysis.
This dialog has four checkboxes, corresponding to each Structure Type. By default, the Space Frame
option is always checked, when you click on this option.
Depending upon the checkboxes, which you select, the dialog box, is further expanded as shown
below:
For eg, if you check the options for Plane Frame only, the following dialog box is displayed.
In this dialog box, the column towards the right shows the list of Selected Plane Frames, whereas the
list towards the left shows the list of available Plane Frames, in the structure. By default, all the files,
available are selected for analysis.
If the checkboxes, for all the three structure types, that is the "Plane Grid", "Plane Frame", as well as
the "Space Frame", have been checked, the dialog box, appears as shown below:
In this, if you want to move the file, from the list of "Available Files", to the list of "Selected Files",
click the button. On the other hand, if you want to move the file, from the list of "Selected
Files", to the list of "Available files", use the button.

Towards the bottom, of the dialog box, there is an option for the "Front Optimization" flag. If this
flag, is checked, the numbering of the elements will be done in such a manner, so that the "Front
Width" of the structure will be reduced to the minimum possible, so as to economise upon the
memory requirements as well as the computation time.
8.3 ANALYSIS - PERFORM ANALYSIS
Using this option, you can directly perform the analysis of the structure, for any structure type.
Before, using this option, make sure that you go to the option, ANALYSIS - ANALYSIS OPTIONS, to
save the analysis related files.
Once the files, have been saved using the above-mentioned option, the "Perform Analysis", will
simply perform the analysis for the all the files of the structure type, which have been saved.
For example, if you select, a few files for the Plane Grid structure, some files, for the Plane Frame
structure, as well as the Space Frame files, the analysis would be performed sequentially, starting
from the Plane Grid, the Plane Frame, and then the Space frame.
This icon can be used to give Perform Analysis command.
8.3.1 ANALYSI – PERFORM ANALYSIS – GENERATE PATTERN LOAD
Struds provides the users with option to generate pattern loads. To generate the pattern loads you
have the option under Analysis> Perform Analysis option.
Check the Generate Pattern Loads option. Struds will generate the pattern loads internally and will
give the message after loads are generated click OK on it.
Under pattern loading Struds will apply live load on either alternate spans or on two adjacent spans
with various combinations loads will be generated and finally during design of beam if you select
worst load combination then the design for worst of all load combinations including earthquake and
wing load combinations will be done.
8.4 ANALYSIS - FRONT OPTIMIZATION
Struds uses the Frontal Solution Technique for solution of the simultaneous equations. The efficiency
of this solution is based on "Front Width", which in turn depends on how the numbering of elements
is done. Struds has an in-built 'Front Optimization Algorithm' to renumber the elements such that
front width is reduced to minimum possible. This enhances the Solver performance and thereby
reduces the analysis time. Moreover it needs less CPU memory for the same number of equations.
By default, when a particular file is opened, this flag is always checked, and Struds automatically
optimizes the front width by numbering of elements of structure, when we save the structure.
9. MODE
This menu option is used to toggle between the modes available.
The following five modes are available in Struds
1) Prepro
2) Postpro
3) R.C.C Design
4) Steel Design
5) Individual Design
The functionality of each of these modes, has been briefly enlisted below:
• Prepro (Model Generator): This is the module, in which the user can model/ edit the
structure. By default, this is the module, which is opened when the user starts the program,
or opens a BLD file. This icon can be used to select Model Generator mode.
• Postpro: In this module, the user is capable of visualising the Post Analysis results. Before
going to this mode, it is essential that the analysis of the structure should have been
completed. This icon can be used to select postprocessor mode.
• R.C.C Design: This mode is to be selected, if the user wants to perform the R.C.C design of
the structure. In this module, the analysis results would be directly read from the output
files of the analysis. This icon can be used to select RCC Design mode.
• Steel Design: This mode enables the user to perform the Steel design of the structure. This
module is currently useful, for the design of Steel Trusses. This icon can be used to
select steel design mode.
• Individual Design: This mode needs to be selected, if the user wants to design individual
components of the structure. In this module, the input data needs to be given by the user.
This module of Struds is referred to as Struds – IDM
10. RESULTS
The Results menu option enables the user to view the Post Analysis results. To view the results, it is
essential, that the user should have completed the analysis of the structure, for at least a single
Structure Type (i.e. Plane Grid/ Plane Frame/ Space Frame).
Before selecting this option, you must set the current mode as "PostPro", unless and otherwise, all
the options under this menu caption will appear inactive.
This menu has the following options:
RESULTS - STRUCTURE TYPE

RESULTS - GEOMETRY
RESULTS - VECTOR DIAGRAM
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS
RESULTS - NODAL RESULTS
RESULTS - REPORTS
RESULTS - CONTROL
Each of these menu options has been discussed in detail, in the relevant topics.
10.1 STRUCTURE TYPE
This option allows you to select the type of structure for which you would like to visualise the
analysis results. You can select the structure type as any one of the following:
RESULTS - STRUCTURE TYPE - PLANE GRID

RESULTS - STRUCTURE TYPE - PLANE FRAME
RESULTS - STRUCTURE TYPE - SPACE FRAME
RESULTS - STRUCTURE TYPE - PLANE TRUSS
10.1.1STRUCTURE TYPE- PLANE GRID
When you select this option Struds displays the geometry of the floor, which has been selected in
the combo box, available at the left top edge of the window, for the building file, which has been
currently opened. In the plane grid structure type, the structure is ideally analysed as a three
dimensional structure, which is incapable of moving in the horizontal direction. In this case, no
horizontal loading is considered to be acting on the structure.
The combo available in this view displays the list of all the floor levels present in the building file. You
can view the results, for the Plane Grid structure type, for any of the floors in the structure, by
selecting that particular floor level, in the combo box.
10.1.2STRUCTURE TYPE - PLANE FRAME
When you select this option Struds displays the floor plan of the building structure, indicating the
plane frames coordinates along the X, Y and inclined axes of the selected building file. A box cursor
also appears on the screen. Select the frame for which you would like to view the results by moving
cursor along the gridline of that frame and clicking the mouse, so as to pick that Plane Frame.
The view available here displays, three different combo boxes, towards the top of the window. The
leftmost combo box displays the list of all the available Floor levels in the structure, the combo box
in between displays the list of all the levels, which may be associated with the floor, which has been
selected in the first combo box, whereas the last combo box displays the list of all the plane frames,
which are present in the structure.
Once you pick any plane frame, to view the results, you can also view the results for any of the other
plane frames available, by selecting that plane frame, in the last combo box.
10.1.3STRUCTURE - SPACE FRAME
When you select this option, Struds displays the space frame geometry of the structure and reads
the results from the analysis files, for the space frame structure type, so as to display the graphical
and text representation of the results on screen.
You can use the combo box, at the Top left, so as to set any particular floor level, for which you
would like to view the results for the space frame analysis, at that floor level. The first options
available in this Combo box, is "All Floors", which displays view of the entire structure, either in the
X-Y plane or the X-Z plane or the Y-Z plane. The Combo box at the top right serves to display the
results of the space frame analysis, for the selected Plane Frame.
10.1.4RESULTS - STRUCTURE TYPE - PLANE TRUSS
When you select this option, Struds displays the plane truss geometry on the screen and reads the
results from the analysis files, for the space frame structure type, so as to display the graphical and
text representation of the results on screen. If you have created, a truss only, then the structure type
will be automatically set as the Plane Truss type.
10.2 RESULTS - GEOMETRY
When you select this option, Struds displays the plain geometry of the structure. This option is useful
to remove the display of results from the geometry on the screen. For example, if you have used the
BMD - FULL option to view the bending moment diagram of the structure and you want to remove
the diagram to only see the structure geometry, you should click on this option.
10.3 RESULTS - VECTOR DIAGRAM
When you select this option, Struds displays the vector diagram of the structure type you have
selected.
10.4 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT
This menu offers you the facility to view the different elemental results, which have been listed
below:
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - SFD

RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - BMD
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - AXIAL
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - TORSION
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - DEFSHAPE
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - FBD
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - LOADS
10.4.1RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - SFD
This option is used to display the Shear force diagram, for the elements, on the current floor level, or
for the entire structure. This options has several sub options, which have been listed below
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - SFD - ELEMENT

RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - SFD - FULL
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - SFD - GRID
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - SFD - SELECTION SET
10.4.1.1 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - SFD – FULL
When you click on this option, Struds displays the SFD for whole structure geometry on the screen.
10.4.1.2 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - SFD - ELEMENT
When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. You can select any of the elements
from the structure geometry by using this cursor. Struds will now display the SFD for this selected
element.
Struds shows the SFD of the element at the right side. At the left side, the values of SFD are
displayed for every division of the selected element.
10.4.1.3 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - SFD - SELECTION SET
By using this option, you can see the SFD of selected element from the geometry. To define the
Selection Set use the options CONTROL - DEFINE SELECTION SET from the menu.
10.4.1.4 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - SFD – GRID
This option allows you to see the sfd and values of a continuous beam. When you select this option,
a box cursor appears on the screen. When you select an element by cursor, Struds selects all the
elements in line with this element for display.
At the right side Struds displays the SFD for the continuous beam. At the left side the values for
shear force at every division are displayed for all the elements in the grid. You can click on the NEXT
and PREVIOUS buttons to see the values for the elements in the grid.
Note -If you want to see the values in the SFD, select options CONTROL - VALUE from the main
menu of Post Processor.
If you want to see the distances where maximum and minimum values occur, select the options
CONTROL - VALUES from the menu.
If you want to change the number of divisions to display and prepare text report of the values, select
options CONTROL - No. Of Divisions.
10.4.2.1 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - BMD – FULL
When you click on this option, Struds displays the BMD for whole structure geometry on the screen.
10.4.2.2 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - BMD – ELEMENT

from the structure geometry by the cursor. Struds displays the BMD for this selected element.
Struds shows the BMD of the element at the right side. At the left side, the values of BMD are
10.4.2.3 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - BMD - SELECTION SET
By using this option, you can see the BMD of selected elements from the geometry. To define the
Selection Set use the options CONTROL - DEFINE SELECTION SET from the menu.
10.4.2.4 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - BMD - GRID
This option allows you to see the BMD and values of a continuous beam. When you select this
option, a box cursor appears on the screen. When you select an element by cursor, Struds selects all
the elements in line with this element for display.
At the right side Struds displays the BMD for the continuous beam. At the left side the values for
bending moment at every division are displayed for all the elements in the grid. You can click on the
NEXT and PREVIOUS buttons to see the values for the elements in the grid.
Note - If you want to see the values in the BMD, select options CONTROL - VALUE from the main
menu of Post Processor.
options CONTROL - No. Of Divisions
10.4.3RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - AXIAL
for the entire structure. This option has several sub options, which have been listed below.
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - AXIAL - FULL

RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - AXIAL - ELEMENT
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - AXIAL - SELECTION SET
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - AXIAL – GRID
10.4.3.1 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - AXIAL - FULL
When you click this option, Struds displays the diagram for the axial forces, for the whole structural
geometry.
10.4.3.2 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - AXIAL - ELEMENT
from the structure geometry by the cursor. Struds displays the Axial load diagram for this selected
element.
Struds shows the Axial Load Diagram of the element at the right side. At the left side, the values are
10.4.3.3 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - AXIAL - SELECTION SET
By using this option, you can see the axial force values of selected elements from the geometry. To
define the Selection Set use the options CONTROL - DEFINE SELECTION SET from the menu.
10.4.3.4 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - AXIAL - GRID
This option allows you to see the Axial force diagram and values of a continuous beam. When you
select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. When you select an element by cursor, Struds
selects all the elements in line with this element for display.
At the right side Struds displays the Axial Force Diagram for the continuous beam. At the left side the
values for Axial Force at every division are displayed for all the elements in the grid. You can click on
the NEXT and PREVIOUS buttons to see the values for the elements in the grid.
Note -If you want to see the values in the Axial force diagram, select options CONTROL - VALUE from
the main menu of Post Processor.
10.4.4RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - TORSION
for the entire structure. This option has several sub options, which have been listed below.
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - TORSION - FULL

RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - TORSION - ELEMENT
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - TORSION - SELECTION SET
RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - TORSION – GRID
10.4.4.1 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - TORSION - FULL
When you click on this option, Struds displays the diagram for torsional values for whole structure
geometry on the screen.
10.4.4.2 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - TORSION - ELEMENT
from the structure geometry by the cursor. Struds displays the Torsional diagram for this selected
element.
Struds shows the Torsional Diagram of the element at the right side. At the left side, the values are
10.4.4.3 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - TORSION - SELECTION SET
By using this option, you can see the torsional values of selected elements from the geometry. To
define the Selection Set use the options CONTROL - DEFINE SELECTION SET from the menu.
10.4.4.4 RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - TORSION - GRID
This option allows you to see the Torsional diagram and values of a continuous beam. When you
select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. When you select an element by cursor, Struds
selects all the elements in line with this element for display.
At the right side Struds displays the Torsional Diagram for the continuous beam. At the left side the
values for Torsion at every division are displayed for all the elements in the grid. You can click on the
NEXT and PREVIOUS buttons to see the values for the elements in the grid.
Note - If you want to see the values in the Torsional diagram, select options CONTROL - VALUE from
the main menu of Post Processor.
10.4.5RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - DEF SHAPE
When you select this option, Struds displays the deflected shape of all or selected elements in the
structure geometry. It has following options to select the elements.
Def Shape - Elemental – Full
When you click on this option, Struds displays the diagram for deflection values for whole structure
geometry on the screen.
Def Shape - Elemental – Element
from the structure geometry by the cursor. Struds displays the Deflected Shape diagram for this
selected element.
Struds shows the Deflected Shape Diagram of the element at the right side. At the left side, the
values are displayed for every division of the selected element.
Def Shape - Elemental - Selection Set
By using this option, you can see the deflection values of selected elements from the geometry. To
define the `Selection Set' uses the options CONTROL - DEFINE SELECTION SET from the menu.
Def Shape - Elemental – Grid
This option allows you to see the Deflected Shape diagram and deflection values of a continuous
beam. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. When you select an element
by cursor, Struds selects all the elements in line with this element for display.
At the right side Struds displays the Deflected Shape Diagram for the continuous beam. At the left
side the values for Deflection at every division are displayed for all the elements in the grid. You can
click on the NEXT and PREVIOUS buttons to see the values for the elements in the grid.
10.4.6RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULT - FBD
By using this option, you can see the Free Body Diagram of any of the elements in the structure
geometry. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the element of
which you want to see the Free Body Diagram by moving cursor along that element and clicking.
10.4.7RESULTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS - LOADS
LOADS - ELEMENTAL –FULL
When you select this option, Struds displays the graphical representation of elemental loads for all
the elements in the structure geometry. You can also see the values for elemental loads.
At the top Struds displays the geometry with graphical representation of elemental loads. At the
bottom, the text report for load values is shown. The text report can be controlled by selecting the
following options at its top.
Select Load Source
By using this option, you can select the source of load on the elements for which you want to see the
graphics and values on the screen. When you select this option Struds displays following window.
The loads on element can be due to wall, slab or any external load applied by the user. This window
has the checkboxes for these. By default Struds displays the loads due to all the three sources. So the
checkboxes are marked by default. You can mark or unmark the checkboxes to put on/off the display
of load and their values on the screen.
Select Load case
By using this option, you can select the load case for which you want to see the graphics and values
of loads on the screen. When you select this option Struds displays following window.
This window shows the list of load cases for which analysis is done. Select the load case/s for which
you want to see the loads and click on the OK button.
Show Selected Loads
This option allows you to see the graphics for selected loads on a particular element. Select the loads
in the list in the text at the bottom of screen and click on this option. Struds will display the graphics
for the element and the selected loads acting on it.
Show All Loads

This option allows you to see all the loads on the elements when you have selected the previous
option of `Show Selected Load'.
LOADS - ELEMENTAL –ELEMENT
This option allows you to see the graphics and values of loads acting on a particular element. When
you select this option Struds displays following window.
The window has a drop down menu showing the list of all the elements in the structure geometry.
Select the element number of which you want to see the loads and click on the OK button. Struds
will display that element with the graphical representation of loads acting on it and their numerical
values.
LOADS - ELEMENTAL - SELECTION SET
By using this option, you can see the loads acting on a set of selected elements from the geometry.
To define the Selection Set use the options CONTROL - DEFINE SELECTION SET from the menu.
LOADS - ELEMENTAL – GRID
This option allows you to see the graphical representation of loads and their values for a continuous
beam. When you select this option, a window appears on the screen.
This window has a drop down menu showing the list of grid id numbers. When you select a grid
number from this menu, Struds selects that grid for display.
At the top Struds displays the graphical diagram of loads for the grid/continuous beam. At the
bottom the values of loads are displayed for all the elements in the grid.
10.5 RESULTS - NODAL RESULT
This menu option offers you the facility to view the nodal analysis results, for the categories
mentioned below:
RESULTS - NODAL RESULTS - DEFLECTION

RESULTS - NODAL RESULTS - REACTION
RESULTS - NODAL RESULTS – LOADS
10.5.1RESULTS - NODAL RESULT - DEFLECTION

When you select this option, Struds displays the deflected shape of all or selected nodes in the
structure geometry. This option remains inactive for Plane Grid structure type. It has following
options.
10.5.1.1 Results - Nodal Result - Deflection – Physical
When you select this option, Struds displays the physical deflected shape with respect to the original
shape of the structure. You can see the deformation of structure geometry against the loads. If you
want to see the deflected shape for a particular load combination, you can define that load
combination by using option LOAD COMB from the menu. Then select the load combination by using
the options RESULTS - CONTROL - LOAD COMBINATIONS to visualise the deflected shape for the
selected load combination.
10.5.1.2 Results - Nodal Result - Deflection – Values
This option allows you to see the deflection of joints/nodes due to vertical as well as horizontal
loads. It has following options to decide the selection.
Results - Nodal Results - Deflection - Values - FULL - When you select this option Struds display
deflection values for all Nodes.
Results - Nodal Results - Deflection - Values - NODE - When you select this option Struds display
deflection values for selected Node.
Results - Nodal Results - Deflection - Values - SELECTION SET- when you select this option Struds
display deflection values for selected Set.
10.5.2RESULTS - NODAL RESULTS - REACTION
This option allows you to see the values of reactions at every node where support conditions are
provided in the structure geometry. It has following options to decide the selection of nodes and the
type of reaction values.
FULL
When you select this option, Struds displays the reaction values at all nodes in the structure
geometry where the support conditions are provided.
NODE
When you select this option, a window appears on the screen. This window has a drop down menu
indicating the nodes in the geometry where support conditions are applied. Select the node from the
drop down menu for which you want to see the reaction values and click on the OK button. Struds
displays that node on the screen with values of reaction.
SELECTION SET
By using this option, you can see the reactions at selected nodes from the geometry. To define the
Selection Set use the options RESULTS - CONTROL - DEFINE SELECTION SET from the menu.
WHICH ALL?
This option allows you to decide on the type of reaction values you want to be displayed on screen.
The window has check boxes for the display of reaction values for moments and forces along all the
three axes. Select the values that you want to be displayed by clicking on respective check boxes and
click on the OK button.
10.5.3RESULTS - NODAL RESULT - LOADS
RESULTS - NODAL RESULT – FULL
If you attach Nodal loads externally then you can see Nodal load diagram for all nodes.
RESULTS - NODAL RESULT – PATICULAR
When you select this option then Struds displays Nodal Load diagram for particular Nodes.
10.6 RESULTS – SURFACE ELEMENT RESULTS
This option enables you to view, FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS results of the structural model. Using
this one may see the stresses and displacements in various directions.
On left hand side various options are given to select the format of output those are
described in detail below.
Using floor drop down one can select the floor for which he wants to see the results.
Using level drop down one can select specific level for selected floor to see the results.
Using load cases drop down one can select the load case for which he wants to see the
analysis output. Load cases are in sequence of DL, LL, EQX+, EQX-, EQY+, EQY-, EQZ+, EQZ-,
WLX+, WLX-, WLY+, WLY-. Provided that eq and wind loads are generated before performing
FEM analysis. Else only default DL and LL cases will be displayed. With number 1 and 2.
Using Plot variables option one may select the output results for stresses or displacements.
By selecting show mesh in plot option one could see the result contours along with discritizing mesh.
Show field plots will show you the area covered with contours for analysis results.
Show contour plot will show you results with contour lines without filling effect.
Number of bands indicates the division of results. For field plot it is suggested to select
values between 2 to 1024 and for contour plots it is suggested to use number of divisions
between 2 to 20. If you select 16 you will get 16 shades on plan indication various values
given on right side on plan.
To activate any of the above command one should click on Refresh Plot button to get the required
output.
If user wants to see only mesh then he should use show only the mesh option.
Using file exit option one can close the window for surface element results and go to normal
postprocessor mode.
10.6 RESULTS - REPORTS
This option enables you to view, and generate the analysis reports, in different formats, as
mentioned below:
RESULTS - REPORTS - ELEMENTAL

RESULTS - REPORTS - NODAL
RESULTS - REPORTS - LOADS
RESULTS - REPORTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS REPORT KEY
RESULTS - REPORTS – ANALYSIS
RESULTS - REPORTS – RESPONSE SPECTRUM ANALYSIS
RESULTS - REPORTS - SHEAR WALL ANALYSIS REPORT
10.6.1RESULTS - REPORTS - ELEMENTAL
This option allows you to prepare text report of analysis results for the elements in the structure.
Results - Report - Elemental Results – Full
When you select this option, Struds prepares a text report of analysis results for all the elements in
structure geometry. If the structure type is grid, all the elements in the selected floor will be
included in the report. If the structure type is plane frame, all the elements in the selected frame will
be included. If the structure type is space frame, all the elements in the entire structure are
included.
Results - Report - Elemental Results – Element
This option allows you to prepare the text report for analysis results of a particular element. When
you select this option Struds displays following window.
Select the element number of which you want to prepare text report of analysis results and click on
the OK button. Struds will display that the text report showing numerical values of analysis results
for the selected element.
Results - Report - Elemental results - Selection Set
By using this option, you can prepare the text report for analysis results for a set of selected
elements from the geometry. To define the Selection Set use the options RESULTS - CONTROL -
DEFINE SELECTION SET from the main menu of Post-Processor.
Results - Reports - Elemental Results – Grid
This option allows you to prepare the text report of analysis results for a continuous beam. When
you select this option, a window appears on the screen.
number from this menu, Struds selects that grid for preparing the report.
10.6.2RESULTS - REPORTS - NODAL
This option allows you to prepare the text report of analysis results for all the nodes in the structure
geometry. It has following options.
Results - Reports - Nodal Results – Reaction
When you select this option Struds prepares a text report of analysis results showing values of
reactions for all the nodes in the structure where support conditions are applied. You can store this
text report in a file having extension TXT by using the Write to File option.
Results - Reports - Nodal Results – Deflection
When you select this option Struds prepares a text report of deflection values of reactions for all the
nodes in the structure. You can store this text report in a file having extension TXT by using the
`Print' - `Write to File' option.
10.6.3RESULTS - REPORTS - LOADS
This option allows you to prepare text report of load values acting on the elements in the structure.
Report - Loads – Full
When you select this option, Struds prepares a text report of values of loads acting on all the
elements in structure geometry. If the structure type is grid, all the elements in the selected floor
will be included in the report. If the structure type is plane frame, all the elements in the selected
frame will be included. If the structure type is space frame, all the elements in the entire structure
are included.
Report - Loads – Element
This option allows you to prepare the text report of values of loads acting on a particular element.
Select the element number of which you want to prepare text report of values of loads and click on
the OK button. Struds will display that the text report showing numerical values of loads for the
selected element.
Results - Report - Loads - Selection Set
By using this option, you can prepare the text report of values of loads for a set of selected elements
from the geometry. To define the Selection Set use the options CONTROL - DEFINE SELECTION SET
from the main menu of Post-Processor.
Results - Report - Loads - Grid
This option allows you to prepare the text report of values of loads for a continuous beam. When
you select this option, a window appears on the screen.
number from this menu, Struds selects that grid for preparing the report.
10.6.4RESULTS - REPORTS - ELEMENTAL RESULTS REPORT KEY
This option allows you to decide the type of analysis results to be included in the reports. On
selection Struds displays following window.
10.6.5RESULTS - REPORT - ANALYSIS REPORT
This option gives the Load case wise and Load combination wise both analysis reports for Global
data, Geometry, Property, Member forces, Support reaction and Nodal Deflection.
When you select this option, Struds displays the following window
In this, you can generate the analysis report, for all the options, either "Load Case wise", as is shown
above, or "Load Combination wise".
In either of these the available Load Cases, or the Load Combinations are displayed in the window
towards the right. The analysis report would be generated for all the Load Cases/ Load
Combinations.
If you choose the option "Load Combination Wise", the dialog box, will appear as shown below,
wherein, the entire list of available Load Combinations are displayed in the window towards the
right:
Check or uncheck for the desired report. On 'OK', Struds displays the Analysis report in HTML format.
10.6.6RESULTS - REPORTS – RESPONSE SPECTRUM ANALYSIS
If the EQ loads are generated by the Response spectrum method, then this option is highlighted. The
report will show you all the details pertaining to the response of the building, to seismic excitation,
in terms frequency as of the time period of vibration for each mode.
It would also show all the details of the nodal EQ loads generated, in the X+, X-, Y+, and Y- directions.
If the effect of torsion due to eccentricity between the Centre of stiffness and the Centre of Mass is
also accounted for, this report will also show you all the details of the elemental forces for the first
solution F1, the second solution F2, as well as the final solution represented as F1 + 0.5(F1- F2).
10.6.7RESULTS - REPORTS - SHEAR WALL ANALYSIS REPORT
PROJECT :
PLAN : revrep
JOB NO. :1 REF. NO. :
DATE : 10/22/05 TIME : 14:30:16
Building Version : 1.420 Struds Version : 1.0.0
Shear Wall Analysis Report
ShearWall Element Local Axes
Straight Type of Shear Walls:
ShearWall : ST
Component : A Floor : 0 to 1 Element : 1
Node Fx Fy Fz Mx My Mz
Load Combination kN kN kN kN-m kN-m kN-m
1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 1 -309.26 -4.58 2.73 -0.09 2.72 29.20
10 258.63 4.58 -2.73 0.09 5.47 -15.46
1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 10 -206.70 -6.45 4.93 0.42 8.03 23.47
38 156.07 6.45 -4.93 -0.42 6.76 -4.13
1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 38 -102.51 -6.62 7.22 1.03 9.42 14.13
66 51.88 6.62 -7.22 -1.03 12.25 5.73
L Type of Shear Walls:
ShearWall : L
1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 4 -300.12 -0.39 0.80 0.03 0.69 -62.82
24 232.62 0.39 -0.80 -0.03 1.70 63.98

1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 24 -199.59 -0.25 1.41 0.05 2.13 -43.00
52 132.09 0.25 -1.41 -0.05 2.10 43.76

1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 52 -98.79 -0.04 1.64 0.06 2.20 -24.06
80 31.29 0.04 -1.64 -0.06 2.72 24.18
Component : B Floor : 0 to 1 Element : 2

1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 2 -291.37 7.29 0.40 0.05 0.34 64.93
15 223.87 -7.29 -0.40 -0.05 0.85 -86.79
1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 15 -194.46 8.80 0.71 0.16 1.08 39.98
43 126.96 -8.80 -0.71 -0.16 1.06 -66.37
1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 43 -98.03 8.03 0.88 0.23 1.17 20.00
71 30.53 -8.03 -0.88 -0.23 1.46 -44.10
C Type of Shear Walls:
ShearWall : C
1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 5 -210.60 0.05 0.54 0.11 0.45 5.44
27 176.85 -0.05 -0.54 -0.11 1.18 -5.59
1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 27 -140.63 0.77 1.18 0.01 1.80 0.64
55 106.88 -0.77 -1.18 -0.01 1.75 -2.96

1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 55 -70.47 1.88 1.51 -0.10 2.10 -0.86
83 36.72 -1.88 -1.51 0.10 2.42 -4.79

1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 3 -200.00 -2.36 -0.00 0.03 0.01 9.56
21 166.25 2.36 0.00 -0.03 -0.02 -2.48

1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 21 -132.70 -2.08 -0.01 0.07 -0.01 6.12
49 98.95 2.08 0.01 -0.07 -0.01 0.14

1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 49 -68.15 -1.35 -0.01 0.09 -0.01 3.79
77 34.40 1.35 0.01 -0.09 -0.02 0.26
Component : C Floor : 0 to 1 Element : 6

1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 6 -178.45 0.44 -0.61 0.02 -0.66 -2.31
28 144.70 -0.44 0.61 -0.02 -1.16 1.00
1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 28 -119.76 0.62 -1.14 0.08 -1.76 -1.18
56 86.01 -0.62 1.14 -0.08 -1.65 -0.69
1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 56 -59.67 0.69 -1.32 0.13 -1.88 -0.82
84 25.92 -0.69 1.32 -0.13 -2.08 -1.24
10.7 RESULTS - CONTROL
This option offers you the facility to modify various parameters, before viewing the analysis results.
These have been listed below:
RESULTS - CONTROL - LOAD COMBINATIONS

RESULTS - CONTROL - DEFINE SET
RESULTS - CONTROL - VALUE
RESULTS - CONTROL - NO OF DIVISIONS
RESULTS - CONTROL - DISTANCE
RESULTS - CONTROL - PRECISION
RESULTS - CONTROL - SCALE FACTOR
RESULTS - CONTROL - MULTIPLICATION FACTOR
RESULTS - CONTROL - PHYSICAL DEFLECTION FACTOR
RESULTS - CONTROL - FONT
RESULTS - CONTROL - ID'S COLUMNS/SLABS
10.7.1RESULTS - CONTROL - LOAD COMBINATIONS
This option allows you to chose the load combination for which you want to see the analysis results.
The default load combination for display of values is 1.5DL+1.5LL. You should have defined the
desired load combinations by using the LOAD COMB menu from the main menu of Post Processor.
The window displays the list of all the defined load combinations. Select the load combination for
which you want to see the results and click on the OK button. Struds reads the analysis results for
this load combination. Now when you try any of the options from the menu the results for the
selected load combination are displayed on screen. Also all the text reports generated shall belong
to the selected load combination.
10.7.2RESULTS - CONTROL - DEFINE SET
This option allows you to define a set for elements, nodes and load combinations for which the
analysis results are displayed on the screen. For example if you select a few elements by using this
option, and when you select the BMD - Selection Set option from menu, Struds will display the
bending moment diagram for only those elements included in Selection Set.
At the left this window has a column giving the list of available elements in the structure geometry.
The right column will display the element ids, which you have selected in the Selection Set. The
window has following buttons at the right side to select the elements.
ADD
Select the element ids from the Source Set list and click on this button to add them in the Selection
Set.
ADD ALL
Select this button if you want to add all the elements from Source Set to Selection Set.
REMOVE
Select the element id from the Selection Set and select on this button to remove it from the
Selection set.
REMOVE ALL
Select this button to remove all the elements from Selection Set back to Source Set.
OK
Click on this button once you have defined the Selection Set to save and close this window.
CANCEL
Click on this button to abandon the defining of Selection Set and close the window.
10.7.3RESULTS - CONTROL - VALUE
This option allows you to control the display of values of analysis results in the diagrams. This option
is activated only when you have already selected one the options in the menu for graphically
displaying the analysis results. When you select this option Struds displays following window.
This window has two check boxes for display of maximum and minimum values. By default both the
check boxes are unmarked. You can select the checkbox to see the maximum value, minimum value
or both in the graphics display. Select the OK button to close the window.
10.7.4RESULTS - CONTROL - NO OF DIVISIONS
This option allows you to decide the number of divisions of the elements for displaying the graphical
diagrams and text reports. When you select this option Struds displays following window.
By default Struds divides every element into 16 parts. You can change this by simply overwriting the
value in the above field.
10.7.5RESULTS - CONTROL - DISTANCE
This option allows you to see the distances at which maximum values and zero values (point of
contra flexure) occur in the elements. This option is activated only when you have already selected
one the options in the menu for graphically displaying the analysis results. When you select this
option Struds displays following window.
This window has three check boxes for display of distances where maximum, minimum and zero
values occur. By default all the three check boxes are unmarked. You can select the checkbox to see
the distance where maximum value, minimum value, zero value occur in the graphics display. Select
the OK button to close the window.
10.7.6RESULTS - CONTROL - PRECISION
This option allows you to determine the decimal digits up to which you want to display and prepare
reports for the values of analysis results. This option is activated only when you have already
selected one the options in the menu for displaying the analysis results in text format; for example
you have selected BMD - ELEMENT OPTION.
This window has two fields for precision value for analysis results and distances where these values
occur. The default precision is 3. Which means that the values are displayed upto three digits. You
can change this by simply overwriting them in the fields and clicking on the OK button.
10.7.7RESULTS - CONTROL - SCALE FACTOR
This option allows you to set the scale for display of graphical representation of analysis results. This
option is activated only when you have already selected one the options in the menu for graphically
displaying the analysis results.
Overwrite the value in the field to change the display. If you type 2, the diagram will be enlarged
twice for display. If you type 0.8, the diagram will be reduced by 20% for display.
10.7.8RESULTS - CONTROL - MULTIPLICATION FACTOR
This option allows you to multiply the analysis result values by a factor for displaying and preparing
text reports. When you select this option Struds displays following window.
Simply overwrite the value in the field to multiply the result values. Struds will then prepare and
display the analysis results reports by multiplying the actual analysis values by this factor.
10.7.9RESULTS - CONTROL - PHYSICAL DEFLECTION FACTOR
This option allows you to magnify the actual deflections by the specified factor.
10.7.10 RESULTS - CONTROL - FONT
This option allows you to change the font settings for the display of text in the graphical diagrams on
the screen. When you select this option Struds displays following window.
This window displays the list of text types in the graphical display of analysis results in Post -
processor. Select the component for which you want to change the font settings and click on the Ok
button. Struds then displays the standard window for font settings. You can change the font type,
size etc as per your requirement by using various options in this window. You can click on the RESET
ALL button to resort back to default font settings.
10.7.11 RESULTS - CONTROL - IDS / COLUMNS / SLABS
On selecting this option, Struds displays the dialog box, as shown below:
Using the radio buttons, available in this dialog box, you can select the I.D’s, which are to be
displayed, on screen, for the Elements, Nodes, Columns, as well as the slabs.
11. RCC DESIGN
This module of Struds allows you to design the structure you have generated in Pre-Processor mode
and have analysed it as Grid, Plane Frame or Space Frame. You can analyse the structure by either
one or all of these three methods.
The results of analysis are directly read by Struds. Before performing the R.C.C design of any
component, you must set the current mode to R.C.C design, using the Mode - RCC Design option.
Struds performs the design of all the components by the Limit State Method.
This menu, has several menu option, which have been listed below:
• Set Structure Type

• Load Combinations
• Design Parameters
• Design All
• Slab
• Beam
• Column
• Shear Wall
• Footing
• Design data report
• Cost
• Display setting
• Font settings
• Drawing settings
11.1 RCC DESIGN - SET STRUCTURE TYPE
This option is used to set the structure type for design, before you proceed to the design of any
component.
When the model is created in the preprocessor, you can analyze it using any of the three methods,
namely the Plane Grid, Plane Frame or the Space Frame method.
Similarly, once the analysis results are available for the all the three types, the design of the RCC
components can be performed for any of the structure types. When the Structure type has been set
to any one of the options, the design of all the components would be performed using the results for
the current structure Type.
Before starting with the design, set the structure type to any one of the above mentioned structure
types.
This Structure type will be used to design all the RCC components, namely the beams, Columns,
Shear Walls as well as the Footings. Before, setting the structure type, ensure that the analysis
pertaining to that Structure Type has been completed, in all respects.
The default Structure Type is set to the Plane Grid, by Struds, when the mode is set to Design.
This can be changed at any stage while executing the design module.
11.2 RCC DESIGN – LOAD COMBINATIONS
This option is used to set the LOAD COMBINATION for design, before you proceed to the design of
Beams, columns, footings and shear walls.
You can add or delete any load combination than the default load combinations for which
you want to design the structures.
11.3 RCC DESIGN - DESIGN PARAMETERS
This option allows you to set all the parameters, required for the design of all the RCC components.
Before proceeding to the design, ensure that you have set all the parameters, with which you would
like to proceed to the design of all the components.
When you click this menu option, Struds displays a tabbed property page. This has four different
tabs for setting the design parameters, of Slabs, Beams, Columns as well as Footings.
These have been discussed in details below:
Slabs
Beams
Columns
3D Elements
Footings
Shear Walls
11.3.1RCC DESIGN - DESIGN PARAMETERS - SLABS

This option allows you to set the parameters for slab design. When you select this option Struds
At the left top of this window, we have three drop down menus that allow you to choose the basic
material types for design.
The first drop down menu gives the list of material types (grades of concrete) such as M15, M20,
M35 etc. You should select the material type for which you want to design the slabs from this menu.
The second drop down menu gives the list of grades of steel that will be considered while providing
main or primary reinforcement in the slabs. The available steel grades are Fe250 (Mild Steel), Fe415
(Tor Steel) and Fe500 and Fe550 (High strength tor steel). Select the steel grade from the drop down
menu.
The third drop down menu gives the list of grades of steel that will be considered while providing
distribution or secondary reinforcement in the slabs. The available steel grades are Fe250 (Mild
Steel), Fe415 (Tor Steel) and Fe500 and Fe550 (High strength tor steel). Select the steel grade from
the drop down menu.
Below this, there are two options that allow you to decide the span of Trapezoidal Slab for Design.
USE MAXIMUM LENGTH

When you select this option, Struds will consider the maximum length of trapezoidal slab as span for
design purpose.
USE AVERAGE LENGTH
When you select this option, Struds will consider the average length of trapezoidal slab as span for
design purpose.
General slab will be designed as two-way slab. User can choose the option for general slab
design either as maximum length or Equivalent length.
USE MAXIMUM LENGTH
If the option for maximum length is considered then the slab will be designed for span equal
to maximum dimensions considered as rectangular or square.
BMax
LMax
Fig.1 Rectangle Slab Bounding Irregular Slab
USE EQUIVALENT LENGTH
If the option for equivalent length is considered then the slab will be designed for span as
shown in figure given below.
Be BMax
Le
LMax
Fig. 2 Rectangle Slab with Equivalent Dimensions
General slab by default will be designed as discontinuous slab.
REINFORCEMENT DETAILS
The right side of the first tab, displays various fields and options, related to the Reinforcement
detailing.
Type the value of effective cover in the field provided for it.
Type the values of maximum and minimum spacing for main and distribution reinforcements bars in
slabs. Struds will provide the bar spacing in this range. If the spacing goes beyond the specified
range, Struds will change the bar diameters to adjust the spacing.
You can also select the type of detailing to be provided. If you select the `Bent up' option, Struds
provides alternate bars bent up in the slab. If you select `Curtailment' the bars are curtailed at top
and bottom and their lengths are specified in outputs. If you select the `None' option, Struds
provides straight bars without bent ups or curtailment.
You can specify the minimum bar diameter as well as the maximum spacing for the temperature
steel.
You can also specify the minimum bar diameters to be used while providing main and distribution
reinforcement. Struds will follow these diameters while providing the reinforcement in design. If the
spacing criteria is not satisfied; Struds will take higher bar diameters to satisfy the spacing criteria.
Under slab detailing parameters user can give factors for top steel detailing and bottom steel
detailing. According to those factors for end support and continuous support at top and bottom
detailing the DXF drawings will be generated.
Click on the ÒK' button to save and apply the design parameters specified by you. If you click on the
`Cancel' button. Struds will take the default parameters for design.
11.3.2RCC DESIGN - DESIGN PARAMETERS - BEAM
The second tab of the properties page displays the design parameters to be taken for the
consideration of beam design.
This option allows you to set the basic parameters for beam design. When you select this option
This window at the left displays the cross section of a typical beam and the conventions used for
various parameters like cover, grade of steel and maximum aggregate size. Below this are the drop
down menus and fields where you can specify the parameters by overwriting default values.
MAIN STEEL (FY):
The drop down menu indicates the grades of steel available such as Fe250 - Mild Steel, Fe415 - Tor
Steel, Fe500 and Fe550 - High Strength Tor Steel. Select the grade of steel that you want to use for
the main reinforcement i.e. the longitudinal reinforcement at the top and bottom of beam from this
drop down menu.
STIRRUPS (FYS):
The drop down menu indicates the grades of steel available such as Fe250 - Mild Steel, Fe415 - Tor
Steel, Fe500 and Fe550 - High Strength Tor Steel. Select the grade of steel that you want to use for
the stirrup reinforcement i.e. the vertical reinforcement along the beam in the form of rings.
Below the drop down menus are three fields for specifying concrete covers.
TENSION (CT):
In this field type the value of effective cover you want to provide for bottom bars in the beam.
COMPRESSION (CB):
In this field type the value of effective cover you want to provide for top bars in the beam.
SIDE (CS):
In this field type the value of effective cover you want to provide for stirrups along the side face of
the beam.
NO. OF DIVISIONS:
This field denotes the no. Of divisions in an element at which the design results are to be displayed.
For analysis, Struds divides each element into 10 parts. For design you can consider the divisions
equal to or less than 10. While preparing the reports for design, Struds will display the results as per
the number of divisions specified by you.
REINFORCEMENT PARAMETERS
Towards the right of this property page, we have the data related to the Reinforcement detailing:
At the top there is a field for `Minimum Spacing' for Stirrup Design. When you have specified the
grade of steel for stirrups in the `Design Parameters' window; Struds while designing takes up the
minimum diameter available for the selected grade of steel. Thus if you have specified Fe250 grade
of steel for stirrups, Struds will assume 6 dia bars for stirrups. Struds then calculates the spacing
required for this dia. If this spacing is less than the minimum spacing specified by you in above field,
Struds will take the next higher dia say 8mm and recalculates the spacing. You can specify the grade,
dia and legs of stirrups to be considered if the stirrups spacing works out to be less than the
specified spacing by selecting the drop down menus available below this.
There are three drop down menus. The first drop down menu has the grade of steel that you can
select for stirrups.
From the second drop down menu you can select the bar diameter to be used if the spacing is less
than specified.
From the third drop down menu you can specify the number of legs that should be used if the
spacing is less than specified.
You can select the bar diameters, available for design of the beam. Click on the option "Select Bar
Diameters". This will display the dialog box as shown below:
You can select the bar diameters from the available list of bar diameters available in the list on the
left side. By default, the available bar diameters are 8, 10, 12, 16, 20 and 25mm
At the right are two options for design considerations. The check marks before these options denote
whether they are active or not. By default both these options are active.
DESIGN AS DOUBLY?
When this option is active, Struds will design a beam as doubly reinforced if the available depth is
not sufficient to design as singly reinforced. If you deactivate this option by removing the check mark
from the box, and continue the design, Struds displays a message if the available depth for beam is
not sufficient for singly reinforced design.
You can then click on the `YES' button to design the beam as doubly reinforced. If you want to
change the properties of beam, click on the `No' button. Struds displays following window.
This window shows the beam number, its span, section, current grade of concrete and grade of
steel.
There are also two drop down menus for grade of concrete and steel. You can change the grade of
concrete by selecting a higher grade from the drop down menu and select `SAVE' and `CLOSE'
options. Struds will then redesign the beam. The change of grade of concrete, grade of steel or
section can be done for the current beam or all the beams in the floor. If you want to change the size
of beam, click on the `CHANGE' button. Struds displays following window.
In this window you can ask the program to increase the width, depth or both by providing the
increment value. Click on the option for width, depth or both and overwrite the value of increment
in the field given below.
If the section is a T section or L section, the options at the down portion of window become active
and you can type the dimensions of section in the fields to redesign the beam.
Select `CLOSE' button of save & close the window. Now the previous window of `Change Beam
Properties' is again active. Select the buttons `SAVE' and `Close'. Struds will redesign the beam for
the revised section.
TORSION EFFECT IN DESIGN
When this option is active, Struds will design the beams for torsional moments. If you put off this
option, Struds will not consider the effect of torsion on beams while designing. If you do not want to
consider the torsional moment in analysis, while providing the sections, you can change the torsional
constant of section as zero by overwriting the value in the window for section define by selecting the
`PROPERTIES' button for a particular section.
MINIMUM DIA OF ANCHOR BAR
A drop down menu is provided to select the minimum diameter of the anchor bar in the beam
design. Struds will provide the anchor bar of the dia. provided by the user.
SUPPORT WIDTH EFFECT IN DESIGN
If we tick on this check box then the column width will be taken into consideration while designing
the beams.
CONSIDER CLEAR COVERS AS EFFECTIVE COVERS
If this flag is made on then the effective covers will be accepted in the covers region. If the fag is
made of then the clear covers could be entered and as per detailing the effective covers will be
changed and accordingly the checks will be performed.
PATTERN LOADS EFFECT IN DESIGN
If you generate the pattern loads at preprocessor mode then by default this flag is made on. IF you
don't want to consider the pattern loads for design purpose then make the flag off.
USER DEFINED BAR DATA

User can click this flag on and can include the path for data sheet of number of bars and bar
diameters. Software will read this data and will give the detailing accordingly.
IS 13920 PROVISIONS FOR EQ. DETAILING.
By default this flag is off. If you generate the earthquake loads on structure then you should make
this flag on. By making this flag on all clauses in IS 13920 for detailing of reinforcement for
earthquake resistance will be implemented in design and detailing of beams.
USER DEFINED DETAILING

After clicking on this option you will see the following dialogue box.
Here you can give the factors for top and bottom steel detailing. The lap length factors for top steel
and bottom steel can be given under top and bottom steel detailing while the rounding factor can be
given for stirrups detailing. To desiding the lapping of baars the maximum length of steel bar is
required to be filed in the edit box.
Under beam detailing considerations one can deside about the number of cross sections, stirrups
zones and detailing options.
When we click on the option Three cross section in Detailing it will show three cross-section of
beams viz at two supports and at the middle portion. Otherwise it will show cross-section at middle
section by default.
When we click on the option Starting point of bottom steel lap after support the detailing will be
done accordingly otherwise by default the lap will be provided before support.
After clicking on the option Anchor Length of bar at end support up to center of section it will show
the anchor length upto center of section by default it will show upto face of support.
If user selects the option for one shear zone for stirrups then the shear reinforcement throughout
the span will be given same but by default the shear reinforcement will be given in 3 zones.
Lastly you will get option of provide bottom extra bars at support. This will give detailing of
reinforcement with bottom extra steel for 13920 detailing.
MAXIMUM LAYERS OF BARS Option to decide the number of bar layers is given as edit box. This will
be considered for detailing.
11.3.3RCC DESIGN - DESIGN PARAMETERS - COLUMN
You can specify the properties of Column for design by selecting this option. When you select this
option, Struds displays following window. This window is called as the Design Parameters window.
At the top left of this window are three drop down menus from which you can select the grade of
steel for main reinforcement and grade of steel for horizontal ties in the columns.
Below this are the two fields where you can specify the minimum eccentricity about both X and Y-
axis. By default the value of eccentricity is taken as 20 mm about both axes.
On the right side at top of this window has the option for specifying the effective length of the
column. By default the effective length of column is taken as its actual length. So the values of
Effective Length Factor along both X and Y-axis are by default, taken as one. However you can type
the value of this factor along both X and Y-axis by overwriting the values in the fields.
Below this is a check box for option `Change Size Internally'. You can select this option to ask the
program to increase the size of the column automatically if the size provided by you is not sufficient
even when the maximum percentage of steel is provided for the column. You can select the options
of Width, depth or both to specify the dimension that you want to be increased. While designing
columns, Struds will then increase the specified dimension for safe design. The effect on analysis due
to the change in size is not however considered.
This option allows you to specify the parameters that should be followed while providing vertical
and horizontal reinforcement in the column for design. The following options are present here:
Spacing Between Bars
Here you can specify the maximum and minimum spacing for main bars. The maximum spacing and
minimum spacing is indicated in two fields. The default value for maximum spacing is 300mm.
Similarly; the default value for minimum spacing between vertical bars is 25 mm. You can overwrite
these values in the corresponding fields to specify your own criteria. Click on the CODE button to
select the IS or BS code to take the spacing criteria defined in these codes for design.
Below this is another field for specifying minimum spacing for stirrups. The default minimum stirrup
spacing is 150 mm. However you can specify your own value of minimum spacing by overwriting on
this value.
Steel Percentage
Here you can specify the minimum and maximum percentage of steel to be provided in the columns
with respect to the gross cross sectional area of column. The default minimum percentage of steel is
0.8 % of the gross cross sectional area. Similarly the default maximum percentage of steel is 2 % of
gross cross sectional area. Please note that Struds takes the minimum and maximum percentage of
steel for the gross cross sectional area of the size provided to the column and not the required
size. You can simply overwrite the values in these fields to specify your own criteria for minimum
and maximum percentage of steel.
However, if you want to consider only that portion of the concrete area, which is actually effective in
resisting the compressive forces, check the check box for "Minimum Steel Percentage Based on
Actual Resisting Section".
R/F Placing
The placing of reinforcement in columns can be equally distributed along two faces of column or
four faces of column. This option shows the icons for 2 sided and 4-sided reinforcement. The default
type of detailing is 2 sided. You can click on the 4-sided option to provide reinforcement along all
four sides of the column.
Steel Ratio - astx/asty

This option allows you to specify the ratio of reinforcement provided along X axis of the column to
that of along Y axis of the column if you have selected the 4 sided reinforcement placing in the
column. For rectangular column where the difference between x and Y dimension is more, it would
be more suitable to provide unequal areas of steel along X and Y axis as the biaxial capacity of
column along both axes will be quite different and also providing equal reinforcement along all four
sides shall be difficult to satisfy the checks of minimum and maximum spacing of main bars.
Clear Cover
This option allows you to specify the clear concrete cover for reinforcement in column. The default
value of clear cover is 40 mm, which you can change by simply overwriting on it.
Select Bar Diameters
You can click on this button to select the bar diameters that should be considered for detailing in the
columns for design. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
This window shows the list of all available bar diameters in a vertical text column at the left side.
Select the bar diameter that you want to provide for column main bars by mouse and press on the
SELECT button at the right side. The selected bar diameter is shown by Struds in the right text
column. This way you can specify the diameters that you want to provide for columns. If you want to
remove any bar diameter from the list of selected bar diameters, select it by mouse and click on the
DELETE button. Click on the OK button to proceed for design with chosen bar diameters. You can
also click on the CANCEL button if you want to abandon the bar diameters' selection and proceed for
design with all the available bar diameters.
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Detailing as per I.S 13920 code
A Check Box is provided for this purpose. If you have generated the earthquake load and have
selected either Plane Frame or Space Frame method for analysis and design, you can select the
check box to apply the detailing in column reinforcement as per IS 13920 code. The stirrup spacing
and minimum steel criteria as per the code will be complied while providing reinforcement in the
columns.
Provide Confinement Reinforcement
This option is activated, only if you choose the option for detailing as per I.S 13920. If this option is
selected Confinement reinforcement will be provided at both the junctions of the Column and Beam.
The details pertaining to this, in terms of the Length and Spacing of the Confinement Reinforcement
will be displayed in the detailed Design Report.
Check Horizontal Bracings
This option enables you to check whether each of the Column member has Horizontal Bracing
elements, at every floor level. In Struds, if the column is located at every floor level, the length of the
column is taken to be equal to the floor height. However, it may happen that the Column element is
not braced, with horizontal elements at every floor level. Due to this, the effective length of the
column would need to be modified. If you select this option, Struds will check whether the Column
has been braced by beams, at every floor level, and, it will display a list of all those columns, which
do not have bracings, as well as the corresponding floor level, at which these bracing elements are
not present. Using this information, the user would need to modify the effective length factor, for all
these columns, and redesign them. The changed effective length of the column would be taken into
consideration now for the design of the column element.
The dialog box displayed is shown below.
In, this dialog box, if you select the option, Ignore for All Groups, this check would be ignored for all
the future column groups.
Consider Live Load Reduction
Below this option is another check box for `Consider Live Load Reduction'. You can select this option
if you want to reduce the axial load on columns due to live load at different stories as per IS code
provisions.
DESIGN TYPE
Axial
When you select this option, Struds will design All/ Selected columns for axial loads only irrespective
of the method adopted for analysis.
Uniaxial
You can select this option to design the columns for uniaxial bending. When you select this
You should select the X or Y-axis from this window for uniaxial design. Struds will then
perform the uniaxial design of all the columns for specified axis. This option will not be
effective if you have analysed the structure as Plane Grid.
Biaxial
When you select this option, Struds will perform the biaxial design of all the columns in the
building subjected to axial load and moments about both axes. This option will not be
effective if you have analysed the structure as Plane Grid.
Detailing considerations
Column detailing with 3 options as given below
a) Make lower floor column section bigger / equal than upper floor
If this option is made on the sizes for all floors are checked after design and the redesigning and
detailing is done in such a way that the size of column will go on increasing from top to bottom.
b) Make lower floor column main steel area bigger / equal than upper floor
If this option is made on the steel areas for all floors are checked after design and the redesigning
and detailing is done in such a way that the steel area of column will go on increasing from top to
bottom.
c) Make lower floor column main bars numbers bigger / equal than upper floor
If this option is made on the number of bars for all floors are checked after design and the
redesigning and detailing is done in such a way that the number of bars of column will go on
increasing from top to bottom.
OK
Click on this button to allow Struds to accept the Design Parameters specified by you and close the
window.
CANCEL
You can click on this button to abandon specifying design parameters and proceed for design with
default parameters and close the window.
11.3.4 RCC DESIGN - DESIGN PARAMETERS – 3D ELEMENT

One has to give following parameters for inclined member design using above dialog box
1) Grades of materials
2) Reinforcement details like Minimum and maximum spacing of main reinforcement
bars.
3) Minimum and maximum steel percentage for design.
4) Reinforcement placing as in two directions or in four directions.
5) Effective length factors for length considerations along X and Y axis
6) Clear cover to reinforcement
7) Steel ratio i.e. Astx / Asty ration
8) Minimum diameter for ties.
9) Select the bar diameters if required.
11.3.5 RCC DESIGN - DESIGN PARAMETERS – FOOTING
This option allows you to specify the basic parameters for footing design. When you select this
At the top-left in the window, Struds displays the types of footing shapes you can choose for design.
Click on any of the Trapezoidal / Flat / Trapezoidal+Pedestal / Flat+Pedestal options to select the
default footing type for design.
Below this, Struds shows the geometry of footing with a cross section diagram for the respective
footing type. The default minimum dimensions of selected shape of footing are displayed in various
fields below the diagram. You can change these dimensions by overwriting the values in the fields.
On the right side at top are two drop down menus for grade of concrete and grade of steel. Select
the appropriate grades by selecting from these menus. Below this are two fields showing the
maximum and minimum allowed spacing between footing bars. The default values of maximum and
minimum spacing are 200mm and 100mm respectively. You can change these limits by overwriting
the values in the field.
Below this are two fields to specify the Rounding Factor to increase the size and depth of footing to
satisfy the development length check. Struds finds out the area of footing from the load and safe
bearing capacity of soil. Then it performs the checks for development length for footing bars and
column bars. To satisfy the bond check for footing bars it may be required to increase the size of
footing. This will be increased by the rounding factor. The horizontal projection of column bars into
the footing can be specified. Struds will then again check the development length. This process will
go on until the check is satisfied. Similarly to satisfy the bond check for column bars, the depth of
footing is repeatedly increased by rounding factor by Struds to satisfy the check.
At the right side there are two more fields to specify the depth of footing from ground level and
percentage of minimum steel in the footing. The depth of footing from ground level is taken by
Struds to compute the surcharge load on footing. The value of minimum percentage of steel by
default is taken as 0.12% as per code.
On the right side are following buttons to specify the other parameters.
You can click on this button to select the bar diameters that should be considered
for detailing in the footings for design. When you select this option, Struds displays following
window.
Select the bar diameter that you want to provide for footing bars by mouse and press on the SELECT
button at the right side. The selected bar diameter is shown by Struds in the right text column. This
way you can specify the diameters that you want to provide for columns. If you want to remove any
bar diameter from the list of selected bar diameters, select it by mouse and click on the DELETE
button. Click on the OK button to proceed for design with chosen bar diameters. You can also click
on the CANCEL button if you want to abandon the bar diameters selection and proceed for design
with all the available bar diameters.
Select on this button to provide the properties of soil for design of footings.
This window shows various fields for values of properties of soil such as Safe Bearing Capacity,
Cohesion, Unit Weight, Angle of Friction and Factor of Safety against sliding. The default values are
shown in the field. You can change the values by simply overwriting in the respective fields. The
Standard penetration test values can also be specified by selecting the soil type which we have to
specify while going for Pile footing design.
This option allows you to specify the type of combined footing you want to select
for design. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
Four types of combined footings are available in Struds, which can be designed either as eccentric or
non eccentric footings. Select the type you want to choose by clicking on the corresponding option
in the window and click on the CLOSE button.
If you want to provide Strip footing then in that case you will have to select Rectangular with
beam option under various options for combined footing.
This option allows you to specify the type of Pile Foundation you want to select for design.
Following are the piles which are available in the Struds for design.
• Driven Cast in-situ

• Bored Cast in-situ
• Driven Pre Cast
• Bored Pre Cast
• Under Reamed Bored compaction
• Under Reamed Cast in-situ
You can select any one of these piles from drop down menu Pile Type. Here you can edit Pile
Properties, Load Transfer Type and Factor of Safety. Click on OK by selecting particular pile type.
Click on Cancel to apply the default parameters for design of Pile Footing. If you have the pile
capacity values then you can click the flag for User defined pile capacity. You also have the facility to
import the data table of pile capacity by clicking on Pile capacity table.
Select this button to close the window and apply the parameters for design as specified by
you.
Select this button to close the window and apply the default parameters for design of
footings.
11.3.6RCC DESIGN - DESIGN PARAMETERS – SHEAR WALL
You can specify the properties of column for design by selecting this option. When you select this
option, Struds displays following window. This window is called as the Design Parameters window.
At the top left of this window are two drop down menus from which you can select the grade of
steel for main reinforcement and grade of steel for horizontal ties in the Shear Wall.
Below this are the two fields where you can specify the minimum eccentricity about both X and Y
axis. By default the value of eccentricity is taken as 20 mm about both axes.
On the right side at top of this window has the option for specifying the effective length of the Shear
Wall. By default the effective length of Shear Wall is taken as its actual length. So the values of
Effective Length Factor along both X and Y axis are by default, taken as one. However you can type
the value of this factor along both X and Y axis by overwriting the values in the fields.
This option allows you to specify the parameters that should be followed while providing vertical
and horizontal reinforcement in the Shear Wall for design. The following options are present here:
Spacing Between Bars
Here you can specify the maximum and minimum spacing for main bars. The maximum spacing and
minimum spacing is indicated in two fields. The default values for maximum spacing is 300mm.
Similarly, the default value for minimum spacing between vertical bars is 25 mm. You can overwrite
these values in the corresponding fields to specify your own criteria.
Below this is another field for specifying minimum spacing for stirrups. The default minimum stirrup
spacing is 150 mm. However you can specify your own value of minimum spacing by overwriting on
this value.
Steel Percentage
Here you can specify the minimum and maximum percentage of steel to be provided in the Shear
walls with respect to the gross cross sectional area of Shear wall. The default minimum percentage
of steel is 0.12 % of the gross cross sectional area. Similarly the default maximum percentage of steel
is 4 % of gross cross sectional area. Please note that Struds takes the minimum and maximum
percentage of steel for the gross cross sectional area of the size provided to the Shear wall and not
the required size. You can simply overwrite the values in this fields to specify your own criteria for
minimum and maximum percentage of steel.
Clear Cover
This option allows you to specify the clear concrete cover for reinforcement in Shear walls. The
default value of clear cover is 40 mm which you can change by simply overwriting on it.
Select Bar Diameters
You can click on this button to select the bar diameters that should be considered for detailing in the
Shear walls for design. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
Select the bar diameter that you want to provide for Shear wall main bars by mouse and press on
the SELECT button at the right side. The selected bar diameter is shown by Struds in the right text
column. This way you can specify the diameters that you want to provide for Shear Walls. If you
want to remove any bar diameter from the list of selected bar diameters, select it by mouse and click
on the DELETE button. Click on the OK button to proceed for design with chosen bar diameters. You
can also click on the CANCEL button if you want to abandon the bar diameters' selection and
proceed for design with all the available bar diameters.
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Consider Live Load Reduction
Below this option is another check box for `Consider Live Load Reduction'. You can select this option
if you want to reduce the axial load on Shear wall due to live load at different stories as per IS code
provisions.
OK
Click on this button to allow Struds to accept the Design Parameters specified by you and close the
window.
CANCEL
You can click on this button to abandon specifying design parameters and proceed for design with
default parameters and close the window.
11.4 RCC DESIGN - DESIGN ALL
This option enables you to continuously execute the design of all the R.C.C components, that is the
Slabs, Beams, Columns and Footings, one after the other. This would immensely help you, by
reducing the time and effort, to design the components one by one.
Before you choose this option, ensure that you have performed the analysis for the structure type,
for which you would like to design all your R.C.C components. This option is present, only if you
select the current mode as the design mode.
Now, first select the Structure type (Plane Grid, Plane Frame or Space Frame), for which you would
like to perform the design. Now set all the design parameters, for the slabs, Beams, Columns, as well
as the Footings, to the values, with which you would like to proceed to the design.
When you select this, if you had initially performed the design for any of the components, and saved
the design files, Struds will display the message "Design Files already exist". Would you like to
overwrite them?
If you choose the Yes option, all the previous Design files, will be overwritten by the latest design
data, as obtained in the current run. However, if you select No, the Design All option, will not
perform the design, and all your data, from the previous runs for design, will be stored as it is.
In this method, Struds, starts with the designing of the slabs first, using the Design properties, as
have been set in the Design Parameters, for Slabs. The design will start form the lowermost floor
level, and will eventually reach to the topmost floor level. Struds will change the floor levels
automatically. The Current floor level would be displayed in the Status bar below. Struds
automatically changes the Floor level, as the slab design progresses.
Once the design of Slabs is over, Struds will then proceed to the beam design. In this, the user will
have to select the design load combination, at every floor level, for which the beams at that floor
level are to be designed. Struds automatically changes the Floor level. The geometry at the current
floor level would be displayed on screen, and the Current Floor level could also be checked from the
Status bar.
Once the beam design is completed, Struds would automatically proceed to the Column design. The
choice of the design method (That is Axial, Uniaxial or Biaxial) would have to be made by the user, at
the start of the design procedure. In this, all the Columns would be sequentially designed.
After completing the Column design, Struds completes the Footing design. However, in the Design
All option, only isolated footings would be designed. The type of the Isolated footing needs to be set
by the user in the footing Properties dialog box. Since the design of Combined Footing as well as that
of Piles, requires Grouping to be done, this facility is not currently available. If you need to design
the Footings either as Combined Footings or as Piles, you need to design the R.C.C components
separately.
11.5 RCC DESIGN - SLAB
This menu option offers you several sub-options to design and view the results of slab design.
These have been listed below, and further explained in greater detail, in the respective topics.
RCC DESIGN - SLAB - NEW

RCC DESIGN - SLAB - OPEN
RCC DESIGN - SLAB - SAVE
RCC DESIGN - SLAB - MODIFY DESIGN
RCC DESIGN - SLAB - GROUP
RCC DESIGN - SLAB - INQUIRE
RCC DESIGN - SLAB - DESIGN SKETCH
RCC DESIGN - SLAB - REPORTS
RCC DESIGN - SLAB - HTML REPORTS
RCC DESIGN - SLAB – SECTION LINES
RCC DESIGN - SLAB – DRAFTING
11.5.1SLAB DESIGN - DESIGN - NEW
DESIGN - NEW – ALL
When you select this option, Struds designs all the slabs in the selected floor. If you have already
designed the slabs and you again select this option, Struds displays following window.
If you click on the ÒK' button, Struds will design the slabs once again and all the previous output
files will be overwritten by Struds. Click on the `Cancel' button to abandon designing.
If you have not previously designed slabs in the selected floor, the above message will not occur and
Struds will design all the slabs. During design process, Struds checks the slab for deflection and
flexure. If any of the slabs fails in deflection, Struds displays following message.
At the top of this window Struds displays the slab id number, the required effective thickness to
satisfy the deflection check and clear cover. Below this Struds displays the dimensions of the slab
and its boundary conditions.
The available thickness, area of steel provided, modification factor and base factor as per IS code are
displayed below. Please refer to SP: 10 for the values of modification factor and base factor.
Struds also displays the ratio of span to depth and the product of the basic deflection factor for the
slab and the modification factor. The current deflection status is also indicated in the field for the
same. If we manually want to control the deflection then we can take help of the buttons as defined
below. But if we want the software to find the optimum thickness, which would satisfy the
deflection criterion by itself, then we tick the checkbox "Change thickness internally" and then click
on the "OK" button.
Below this are two buttons to take action on the deflection check.
CHANGE THICKNESS
When you click on this button, the field for available thickness becomes active. Type the value of
new thickness in the field and click on the ÒK' button. Struds will check the slab for deflection for
the new thickness. If the check is still not satisfied, Struds displays the same window with computed
values of Ast, Base Factor and Modification factor.
CHANGE AST
This option allows you to see the change in modification factor and base factor by changing the area
of steel. When you click on this button, the field for Ast (Area of Steel provided) becomes active.
Overwrite the value in this filed and click on the `Compute' button to see the corresponding change
in Base Factor and Modification Factor.
BREAK
If anybody want to break the design and modify the depths at prepro level then he could break the
slab design using this option.
COMPUTE
This button becomes active only when you have selected the `Change Ast' option. When you click on
this button, Struds computes the Modification and Base Factor as per the change in Ast and displays
it in their fields.
IGNORE
You can click on this button, to ignore the deflection check. When you click on this option, Struds
finds out the extra steel to be provided to change the modification factor to satisfy the deflection
check and provides this steel in the slab design.
OK
Click on this button if you have used the `Change Thickness' option to proceed for design.
Some times a slab may fail in flexure. In such case you should change the grade of concrete or
thickness to satisfy the check. When a slab fails in flexure, Struds displays following window.
In this window, at the top Struds displays the dimensions of slab, available thickness and the
boundary conditions. Below this Struds displays the moments at mid span and support for both the
spans of slab. Below this are two buttons.
CHANGE THICKNESS
Click on this button if you want to increase the thickness of slab to satisfy the check for flexure.
Struds shows the window for slab properties.
Changes the thickness of the slab in the field provided and click on the ÒK' button. Struds redesigns
the slab. If the slab again fails in flexure or deflection, Struds shows the corresponding window
again.
CHANGE GRADE
When you select this button, Struds displays the window of `Slab Properties' similar to the previous
option. Select the grade of concrete from the drop down menu of material type - RCC as Struds
Select the grade of concrete from the list and click on the ÒK' button. Struds will redesign the slab.
If the slab still fails in flexure or deflection, Struds displays corresponding window.
DESIGN - NEW-ONE BY ONE
In the above method of Slab design the software automatically goes from one slab to another as
soon as the design of one slab is over. But if we want to select any particular slab for design, we can
use this option and then click on the slab, which we want to design.
11.5.2SLAB DESIGN - DESIGN - OPEN
This option is active only if you have previously designed and saved the design data for the slabs of
the selected floor. When you use this option, Struds reads the previous design data and output
results and displays them on the screen.
11.5.3SLAB DESIGN - DESIGN - SAVE
This option allows you to save the design data after you have designed the slabs. You can then open
the design data by using the previous option.
11.5.4RCC DESIGN - SLAB - MODIFY DESIGN
This option is activated; only of the slab design of all the slabs at the set floor level has been
completed. This option, comes in handy, when after completing the design of any slab, you would
like to modify any of the attributes, and redesign the slab.
Using this option, you can modify the properties, such as the Thickness, Material density, Dead Load,
Live Load, Floor Finish, as well as the Boundary condition of the slab.
However, if any of the attributes, related to the loading on the slab are modified, these will not be
accounted for in the design of the other components. It would remain localised to the design of the
slab itself. When you select this option, a cursor will be activated, with which you can "Pick" the slab,
for which you want to modify the design. On clicking the OK option, the slab will be redesigned.
This option is mostly used to modify the boundary conditions. Struds automatically, finds out the
boundary conditions for the slab. As a result, even if a small portion or one of the edges of the slab
are continuous, Struds will take up that edge as a continuous edge. However, if the user would like
to modify this boundary condition, this option could be used.
11.5.5RCC DESIGN - SLAB - GROUP
This option allows you to group the slabs for preparing outputs such as design schedules and
quantity reports. It has following two options.
AUTO
MANUAL
11.5.5.1 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - GROUP - AUTO
This option is inactive until you have designed all the slabs. When you select this option, Struds will
automatically group the slabs. Struds finds out the slabs having same thickness and reinforcement
along both spans and places them in the same group.
11.5.5.2 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - GROUP - MANUAL
You can use this option before or after designing the slabs to prepare the outputs. When you select
this option, Struds displays a new side window at the right hand side of the screen. This window has
several options that allow you to control the grouping of slabs.
At the top of this window is a drop down menu that shows the list of slab groups present. You can
select the group from this menu to add or remove the slabs.
Below the drop down menu Struds displays the list of slabs present in the selected group. The
selected slab is highlighted on the screen.
The window shows three buttons under the option of Groups.
DEFINE
Click this button to define a new group. Struds automatically gives an id number to this group in
sequence with the available groups. When you select this option Struds displays following window.
DELETE
This option allows you to delete the selected slab group. If any slabs are already included in this
group, Struds displays following message.
Click on the `Yes' button if you want to delete the group. The slabs belonging to this group will also
be removed from it and will not be included in any group until you add them in any other group.
DELETE EMPTY GROUPS
When you remove all the slabs from a group, that group becomes empty. When you click on this
button, Struds finds out the groups in which no slab is present and deletes all such groups. You
should use this option after you have regrouped the slabs before saving.
There are three options under the heading Slab that help you to add and remove the slabs from a
group and to move a slab from one group to other group.
Slab – Add
This option allows you to add a slab to an already defined group. First select the group from the drop
down menu to which you want to add the slabs and click on this option. When you select this option,
a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the slabs that you want to add in this group by selecting
by cursor one by one. The added slab numbers will be displayed in the list below the drop down
menu.
Slab – Delete
This option allows you to remove a slab from a group. First select the group from the drop down
menu from which you want to remove the slabs and click on this option. When you select this
option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the slabs that you want to remove from this group
by selecting by cursor one by one. The removed slab numbers will be automatically disappear from
the list below the drop down menu.
Slab – Move
This option allows you to move a slab from its group to the selected group. Select the group from
the drop down menu to which you want to move a slab from its group and click on this option.
When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the slabs that you want to
move under this group by cursor one by one.
Close
Click on this button to save and close the slab grouping.

11.5.6RCC DESIGN - SLAB - INQUIRE
This option allows you to visualise the design moments and properties of slabs. You can use this
option to verify the results with manual calculations.
INQUIRE - MOMENTS ALL

INQUIRE - MOMENTS ONE
INQUIRE - PROPERTIES
11.5.6.1 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - INQUIRE - MOMENTS ALL
This option allows you to see the moment values in all the slabs in the plan geometry. When you
select this option Struds displays following window.
To the left side of the screen, Struds shows the floor plan geometry with the moment values along
both spans at mid and support. At the right side, Struds displays the legend for colours used in
displaying the moments. You can print or plot this graphics by using the Print menu from the menu
bar.
11.5.6.2 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - INQUIRE - MOMENTS ONE
When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select any of the slab on the screen
by this cursor. Struds displays the moment values in this slab along both spans at mid and support in
an enlarged manner.
For One-Way and Two-Way Slabs

For Flat Slabs
To the left side of the screen, Struds shows the selected slab with the moment values along both
spans at mid and support. At the right side, Struds displays the legend for colours used in displaying
the moments. You can print or plot this graphics by using the Print menu from the menu bar.
11.5.6.3 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - INQUIRE - PROPERTIES
This option allows you to see the properties of a selected slab such as type, loads and boundary
conditions. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select a slab by cursor.
Struds displays the following window.
At the left portion of screen, Struds highlights the selected slab. At the right side it displays the
properties of slab that are considered for design.
11.5.7RCC DESIGN - SLAB - DESIGN SKETCH
This menu allows you to view the graphical results for the design outputs of slab. The options in this
menu are inactive until you have designed all the slabs in the selected floor.
DESIGN SKETCH ALL

DESIGN SKETCH ONE
DETAIL
PLAN
11.5.7.1 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - DESIGN SKETCH - ALL
When you select this option, Struds displays the graphical representation of reinforcement in all the
slabs in the floor.

For Flat Slabs
To the left side of the screen, Struds shows the floor plan geometry with the placement of bars along
both spans. The bar spacing is also indicated in both the directions and at support. At the right side,
Struds displays the legend for colours used in displaying the bars and the units for spacing. You can
print or plot this graphics by using the Print menu from the menu bar.
11.5.7.2 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - DESIGN SKETCH - ONE
When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select any of the slabs on the
screen by this cursor. Struds displays graphically the reinforcement in this slab in an enlarged
manner.
For Flat Slabs

To the left side of the screen, Struds shows the selected slab geometry with the placement of bars
along both spans. The bar spacing is also indicated in both the directions and at support. At the right
side, Struds displays the legend for colours used in displaying the bars and the units for spacing. You
can print or plot this graphics by using the Print menu from the menu bar.
11.5.7.3 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - DESIGN SKETCH - DETAIL
This option allows you to see the design details of a particular slab and modify them as per your
requirement. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the slab of
which you want to visualise/modify design details by the cursor. Struds displays following window.

For Flat Slabs
At the top of this window, Struds shows the slab id number, dimensions, thickness, and boundary
conditions of the selected slab. Below this the areas of steel required at longer span and short span
at mid span and at support are displayed. At the bottom, Struds shows the provided bar size and its
spacing along both the directions. If you want to change the bar diameter, overwrite the value of bar
dia in the field and press enter key. Struds automatically computes the revised bar spacing and
displays it in its field. This effect will automatically be reflected in the Design Schedule, Design
Sketches and Quantity Reports. If you change the spacing of bars, the dia is not changed by Struds.
But this change in spacing will be taken into account by Struds in preparing Design Schedule, Design
Sketches and Quantity Reports.
11.5.7.4 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - DESIGN SKETCH - PLAN
When you select this option, Struds displays the floor plan geometry on the screen. This option is
useful when you have used the `Design Sketch All' or `Design Sketch One' option and want to go back
to the floor plan geometry.
11.5.8RCC DESIGN - SLAB - REPORTS
Using this option, you can view all the design related text reports for slabs. This menu option has
been further sub divided as:
REPORTS - SLAB DETAILS

REPORTS - SLAB SCHEDULE
REPORTS - SLAB QUANTITY
11.5.8.1 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - REPORT - SLAB DETAILS
This option allows you to get a text report for the design details considered by Struds while designing
the slabs.
11.5.8.2 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - REPORT - SLAB SCHEDULE
When you select this option, Struds displays the group-wise design schedule for all the slabs in text
form.
11.5.8.2 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - REPORT - SLAB QUANTITY

When you select this option, Struds displays the Quantities of steel and concrete required for all the
slabs in text form.
11.5.9RCC DESIGN - SLAB – HTML REPORTS
Using this option, you can view all the design related HTML reports for slabs. This menu option has
been further sub divided as:
HTML REPORTS - DESIGN DETAILS

HTML REPORTS - SLAB SCHEDULE
HTML REPORTS - SLAB QUANTITY
11.5.9.1 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - HTML REPORTS - DESIGN DETAILS
This option generates all the reports like OneWay - TwoWay Slab schedule, OneWay - TwoWay / Flat
Slab Design, Slab Quantity Report in the HTML format.
RCC DESIGN - SLABS - HTML REPORTS - DESIGN DETAILS
This report displays the design details for all the slabs on the current floor, in the HTML format, as
displayed below:
Project Information:
Project Name : School1

Job No : 1
Date of Project :
Design Of Slabs: Default Level
Design Method: Limit State Method

Design Code: IS456 - 2000
Design Of Slab
Slab Name : S1
Slab Type : Two-Way Slab
Grade of Concrete : M20
Grade of Steel : Fe415
Dimensions : Lx = 4.050 m, Ly = 2.780 m, Thk = 130 mm
Span Ratio : Longer/Shorter = 1.457
Boundary Condition : One short and one long edge continuous
Loading on Slab :(Table 1)
Total DL = (1) + (2) + (3)
Self Floor Sunk Total DL Total LL Total Design
Weight (1) Finish Load Load
KN/m² (2) (3) 1.5 x [(4)+(5)]
KN/m² KN/m² (4) (5) KN/m²
KN/m² KN/m²
3.250 2.750 0.000 6.000 2.000 12.000

Deflection Check :(Table 2)
As per clause 23.2.1 of (IS456-2000):
(Span/Depth) Ratio Modification Factor Basic Factor Permissible Ratio Status
(a) (b) (a x b)
26.476 2.077 32.000 66.457 OK

Moment And Steel Calculations:
Coefficients are computed as per clause D-1.1 of (IS456-2000):
Moment = coeff * W * Lx * Lx:
where
W = TotalDesignLoad = 12.000 kN/m2
Lx = Shorter span = 2.780 m
Position Moment Moment Ast (Rqd) Steel Detail Ast (prv) Remark
Coeff. KN-m per meter dia @ spec mm c/c per meter
mm² mm²
MidShort 0.055 5.073 137.566 #8 @ 200 251.327 Main

MidLong 0.035 3.246 87.121 #8 @ 200 251.327 Other
SuppDown 0.0 73 6.795 186.094 -- 0.000 Extra at Top
SuppTop 0.000 0.000 0.000< /TD> -- 0.000 Extra at Top
SuppLeft 0.000 0.000 0.000 -- 0.000 Extra at Top
SuppRight 0.047 4.359 117. 716 #8 @ 330 152.320 Extra at Top
Minimum Steel Check:
Minimum Steel is Max of (1) and (2)
As per clause 26.5.2.1 of IS456 - 2000:

Minimum area of steel For Main Steel = 0.12 x CS Area
= 156.000 mm2
Notes:
Extra steel at Top support is computed considering
the bent-ups, if any, coming from the adjoining span.
It is the maximum of the extra steel required
for each slab at that common support.
11.5.9.2 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - HTML REPORTS - SLAB SCHEDULE
Notes :
1.Dia of Reinforcement bars is in mm
2.Spacing of Reinforcement bars is in mm
3.Thickness of Slab is in mm
11.5.9.3 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - HTML REPORTS - SLAB QUANTITY
This option is used to display the details of the concrete and steel quantities required for all the slabs
on the current floor, as shown below.
Project Information :
PROJECT :
PLAN : mm
DATE : 07/07/07 TIME : 12:06:09
Slab Concrete Quantity : (Default Level at 3.00 m)
Slab No. Grade(N/mm²) ClearLength (m) ClearWidth (m) Depth(m) TotalVolume (m³)
SG1 1 M20 3.000 4.000 0.100 1.200
SG2 1 M20 3.000 5.000 0.115 1.725
SG3 1 M20 1.885 3.000 0.115 0.650
SG4 1 M20 3.000 4.000 0.100 1.200
SG5 1 M20 0.970 1.870 0.115 0.209
SG6 1 M20 0.970 1.870 0.115 0.209
SG9 1 M20 3.000 4.000 0.100 1.200
SG10 1 M20 3.000 5.000 0.115 1.725
SG11 1 M20 1.885 3.000 0.115 0.650
SG12 1 M20 3.000 4.000 0.100 1.200
SG13 1 M20 0.970 1.870 0.115 0.209
SG14 1 M20 0.970 1.870 0.115 0.209
SG17 1 M20 0.970 4.000 0.115 0.446
SG18 1 M20 0.970 4.000 0.115 0.446
TotalVolume
Slab No. Grade(N/mm²) FirstEdge(m) SecondEdge(m) ThirdEdge(m) Depth(m)
(m³)
SG7 1 M20 2.100 2.921 2.030 0.115 0.245
SG8 1 M20 2.030 2.100 2.921 0.115 0.245
SG15 1 M20 2.100 2.921 2.030 0.115 0.245
SG16 1 M20 2.030 2.100 2.921 0.115 0.245
Total Volume = 12.258 m3
Slab Steel Quantity : (Default Level at 3.00 m)
Dia BentBar BentBar StrBar StrBar

Slab No. Description TotalLength(m) Weight(kg) Grade
(mm) Nos. Length(m) Nos. Length(m)
SG1 1 Main Steel 8 11 3.519 11 3.460 76.767 30.291 Fe415
Other Span
8 8 6.654 9 4.460 93.370 36.842 Fe415
Steel
SG2 1 Main Steel 8 13 4.224 14 3.460 103.348 40.780 Fe415
Other Span
8 8 7.416 9 5.460 108.470 42.800 Fe415
Steel
SG3 1 Main Steel 8 8 3.609 9 2.345 49.975 19.719 Fe415
Other Span
8 5 4.916 6 3.460 45.341 17.891 Fe415
Steel
SG4 1 Main Steel 8 11 3.519 11 3.460 76.767 30.291 Fe415
Other Span
8 8 6.654 9 4.460 93.370 36.842 Fe415
Steel
SG5 1 Main Steel 8 5 1.501 6 1.430 16.086 6.347 Fe415
Other Span
8 3 2.401 4 2.330 16.524 6.520 Fe415
Steel
SG6 1 Main Steel 8 5 1.501 6 1.430 16.086 6.347 Fe415
Other Span
8 3 2.401 3 2.330 14.194 5.601 Fe415
Steel
SG9 1 Main Steel 8 11 3.519 11 3.460 76.767 30.291 Fe415
Other Span
8 8 6.654 9 4.460 93.370 36.842 Fe415
Steel
SG10 1 Main Steel 8 13 4.224 14 3.460 103.348 40.780 Fe415
Other Span
8 8 7.416 9 5.460 108.470 42.800 Fe415
Steel
SG11 1 Main Steel 8 8 3.609 9 2.345 49.975 19.719 Fe415
Other Span
8 5 4.916 6 3.460 45.341 17.891 Fe415
Steel
SG12 1 Main Steel 8 11 3.519 11 3.460 76.767 30.291 Fe415
Other Span
8 8 6.654 9 4.460 93.370 36.842 Fe415
Steel
SG13 1 Main Steel 8 5 1.501 6 1.430 16.086 6.347 Fe415
Other Span
8 3 2.401 4 2.330 16.524 6.520 Fe415
Steel
SG14 1 Main Steel 8 5 1.501 6 1.430 16.086 6.347 Fe415
Other Span
8 3 2.401 3 2.330 14.194 5.601 Fe415
Steel
SG17 1 Main Steel 8 11 2.197 11 1.430 39.897 15.743 Fe415
Dist. Steel 8 4 4.230 16.920 6.676 Fe415
SG18 1 Main Steel 8 11 2.197 11 1.430 39.897 15.743 Fe415
Dist. Steel 8 5 4.230 21.150 8.345 Fe415
1538.458 607.051
Steel quantity summary :
Length (m) and Weight (Kg) Total
Steel Grade
68 10 12 16 20 25 32
Length -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Mild steel (Fe250)
Weight -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Length -- 1939.478 -- -- -- -- -- -- 1939.478
Tor steel (Fe415)
Weight -- 765.287 -- -- -- -- -- -- 765.287
11.5.9.4 RCC DESIGN - SLAB – SECTION LINES
After performing slab design, when we open the slab design the menu Section Lines will be present.
When we click the sub option Auto generate, the section lines will be generated along X and Y grids.
After clicking the option Auto generate another sub menu modify option will be highlighted.
After generating section lines along X and y grids the menu Create Slab Longitudinal Section in DXF
format will get highlighted. In DXF format we can see the Longitudinal Section of slabs as per the grid
generated along X and Y directions.
In the RCC Design click on the menu Display Setting, to see the following dialogue box
Here select the X Section Lines and Y Section lines to view the section lines generated in both X and Y
grid.
To view the section lines generated select, Slab-Design Sketch Plan View.
You can modify the generated section lines by selecting Modify option.
After selecting modify you will see the following Dialogue box.
For modification of section lines you can select X section Lines or Y section Lines.
Select a particular section line to see its X and Y co-ordinates.
Select this option to add section line. First add the name of section line and specify its X
and Y co-ordinates and then click on to Add. You will see new section line generated.
You can select this option to modify the name or X and Y co-ordinates of the selected
section line.
Select this option to delete a particular section line.
After doing modifications in Section Line when you select this option the section lines
will be generated. Otherwise it will generate the default section lines.
If user does not want to Add or Modify any section lines he can choose this option.
After selecting any particular section line when you choose this option, you will see co-
ordinates of that section line changed to 0-0.Here you can edit the co-ordinates of the section line as
well as name of the section line.
11.9.5.1 RCC DESIGN - SLAB – SECTION LINES- AUTO GENERATE
By using this option the user is able to view the longitudinal & cross section on the slabs in .dxf
format
11.5.10 RCC DESIGN - SLAB - DRAFTING
This option is used to create working drawings or design sketches. It has the following three sub
menu options.
Create DXF Slab Plan

Create STF Slab Plan
Raft Longitudinal Section
Creating DXF Slab Plan
In this method, the detailed design drawings are created in the DXF file format. This file, can be
directly opened in AUTOCAD as a DXF file. When you use this option, Struds, will create a DXF file,
containing all the details of the Reinforcement detailing along with the slab schedules, in the same
working folder, where in your BLD file exists. This DXF file, will display all the details, of the exact
placement of the steel bars, the pattern of reinforcement (Bent up/ Curtailed/Straight), the plan
details, along with the Slab schedule and the Notes
Create STF Slab Plan
This option enables you to view the slab design detail diagrams, using the ARX option.
On clicking this option we will get the following dialog box.

After selecting the proper paper size and after specifying the scale, we click on Ok. So it will generate
all the drawing templates, which have an extension *.stf in the same folder containing building file.
We can open this Template file in AutoCAD.
On clicking 'OK' Struds shows the following dialog box
On clicking 'Yes', Struds opens the AUOTCAD.
For viewing the created drawing templates follow the following steps:
Command: arx
Enter an option [?/Load/Unload/Commands/Options]: l
Select -> Adraft2000.arx /Adraft14.arx from "C:\Strudwin"
Command: menu
Select -> Adraft.mnc from "C:\Strudwin"
Menu 'AutoPrint' loads to the AUTOCAD Menu (as shown in figure below)
Command: open
Select -> created template.
OR Select from menu AutoPrint -> Open Template File
AUTOCAD generate the drawing as shown

11.6 RCC DESIGN - BEAM
Select this menu if you want to design the beams in any of the floor levels of the selected project. In
Struds the beams are designed for every floor by taking analysis results for the structure type, which
has been set by you using the option
RCC DESIGN - SET STRUCTURE TYPE.
You can set the floor, and level for which you want to design the beams, by selecting that floor and
level, in the combo boxes, which are available towards the top left of the screen. The current floor,
and its level would be displayed in the status bar.
This menu shows following options. It has several sub menu options, as listed below. These have
been further described in detail.
RCC DESIGN - BEAM - NEW

RCC DESIGN - BEAM - OPEN
RCC DESIGN - BEAM - SAVE
RCC DESIGN - BEAM - GROUPING
RCC DESIGN - BEAM - MARKING
RCC DESIGN - BEAM - TOOLS
RCC DESIGN - BEAM - SELECT GRID
RCC DESIGN - BEAM - PLAN LAYOUT
RCC DESIGN - BEAM - REPORTS
RCC DESIGN - BEAM - HTML REPORTS
RCC DESIGN - BEAM - DRAFTING
11.6.1RCC DESIGN - BEAM - NEW
Select this option if you have not designed the beams at the current floor level earlier. If you have
already designed them and you then select this option, Struds will once again perform the design,
overwriting previous design results.
During design if the beam fails in shear capacity then you will get following dialog box.
In this dialog box by default the section is changed internally in depth by 25 mm. If user want he can
change the material also If he select on Change material radio button then the dialog box will change
to one as given below.
Change the grade of concrete or steel from drop down menu.
If user want to change the section manually then he can select the option of change section and he
will get the modified dialog box as given below.
In the dialog box user can give the dimensions as per requirement as well can select the type of
section.
These changes could be implemented using various 3 options
1) Change to current beam. Will change in the current beam only.

2) Change to all beams in current gridline will change the selected option in all beams present on the
grid line of beam which is failing in shear.
3) Change in all beams in all gridlines will change the value for all beams which are failing in shear on
that particular floor.
On selecting redesign option the design will be done for selected changes. If user want he can break
the design.
After this if the beam is failing in Stirrups detailing then you will get following dialog box.
Here user can increase the diameter of bar or can increase the number of legs from the
corresponding drop downs which will get activated on selection of specific options.
These changes also could be implemented to all beams by selecting the appropriate option.
11.6.2RCC DESIGN - BEAM - OPEN
You can select this option if you have already designed the structure and saved the design results,
for the current structure type. Struds will read the previous design results, which will be available to
you for viewing or getting printouts.
11.6.3RCC DESIGN - BEAM - SAVE
When you select this option, Struds stores the results of design for future reading. If you have
already designed and saved the design results, Struds displays following message.
Click on the OK button to save and overwrite previous design result files.
11.6.4RCC DESIGN - BEAM - GROUPING
This option allows you to group the beams depending upon their design results. It has further two
options.
AUTO
When you select this option, Struds will automatically group the beams. The beams having same
size, top / bottom / shear steel will be placed in one group. This grouping will be shown in the
schedule report of GROUP SCHEDULE option.
MANUAL
This option allows you to group the beams as per your choice after designing the beams. When you
This window denotes the beam numbers and the group to which they belong by default in a text
column. The second text column denotes the list of groups available or the list of beam numbers
depending upon whether you select the option of GROUP or BEAM at the right side of the window.
You can either move a beam from its source group to destination group or you can move the group
of a beam to apply to another group. You should first select the source group or beam from the text
column and then select the destination group from the drop down menu.
ADD
Click on this button if you have selected a beam and you want it to add in the destination group.
CREATE NEW GROUP
When you select this option, Struds will add one more group to the existing groups. This group shall
be given the next number in continuity with existing group numbers and will be available in the list
of source groups.
OK
Click on this button to save the grouping and close the window.
CANCEL
Click on this option to abandon the grouping and close the window.
11.6.5RCC DESIGN - BEAM - MARKING
This option allows you to mark the beams with appropriate labels. Struds automatically assigns
labels to all beams once the design is completed. However when a beam has more than one
element, Struds gives separate labels to each of the element. In such case you can control the beam
marking by allowing Struds to find out the beams having more than one element and re-labeling
them accordingly. In case of primary and secondary beams, Struds finds out which is the primary
beam by reading the analysis results and provides the labels accordingly.
AUTO
When you select this option, Struds automatically finds out the beams having more than one
element and then specifies new labels by merging them together.
MANUAL
This option allows you to impose your own discretion in merging the elements in a beam to provide
a single label. When you select this option, Struds displays the following window.
This window has two options.
Pick Nodes
When you select this option, the fields at right are active and you can type the node numbers
between which you want to specify a single label and click on the MARK button. Struds will
accordingly mark all the elements between these nodes with same label.
Beam Labels
When you select this option, the fields at right are active and you can type the beam numbers of the
two elements which you want to merge together to assign a single label and click on the MARK
button. Struds will accordingly mark all the elements between these nodes with same label.
11.6.6RCC DESIGN - BEAM - TOOLS
This menu option has several sub options to control the display on the screen.
LABELLING
LABEL PREFIX
SCH STIRRUP NO:
11.6.6.1 LABELLING
This option allows you to control the sequence of labeling of beams and beam groups. When you
This window has four self-explanatory icons that show the sequence in which beam labels will be
assigned in the plan geometry. The sequence can be from top to bottom or bottom to top. Select the
sequence that wish to apply for labeling and click on the CLOSE button to close the window.
11.6.6.2 LABEL PREFIX
This option allows you to specify your own label identity to the beams, beam groups, columns and
column groups, for your personal identification for different floors or types. For example, you can
specify label Pb for plinth beams. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
The window shows different fields for each of the identity. Type the prefix that you want to apply for
labeling these identities and click on the OK button. Select CANCEL button to abandon the specifying
of label prefix and close the window.
11.6.6.3 SCH STIRRUP NO:
In the beam design schedules, Struds displays the spacing of stirrups as well as their
numbers in each zone. You can select this option to put on/off the display of number of
stirrups in the schedule. The status of display on is indicated by the presence of check mark
before this option.
11.6.7RCC DESIGN - BEAM - SELECT GRID
This option allows you to chose any continuous beam for viewing its analysis and design results.
When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the gridline of beams of
which you want to see the design results. Struds displays the continuous beam on screen with a new
menu at top.
11.6.8RCC DESIGN - BEAM - PLAN LAYOUT

This option allows you to prepare the key plan of the selected floor supporting the design outputs. It
has further following options.
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

DOUBLE LINE DIAGRAM
DOUBLE LINE + SCHEDULE
WALL FLUSHING
DESIGN DIAGRAM
11.6.8.1 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
When you select this option, the beams in the plan are displayed in the form of single lines. The
beam labels are also displayed by default. You can use the TOOLS - DISPLAY options to put on /off
the display of group labels etc. in this diagram.
11.6.8.2 DOUBLE LINE DIAGRAM
When you select this option, the beams in the plan are displayed in the form of double lines as per
their width of sections. The beam labels are also displayed by default. You can use the TOOLS -
DISPLAY options to put on /off the display of group labels etc. in this diagram. You can also put on
/off the internal lines of beam not visible due to opaque nature of slabs by selecting TOOLS -
DISPLAY - HIDDEN LINES option.
11.6.8.3 DOUBLE LINE + SCHEDULE
When you select this option, the beams in the plan are displayed in the form of double lines as per
their width of sections. The beam labels are also displayed by default. You can use the TOOLS -
DISPLAY options to put on /off the display of group labels etc. in this diagram. You can also put on
/off the internal lines of beam not visible due to opaque nature of slabs by selecting TOOLS - DISPLAY
- HIDDEN LINES option.
11.6.8.4 WALL FLUSHING
This option allows you to flush the beams/walls with respect to the gridline. When you select this
option, Struds displays following screen.
The flushing can be of three types viz. Top, bottom and center. You can select the gridline of beams
by clicking on the `SELECT GRIDLINE' button. That entire grid shall be displayed on the screen in an
enlarged manner. You can then select the icons for top/bottom/center flushing at the top right
corner of the screen and click on the `FLUSH' button. Struds will flush the beams accordingly and
display it on the screen. You can also move the beams by specifying the distance for flushing. For
this, select the SELECTIVE option and choose the beam number from the drop down menu of beam
list. You can then type the value of offset in the field provided for OFFSET VALUE and click on the
FLUSH button. You can select the CLOSE button to close this screen and return to main menu of
beam design.
At the top of the screen, the menu bar displays following options.
ZOOM
ORIGINAL PLAN
CLOSE
DESIGN DIAGRAM
This option allows you to get the display of design results values on the graphics screen. When you
From this window you can select the type of design results that are to be displayed in the plan and
the grids along which they are to be displayed.
BM
When you click on this option, Struds will display the values of bending moment along gridlines.
SF
When you click on this option, Struds will display the values of Shear force for every beam along
selected gridlines.
AST
When you click on this option, Struds will display the values of steel area for every beam along
selected gridlines. Struds displays following options to choose the locations where you want to see
the area values.
You can select the location of display of top steel and bottom steel in the beams at left support, right
support or mid-span by clicking on their respective checkboxes. Struds will display the areas at
specified locations in the plan.
Y GRID
When you select this option, the selected design values will be displayed along the Y grids or vertical
gridlines on the screen.
X GRID
When you select this option, the selected design values will be displayed along the X grids or
horizontal gridlines on the screen.
BOTH
When you select this option, the selected design values will be displayed along both the X grids and
Y grids on the screen.
11.6.9RCC Design – Beam – Edit grid-wise detailing
If you select this option you will get following dialog box. In this dialog you can select various
grids edit the reinforcement in that. If you click near the steel given then the drop downs
will come for easy editing. You can select the diameter and numbers. If the design is safe the
values for Ast provided will be displayed with blue colour if the design is failed the values
will be shown with red colour.
11.6.10 RCC DESIGN - BEAM - REPORTS
This option allows you to obtain the text report for design results and design outputs of the selected
floor in case of floor grid and space frame analysis and frame in case of plane frame analysis. The
reports generated by Struds for beam design are of following types.
DESIGN REPORT
GROUP SCHEDULE
BEAM SCHEDULE
BAR BENDING
QUANTITY
11.6.10.1 DESIGN REPORT
When you select this option, Struds displays a text report for design results for all the beams in the
floor.
11.6.10.2 GROUP SCHEDULE
When you select this option, Struds displays a text report for the design schedule of all beams
showing the beam number, group number, size and top/bottom/shear steel as per the grouping
done.
11.6.10.3 BEAM SCHEDULE
When you select this option, Struds displays a text report for the design schedule of all beams
showing the beam number, group number, size and top/bottom/shear steel individually.
11.6.10.4 BAR BENDING
When you select this option, Struds displays a text report for the bar bending details showing the
shape of bars, cutting lengths etc for every beam. At the end of the report Struds also shows the
legend for bar shapes used for detailing.
11.6.10.5 QUANTITY
When you select this option, Struds displays a text report for the concrete / steel quantities and the
formwork area for all the beams individually as well as collectively.
11.6.11 RCC DESIGN - BEAM - HTML REPORTS
This menu option enables you to view the Design Details, Schedule, Capacity as well as the
Deflection details for the beam, in the HTML format.
The following reports are available in the HTML format:
• Detail Report
• Beam Schedule Report
• Beam Capacity Report
• Deflection Report for Factored Loads
• Deflection Report for Working Loads
11.6.11.1 RCC DESIGN - BEAM - HTML REPORT - DETAIL

REPORT
This report displays all the design related details for all the beams on the current floor. This option is
enabled only if the beam design for that floor has been completed. The details are displayed in the
following format.
PROJECT :
PLAN : final
DATE : 11/16/04 TIME : 11:23:15
Beam Detail Report
Floor1 - Default Level
Design load combination : 1.50 DL + 1.50 LL
Design of Beam Group : BG1

Beam : B1
Material Properties :
Fck = 20.000 N/mm²

Fy = 415.000 N/mm²
1.Design Data :
1.1)Dimensions:
Beam Type : 'Rectangular Beam'
Width (b) = 230 mm
Total depth (D) = 300 mm
Effective Tension Cover = 33 mm
Effective Compression Cover = 33 mm
Effective side Cover = 25 mm
Effective depth (d) = 267 mm
Span (L) = 6.779m
1.2)Loading on the Beam :
1.2.1)Self-wt. of beam : -172.500015 kg/m
1.2.2)Slab Load
Dead Load :
&nbspT trapezoidal Load in Kg/m
&n bsp St.Pt 2.599 m L = 6.779 m Max. Value = -909.825 kg
Live Load
&nbspT trapezoidal Load in Kg/m
&n bsp St.Pt 2.599 m L = 6.779 m Max. Value = -519.900 kg
2.Computation of Area of steel :
2.1) Flexural Steel at Top and Bottom
2.1.1)Computation of theoretical steel

At length 0.000L 0.100L 0.200L 0.300L 0.400L 0.500L 0.600L 0.700L 0.800L 0.900L 1.000
B.M. Hog
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
in kn-m
B.M. Sag
0.000 35.304 66.848 92.063 108.381 113.903 108.381 92.063 66.848 35.304 0.000
in kn-m
Torsion
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
in kn-m
Eq.B.M.Hog
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
in kn-m
Eq.B.M.Sag
0.000 35.304 66.848 92.063 108.381 113.903 108.381 92.063 66.848 35.304 0.000
in kn-m
Top
Ast.req. 0.000 0.000 265.071 574.423 774.617 842.367 774.618 574.423 265.071 0.000 0.000
in mm²
Bot
Ast.req. 0.000 428.162 843.555 1142.009 1335.151 1400.514 1335.151 1142.009 843.555 428.163 0.000
in mm²
Max.Area of steel req. at Top = 842.367 mm2 at 0.500L Max.Area of steel req. at Bottom =
1400.514 mm2 at 0.500L
2.1.2)Minimum and Maximum Steel Checks :
a)Minimum Steel Check as per IS456-2000 clause 26.5.1.1(a)
AST = (0.85*b*d) / fy
= 125.780 mm²
b)Maximum Steel Check as per IS456-2000 clause 26.5.1.1(b)
AST = 0.04*b*D
= 2760.000 mm²
2.1.3)Provided Steel
2.1.3.1)Provided Bottom Steel :
Straight bars = 16Tor3

Bent Up bars = 16Tor4
Total Area of Steel at bottom at 0.500L = 1407.434 mm² Ast.req. (o.k.)
2.1.3.2)Provided Top Steel :
Straight bars = 20Tor2 +12Tor2

Extra bars at Left = ---
Extra bars at Right = ---
Total Area of Steel at Top
At Left Support = 854.513 mm²
At Right Support = 854.513 mm²
2.2)Computation of Shear Reinforcement(Stirrups) :
TauC = 0.698 N/mm²
Svmin = 0 mm
Note :
Design Shear = (Equivalent S.F.)-(Vc)
(As per clause 41.4.3 of I.S.456-2000)
If Design Shear < VusTor then Design Shear="VusTor">
VusTor = Minimum shear for torsional transverse Reinforcement
2.2.1) Computation of Steel

At length 0.000L 0.100L 0.200L 0.300L 0.400L 0.500L 0.600L 0.700L 0.800L 0.900L 1.000L
- - - - -
S.F.in kn 53.587 49.937 42.496 31.264 16.292 0.000
16.292 31.264 42.496 49.937 53.587
Torsion
-0.000 -0.000 -0.000 -0.000 -0.000 -0.000 -0.000 -0.000 -0.000 -0.000 -0.000
in kn-m
Eq. S.F.
53.587 49.937 42.496 31.264 16.292 0.000 16.292 31.264 42.496 49.937 53.587
in kn-m
VusTor
27.253 25.397 21.612 15.900 8.286 0.000 8.286 15.900 21.612 25.397 27.253
in kn-m
Vuc
42.889 42.889 50.245 50.245 50.245 50.245 50.245 50.245 50.245 42.889 42.889
in kn
Design
Shear 27.253 25.397 21.612 15.900 8.286 0.000 8.286 15.900 21.612 25.397 27.253
in kn-m
Spacing
req.
134 134 134 134 134 134 134 134 134 134 134
in mm
for 6 Dia
2.2.2)Provided Shear Steel (Stirrups) :
Nominal Zone :6mm @110 mm c/c from 0.000 to 6.820 .
Note : Nominal zone is where No Shear Reinforcement is needed.
Hence provide minimum Shear Reinforcement
(As per clause 26.5.1.5 of IS456-2000)
11.6.11.2 RCC DESIGN - BEAM - HTML REPORT - BEAM SCHEDULE
This report displays the schedule details for the beams on the current floor.
This report is displayed in the following format.
Beam Design Schedule :

Beam Size Bottom Steel Top Steel Stirrups
Name m Straight Bent/Curt Left Right Straight Extra Left Mid Right
At At Left L1,L2 Right L1,L2 Dia-Spec Dia-Spc Dia-
m m Nos Nos Spc
Nos
6-@
5#12 --- --- --- 3#8 2#12 0.000,0.960 --- --- 130
B1 230x750 -- --
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 26Nos
(Total)
8-
2#12 6-@ @
3#16 --- --- --- 2#8 --- --- 1.255,0.000
B2 230x750 + -- 100 180
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1.255,0.000
2#10 13Nos 7
Nos
2#16 6-@ 6-@
--- --- --- 2#12 2#8 0.000,0.640 --- ---
B3 230x750 + 100 130 --
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
1#12 23Nos 8Nos
6-@
4#12 --- --- --- 2#8 --- --- 5#12 1.506,0.000 130
B4 230x750 -- --
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 20Nos
(Total)
6-
2#12 8-@ 6-@ @
5#12 --- --- --- 2#8 0.000,1.004 --- ---
B5 230x750 + 180 100 120
--- --- --- --- --- 0.000,1.004 --- ---
2#10 6Nos 13Nos 3
Nos
6-@
2#12
5#12 --- --- --- 2#8 --- --- 1.280,0.000 130
B6 230x750 + -- --
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1.280,0.000 26Nos
1#10
(Total)
6-@
2#12 2#12
--- --- --- 2#8 --- --- 3.580,0.000 130
B7 230x750 + + -- --
--- --- --- --- --- --- 3.580,0.000 28Nos
2#10 1#10
(Total)
2#12 2#12 6-@ 6-@
--- --- --- 2#8 0.000,2.148 --- ---
B8 230x750 + + 110 130 --
--- --- --- --- 0.000,2.148 --- ---
2#10 2#10 10Nos 20Nos
6-
3#16 3#20 8-@ 6-@ @
--- --- --- 3#8 0.000,2.058 --- ---
B9 230x750 + + 180 100 120
--- --- --- --- 0.000,2.058 --- ---
1#12 2#12 12Nos 11Nos 3
Nos
8-
3#16 6-@ @
--- --- --- 2#8 --- --- 3#16 1.675,0.000
B10 230x750 + -- 110 180
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
1#12 16Nos 10
Nos
11.6.11.3 RCC DESIGN - BEAM - HTML REPORTS - BEAM CAPACITY
This report displays the capacity of the beam in terms of the Moment Of Resistance of the beam,
under the action of Sagging as well as Hogging bending moments, along with the Shear capacity.
The report is displayed in the following format:
PROJECT : Kamdhenu Complex, Mulund

PLAN : resp
DATE : 11/16/04 TIME : 11:58:17
Beam Capacity Report :
Floor1 - Default Level
Design load combination : 1.50 DL + 1.50 LL

Beam Group : BG1 < BR>Beam :B1 &nb sp
Material Propeties :
Fck = 20.000 N/mm² &n bsp Fy = 415.000 N/mm²

Design Data :
Dimensions:
Width (b) = 230 mm Total depth (D) = 750 mm
Effective Tension Cover = 33 mm Effective Compression Cover = 33 mm
Effective side Cover = 25 mm Effective depth (d) = 717 mm
Span (L) = 3.200m
Moment Capacity:
At
0.000L 0.100L 0.200L 0.300L 0.400L 0.500L 0.600L 0.700L 0.800L 0.900L 1.000L
length
B.M.
Hog 87.981 55.938 26.402 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
in kN-m
B.M.
- - -
Sag 0.000 0.000 0.000 -6.957 -31.476 -53.487 -72.990 -89.985
104.471 116.450 125.921
in kN-m
Prov.Ast
Top
376.991 376.991 376.991 150.796 150.796 150.796 150.796 150.796 150.796 150.796 150.796
in
sq.mm
Prov,Ast
Bot
565.487 565.487 565.487 565.487 565.487 565.487 565.487 565.487 565.487 565.487 565.487
in
sq.mm
MR Hog
92.894 92.894 92.894 38.285 38.285 38.285 38.285 38.285 38.285 38.285 38.285
in kN-m
MR Sag
135.817 135.817 135.817 135.817 135.817 135.817 135.817 135.817 135.817 135.817 135.817
in kN-m
Shear Capacity:
At
0.000L 0.100L 0.200L 0.300L 0.400L 0.500L 0.600L 0.700L 0.800L 0.900L 1.000L
length
SF
104.054 96.216 88.379 80.541 72.703 64.866 57.028 49.190 41.353 33.515 25.677
in kN
Prov Asv
56.549 56.549 56.549 56.549 56.549 56.549 56.549 56.549 56.549 56.549 56.549
sq.mm
SF
capacity 59.235 59.235 59.235 67.675 67.675 67.675 67.675 67.675 67.675 67.675 67.675
in kN
Beam Group : BG2 < BR>Beam :B2 &nb sp

Material Propeties :
Fck = 20.000 N/mm² &n bsp Fy = 415.000 N/mm²

Design Data :
Dimensions:
Width (b) = 230 mm Total depth (D) = 750 mm
Effective Tension Cover = 33 mm Effective Compression Cover = 33 mm
Effective side Cover = 25 mm Effective depth (d) = 717 mm
Span (L) = 2.510m
Moment Capacity:
At
0.000L 0.100L 0.200L 0.300L 0.400L 0.500L 0.600L 0.700L 0.800L 0.900L 1.000L
length
B.M.
Hog 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 9.643 33.993 59.886 87.323 116.302
in kN-m
B.M.
- - -
Sag -86.141 -66.420 -45.156 -22.349 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
136.046 120.954 104.319
in kN-m
Prov.Ast
Top
100.531 100.531 100.531 100.531 100.531 100.531 483.805 483.805 483.805 483.805 483.805
in
sq.mm
Prov,Ast
603.186 603.186 603.186 603.186 603.186 603.186 603.186 603.186 603.186 603.186 603.186
Bot
in
sq.mm
MR Hog
25.691 25.691 25.691 25.691 25.691 25.691 117.505 117.505 117.505 117.505 117.505
in kN-m
MR Sag
144.120 144.120 144.120 144.120 144.120 144.120 144.120 144.120 144.120 144.120 144.120
in kN-m
Shear Capacity:
At
0.000L 0.100L 0.200L 0.300L 0.400L 0.500L 0.600L 0.700L 0.800L 0.900L 1.000L
length
SF - - - - - - - - -
-87.791 -93.939
in kN 57.053 63.200 69.348 75.496 81.643 100.086 106.234 112.382 118.529
Prov
Asv 56.549 56.549 56.549 56.549 56.549 100.531 100.531 100.531 100.531 100.531 100.531
sq.mm
SF
capacity 69.507 69.507 69.507 69.507 69.507 69.507 69.507 63.398 63.398 63.398 63.398
in kN
11.6.11.4 RCC DESIGN - BEAM - HTML REPORTS - DEFLECTION
This report displays the deflection occurring at each interval of the beam, depending upon the
number of intervals, which you have set, in the Beam Design Parameters dialog box.
The deflection status is displayed for all the design load combinations, which are available.
The report conspicuously highlights all those values wherein the deflection values exceed the
permissible limit, as stated by the Clause 23.2(b) of I.S 456 : 2000, which is specified as the minimum
of Beam Span/350 or 20mm.
The results are displayed in a tabulated format, for the beams, for all the design load combinations.
The report also displays a comprehensive list of all the beams, towards the end, for which the
deflection at any interval exceeds the recommended permissible value, for any of the load
combinations. On clicking the link available for the beam numbers, the control is transferred to the
tabulated result for that particular beam.
The Beam Deflection report, is generated separately for:
DEFLECTION REPORT - FACTORED LOADS

DEFLECTION REPORT - WORKING LOADS
11.6.11.4.1 DEFLECTION REPORT - FACTORED LOADS

This report displays the deflection details for all the beams at the set floor, under the action of
Factored loads.
The format of this report is as follows:
Beam Deflection Report :

Floor : TF - Level :Default Level
Beams having Deflection more than limiting deflection
As per clause 23.2(b) of IS 456 : 2000,Limiting Deflection is minimum of BeamSpan/350 and

20mm.
Deflection values displayed below are in mm.
Negative values indicate Downward deflection and Positive values indicate upward
deflection.
List of beams having deflection more than limiting deflection
Design load combination : Worst Load Combination

Beam Group : BG49 Beam :B49
Beam Span :5.450 m Limiting Deflection : 15.571 mm
Load
Combination/At 0.00L 0.10L 0.20L 0.30L 0.40L 0.50L 0.60L 0.70L 0.80L 0.90L 1.00L
length-
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL 4.638 11.486 17.624 22.452 25.516 26.536 25.417 22.253 17.327 11.089
1.20 DL + 1.20
- - - - - - - -
LL + 1.20 EQL -9.352 -9.656 0.000
3.796 14.340 18.280 20.809 21.703 20.885 18.432 14.568
X+
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-9.026 -8.086 0.000
LL + 1.20 EQL X- 3.625 13.859 17.643 20.017 20.755 19.782 17.173 13.154
1.20 DL + 1.20
- - - - - - - -
LL + 1.20 EQL -9.754 -8.377 0.000
4.408 14.533 18.262 20.581 21.264 20.237 17.573 13.499
Y+
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-8.623 -9.365 0.000
LL + 1.20 EQL Y- 3.013 13.667 17.661 20.245 21.193 20.430 18.032 14.223
1.50 DL + 1.50 - -9.733 - - - - - - - - 0.000
EQL X+ 3.957 14.921 19.022 21.663 22.611 21.788 19.272 15.296 10.234
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.326 -8.272 0.000
EQL X- 3.744 14.319 18.226 20.672 21.426 20.409 17.699 13.528
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - -
-8.635 0.000
EQL Y+ 4.723 10.236 15.161 19.000 21.377 22.063 20.977 18.199 13.960
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-8.823 -9.870 0.000
EQL Y- 2.978 14.079 18.248 20.957 21.974 21.219 18.772 14.865
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-9.193 -8.885 0.000
LL + 1.20 WL X+ 3.713 14.105 17.968 20.421 21.238 20.344 17.814 13.874
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-9.184 -8.857 0.000
LL + 1.20 WL X- 3.707 14.094 17.955 20.405 21.220 20.323 17.791 13.848
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-9.237 -8.828 0.000
LL + 1.20 WL Y+ 3.769 14.136 17.987 20.427 21.231 20.325 17.783 13.830
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-9.141 -8.913 0.000
LL + 1.20 WL Y- 3.651 14.063 17.936 20.399 21.226 20.342 17.822 13.892
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.535 -9.270 0.000
WL X+ 3.854 14.627 18.632 21.177 22.029 21.111 18.500 14.428
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.524 -9.235 0.000
WL X- 3.846 14.613 18.615 21.157 22.007 21.085 18.471 14.396
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.589 -9.200 0.000
WL Y+ 3.924 14.666 18.655 21.185 22.021 21.087 18.461 14.373
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.469 -9.305 0.000
WL Y- 3.776 14.574 18.592 21.149 22.014 21.108 18.510 14.451
1.20 DL + 1.20
- - - - - - - -
LL + 1.20 EQL -9.189 -8.871 0.000
3.710 14.100 17.962 20.413 21.229 20.333 17.803 13.861
Z+
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-9.189 -8.871 0.000
LL + 1.20 EQL Z- 3.710 14.100 17.962 20.413 21.229 20.333 17.803 13.861
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.529 -9.253 0.000
EQL Z+ 3.850 14.620 18.624 21.167 22.018 21.098 18.486 14.412
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.529 -9.253 0.000
EQL Z- 3.850 14.620 18.624 21.167 22.018 21.098 18.486 14.412
Load
length-
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - - - -
LL 6.070 10.741 14.899 18.130 20.137 20.744 19.891 17.638 14.161 9.757 4.840
Load
length-
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - - - -
LL 6.121 10.793 14.952 18.183 20.192 20.799 19.947 17.694 14.218 9.815 4.899
Load
length-
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - - - -
LL 5.635 10.328 14.508 17.761 19.791 20.420 19.589 17.358 13.903 9.521 4.626

B49,B57,B59,and B65
11.6.11.4.2 DEFLECTION REPORT - WORKING LOADS
This report displays the deflection details for all the beams on the set floor, under the action of
Working Loads.
In calculation of the deflection details, it must be remembered that in the Dead Load case, if the
factor is less than one, it is retained as one.
The format of the report is as follows:


20mm.
In DL load case if factor is less than one, is retained as it is.
deflection
Load
length-
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL 3.092 7.657 11.750 14.968 17.011 17.691 16.945 14.836 11.551 7.392
1.20 DL + 1.20
- - - - - - - - - -
LL + 1.20 EQL 0.000
3.163 7.793 11.950 15.233 17.341 18.086 17.404 15.360 12.140 8.047
X+
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 EQL X- 3.021 7.522 11.549 14.703 16.681 17.296 16.485 14.311 10.962 6.738
1.20 DL + 1.20
- - - - - - - - - -
LL + 1.20 EQL 0.000
3.674 8.129 12.110 15.218 17.151 17.720 16.864 14.645 11.250 6.981
Y+
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 EQL Y- 2.510 7.186 11.389 14.718 16.871 17.661 17.025 15.027 11.852 7.804
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 WL X+ 3.094 7.661 11.754 14.973 17.017 17.698 16.953 14.845 11.561 7.404
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 WL X- 3.089 7.654 11.745 14.962 17.004 17.683 16.936 14.826 11.540 7.381
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 WL Y+ 3.141 7.697 11.780 14.989 17.022 17.693 16.937 14.819 11.525 7.357
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 WL Y- 3.042 7.617 11.719 14.947 16.999 17.688 16.951 14.852 11.577 7.428
1.20 DL + 1.20
- - - - - - - - - -
LL + 1.20 EQL 0.000
3.092 7.657 11.750 14.968 17.011 17.691 16.945 14.836 11.551 7.392
Z+
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 EQL Z- 3.092 7.657 11.750 14.968 17.011 17.691 16.945 14.836 11.551 7.392

B49
11.6.11.5 RCC DESIGN - BEAM - HTML REPORTS - DEFLECTION
This report displays the deflection occurring at each interval of the beam, depending upon the
number of intervals, which you have set, in the Beam Design Parameters dialog box.
The deflection status is displayed for all the design load combinations, which are available.
The report conspicuously highlights all those values wherein the deflection values exceed the
permissible limit, as stated by the Clause 23.2(b) of I.S 456 : 2000, which is specified as the minimum
of Beam Span/350 or 20mm.
The results are displayed in a tabulated format, for the beams, for all the design load combinations.
The report also displays a comprehensive list of all the beams, towards the end, for which the
deflection at any interval exceeds the recommended permissible value, for any of the load
combinations. On clicking the link available for the beam numbers, the control is transferred to the
tabulated result for that particular beam.
The Beam Deflection report, is generated separately for :
• DEFLECTION REPORT - FACTORED LOADS

• DEFLECTION REPORT - WORKING LOADS
11.6.11.5.1 DEFLECTION REPORT - FACTORED LOADS
This report displays the deflection details for all the beams at the set floor, under the action of
Factored loads.
The format of this report is as follows:


20mm.
deflection
Load
length-
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL 4.638 11.486 17.624 22.452 25.516 26.536 25.417 22.253 17.327 11.089
1.20 DL + 1.20
- - - - - - - -
LL + 1.20 EQL -9.352 -9.656 0.000
3.796 14.340 18.280 20.809 21.703 20.885 18.432 14.568
X+
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-9.026 -8.086 0.000
LL + 1.20 EQL X- 3.625 13.859 17.643 20.017 20.755 19.782 17.173 13.154
1.20 DL + 1.20
- - - - - - - -
LL + 1.20 EQL -9.754 -8.377 0.000
4.408 14.533 18.262 20.581 21.264 20.237 17.573 13.499
Y+
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-8.623 -9.365 0.000
LL + 1.20 EQL Y- 3.013 13.667 17.661 20.245 21.193 20.430 18.032 14.223
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - -
-9.733 0.000
EQL X+ 3.957 14.921 19.022 21.663 22.611 21.788 19.272 15.296 10.234
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.326 -8.272 0.000
EQL X- 3.744 14.319 18.226 20.672 21.426 20.409 17.699 13.528
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - -
-8.635 0.000
EQL Y+ 4.723 10.236 15.161 19.000 21.377 22.063 20.977 18.199 13.960
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-8.823 -9.870 0.000
EQL Y- 2.978 14.079 18.248 20.957 21.974 21.219 18.772 14.865
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-9.193 -8.885 0.000
LL + 1.20 WL X+ 3.713 14.105 17.968 20.421 21.238 20.344 17.814 13.874
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-9.184 -8.857 0.000
LL + 1.20 WL X- 3.707 14.094 17.955 20.405 21.220 20.323 17.791 13.848
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-9.237 -8.828 0.000
LL + 1.20 WL Y+ 3.769 14.136 17.987 20.427 21.231 20.325 17.783 13.830
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-9.141 -8.913 0.000
LL + 1.20 WL Y- 3.651 14.063 17.936 20.399 21.226 20.342 17.822 13.892
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.535 -9.270 0.000
WL X+ 3.854 14.627 18.632 21.177 22.029 21.111 18.500 14.428
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.524 -9.235 0.000
WL X- 3.846 14.613 18.615 21.157 22.007 21.085 18.471 14.396
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.589 -9.200 0.000
WL Y+ 3.924 14.666 18.655 21.185 22.021 21.087 18.461 14.373
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.469 -9.305 0.000
WL Y- 3.776 14.574 18.592 21.149 22.014 21.108 18.510 14.451
1.20 DL + 1.20
- - - - - - - -
LL + 1.20 EQL -9.189 -8.871 0.000
3.710 14.100 17.962 20.413 21.229 20.333 17.803 13.861
Z+
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - -
-9.189 -8.871 0.000
LL + 1.20 EQL Z- 3.710 14.100 17.962 20.413 21.229 20.333 17.803 13.861
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.529 -9.253 0.000
EQL Z+ 3.850 14.620 18.624 21.167 22.018 21.098 18.486 14.412
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - -
-9.529 -9.253 0.000
EQL Z- 3.850 14.620 18.624 21.167 22.018 21.098 18.486 14.412
Load
length-
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - - - -
LL 6.070 10.741 14.899 18.130 20.137 20.744 19.891 17.638 14.161 9.757 4.840
Load
length-
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - - - -
LL 6.121 10.793 14.952 18.183 20.192 20.799 19.947 17.694 14.218 9.815 4.899
Load
length-
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - - - -
LL 5.635 10.328 14.508 17.761 19.791 20.420 19.589 17.358 13.903 9.521 4.626

B49,B57,B59,and B65
11.6.11.5.2 DEFLECTION REPORT - WORKING LOADS

This report displays the deflection details for all the beams on the set floor, under the action of
Working Loads.
In calculation of the deflection details, it must be remembered that in the Dead Load case, if the
factor is less than one, it is retained as one.
The format of the report is as follows:


20mm.
In DL load case if factor is less than one, is retained as it is.
deflection

Load
length-
1.50 DL + 1.50 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL 3.092 7.657 11.750 14.968 17.011 17.691 16.945 14.836 11.551 7.392
1.20 DL + 1.20
- - - - - - - - - -
LL + 1.20 EQL 0.000
3.163 7.793 11.950 15.233 17.341 18.086 17.404 15.360 12.140 8.047
X+
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 EQL X- 3.021 7.522 11.549 14.703 16.681 17.296 16.485 14.311 10.962 6.738
1.20 DL + 1.20
- - - - - - - - - -
LL + 1.20 EQL 0.000
3.674 8.129 12.110 15.218 17.151 17.720 16.864 14.645 11.250 6.981
Y+
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - - 0.000
LL + 1.20 EQL Y- 2.510 7.186 11.389 14.718 16.871 17.661 17.025 15.027 11.852 7.804
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 WL X+ 3.094 7.661 11.754 14.973 17.017 17.698 16.953 14.845 11.561 7.404
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 WL X- 3.089 7.654 11.745 14.962 17.004 17.683 16.936 14.826 11.540 7.381
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 WL Y+ 3.141 7.697 11.780 14.989 17.022 17.693 16.937 14.819 11.525 7.357
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 WL Y- 3.042 7.617 11.719 14.947 16.999 17.688 16.951 14.852 11.577 7.428
1.20 DL + 1.20
- - - - - - - - - -
LL + 1.20 EQL 0.000
3.092 7.657 11.750 14.968 17.011 17.691 16.945 14.836 11.551 7.392
Z+
1.20 DL + 1.20 - - - - - - - - - -
0.000
LL + 1.20 EQL Z- 3.092 7.657 11.750 14.968 17.011 17.691 16.945 14.836 11.551 7.392

B49
11.6.12 RCC DESIGN - BEAM - DRAFTING
This option is used to produce detailed design drawings for the beams, at the set floor level.
There are four options, in which the detailed design drawings can be produced. These have been
listed below:
OPEN DOUBLE LINE IN DXF FORMAT

OPEN BEAM SECTIOS IN DXF FORMAT
OPEN DESIGN DETAILS IN DXF FORMAT
CREATE DXF
CREATE STF DOUBLE LINE
CREATE STF BEAMSECTIONS
All these options have been discussed below:
11.6.12.1 OPEN DOUBLE LINE IN DXF FORMAT

In this option, you can create working drawings for the beam design in the DXF file format.
Using this option, if the slab and column design has been completed, at the set floor level, the Slab
Schedule, as well as the Column schedule will also be displayed in the file.
A dialog box showing the details of the location of the DXF file, will be displayed. The DXF file, will be
created in the same working folder, where you have stored your BLD file, and will have an extension
depending upon the floor level, for which the DXF file is produced.
On the other hand, if the Slab design and/Or Column design, at the set floor level, is not completed,
the dialog box, will display the message, "Slab / Column design is not done", as shown below:
Once the DXF is created, it can be opened directly in AUTOCAD, in the DXF file format.
The generated drawing in AUTOCAD is shown below:

11.6.12.2 OPEN BEAM SECTIOS IN DXF FORMAT
Using this option you can get the longitudinal as well as cross sections of each and every
beam along with the beams plan in DXF format.
11.6.12.3 OPEN DESIGN DETAILS IN DXF FORMAT
Using this option you can see the design results for Shear forces, Bending moments are support as
well at mid-span and Ast required at supports and mid-span. When user selects this option he will
get following dialog box.
In which he could select the options which he wants do be displayed on the drawings. And then the
drawing will be generated accordingly.
11.6.12.4 CREATE STF DOUBLE LINE
In this option, you can create the working drawings for the beam design using the ARX option. The
detailed procedure, for this option, is described below:
On clicking this menu option, the dialog box, displaying the details of the Sheet Dimensions is
displayed, as shown below:
After selecting the proper paper size and after specifying the scale, we click on Ok. So it will generate
all the drawing templates, which have an extension *.stf in the same folder containing building file.
We can open this Template file in AutoCAD.
On clicking 'OK' Struds shows the following dialog box
To open the drawing, open AUTOCAD, and follow the procedure mentioned below:
Command: arx
Enter an option [?/Load/Unload/Commands/Options]: l
Select -> Adraft2000.arx from "C:\Strudwin"
Command: menu
Select -> Adraft.mnc from "C:\Strudwin"
Menu 'AutoPrint' loads to the AUTOCAD Menu (as shown in figure below)
Command: open
Select -> created template.
AUTOCAD generates the drawing as shown
The drawings generated in the STF format also display the details of the Slab Schedule, at the set
floor level, along with the Beam schedule, in the drawing template created.
11.6.12.5 CREATE STF BEAMSECTIONS
This option enables you to create working drawings, of the Beam Cross sections as well as the
Longitudinal sections.
On clicking this option, a dialog box, displaying the Sheet dimensions, as well as the scale to which
the drawing has been created is displayed.
On clicking the OK option, another dialog box displays the location, wherein your STF file, for the
beam sections has been displayed.
To open the STF file in AUTOCAD, follow the same instructions, as described above, for creation of
Double Lines.
The drawing generated in AUTOCAD, displays the Longitudinal as well as the Cross Sectional details,
for all the beams as shown below:
11.7 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN
Select this option to design the columns in your project. This option is activated only if the current
mode has been set as "RCC Design". You can set the mode, using the Mode option.
Once the mode has been set to RCC Design, set the Structure Type, for which you want to design all
the columns in the structure. The Structure Type can be set to the Plane Grid, Plane Frame, or the
Space Frame. The details of computation of the design loads, for each of the structure types, have
been described below in greater details.
COLUMN - PLANE GRID
Select this option to design the columns in the building by plane grid method. Struds reads the
analysis results of all floor grids. The reactions at support due the grid analysis in floor plan are
summed up by Struds to compute axial loads on columns. When you design columns by this method,
they will be designed for axial load only.
COLUMN - PLANE FRAME
Select this option to design the columns in the building by plane frame method. Struds reads the
analysis results of all plane frames in X and Y directions. The reactions and moments at support due
the plane frame in both X and Y directions are summed up by Struds to compute axial loads and
moments about both axes on columns. You can then design columns for axial load and moments
along both X and Y-axes.
COLUMN - SPACE FRAME
Select this option to design the columns in the building by space frame method. Struds reads the
values of axial loads and moments about both axes on columns from the analysis results of the space
frame. You can then design columns for axial load and moments along both X and Y-axes.
The next prerequisite before proceeding to the Column design, is to set the Column design
Properties, using the RCC Design - Design Parameters menu option.
This menu option, for Column Design has several Sub Menu options, which have been listed below.
These options have been described in detail in the relevant pages:
GROUPING
NUMBERING
ALL
ONE BY ONE
OPEN
SAVE
SAVE SIZES
COLUMN PLAN VIEW
VIEW DESIGN
VIEW LOADS
CENTER LINE
CROSS SECTION
USER SECTION
CHANGE MATERIALS
CHANGE REFERENCE
REPORTS
HTML REPORTS
DRAFTING
11.7.1RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - GROUPING
This option is similar to the option MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - GROUP, which is available in the
Pre Processor mode.
11.7.2RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - NUMBERING
This option is similar to the option MODIFY - BUILDING - COLUMN - NUMBERING, which is available
in the Pre Processor mode.
11.7.3RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - ALL
When you select this option, Struds will design All the columns, in the structure, for the Design Type
(Axial / Uniaxial/ Biaxial), which you have set in the Column Design Parameters, irrespective of the
Structure type, set using the RCC DESIGN - DESIGN PARAMETERS option.
For example, if the Design type has been set as Axial, all the columns will be designed for axial loads
purely, irrespective of the Structure Type, which has been set.
Again, if the Design Type has been set as Uniaxial, all the columns would be designed about the axis,
which has been specified by the user (That is either about the X axis, or the Y axis).
Similarly, if the Design Type has been set as Biaxial, all the columns would be designed biaxially.
During designing columns if they fail due to exceeding maximum steel percentage given in design
parameters then you will get following dialog box.
User can change the required parameter from list of parameters given i the dialog box and can
proceed for further design using redesign option.
11.7.4RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - ONE BY ONE
When you select this option, Struds will design the Selected column, in the structure, for the Design
Type (Axial / UniAxial/ Biaxial), which you have set in the Column Design Parameters, irrespective of
the Structure type, set using the RCC DESIGN - DESIGN PARAMETERS option.
For example, if the Design type has been set as Axial, the column will be designed for axial loads
purely, irrespective of the Structure Type, which has been set.
Again, if the Design Type has been set as Uniaxial, the column would be designed about the axis,
which has been specified by the user (That is either about the X axis, or the Y axis).
Similarly, if the Design Type has been set as Biaxial, the column would be designed biaxially.
11.7.5RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - OPEN

This option allows you to open the design results if the design has already been done. This option is
inactive if the user does not save the previous design results by using RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - SAVE
option.
11.7.6RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - SAVE
Select this option to save the design results for the selected structure type (Plane Grid / Plane Frame
/ Space Frame). This option will be active only if you have completed the design process for the
selected structure type.
11.7.7RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - SAVE SIZES
This option is used to save the Final Sizes for all the columns, at all floor levels, obtained at the
design level. This option is activated, only after the design of the columns has been completed.
Using this option, the sizes of the column, which are obtained, after passing through the design
procedure, can be easily taken up in the Preprocessor.
To assign these sizes to the columns at the Preprocessor level, use the option MODIFY - BUILDING -
COLUMN - GET SIZES FROM DESIGN.
Once these sizes are assigned, the structure needs to be reanalysed, to take into effect the variance
in the sizes, between the first run of analysis, wherein the sizes of the columns are given by the user,
and the second run, wherein the sizes of the columns have been taken up from design module, after
successful completion of the Column Design. After this, all the components need to be redesigned
11.7.8RCC DESIGN - COLUMN – COLUMN PLAN VIEW
This option allows you to get back to plan view from the cross section option. For this to
highlight you have to click on the cross section and then go to whole plan using this option.
11.7.9RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - VIEW DESIGN
This option allows you to view the design results for the Selected column. This option will be
activated only when you have completed the design process for all the columns. When you select
this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the column of which you want to see the
design results by the cursor. Struds displays following window.
This window displays the design results for the selected column at all floors in the building.
These design results are displayed in a tabular format. The results for the column design, serially
from the bottom most floor to the top most floor are shown along the rows in this table.
The above dialog box shows two windows. The window at the bottom is used for Modifying the
column design and the upper one is to View the Design. The window at the bottom displays the
design attributes for the column at the Floor level selected in the drop down menu, named Floor -
Level, situated at the bottom left of this dialog box. If you need to modify the design attributes, for
any particular floor level, select that floor in the drop down menu.
The first column in this tabulated format displays the description of the various floors, starting from
the bottom most floors in the first row and the subsequent floors, which are displayed in rows
below.
The second column of this table displays the axial load on the column at every floor due to the
selected or worst load combination.
The third column of this table displays the Mx - that is the value of design moment about the X-axis
for the column at every floor due to the selected or worst load combination.
The fourth column of this table displays the My - value of design moment about the Y-axis for the
column at every floor due to the selected or worst load combination.
The Fifth column displays the Slenderness moments, about the X-axis, which is acting on the Column
The Sixth column displays the Slenderness moments, about the Y-axis, which is acting on the Column
The Seventh column displays the moments due to Minimum eccentricity, about the X-axis.
The Eight column displays the moments due to Minimum eccentricity, about the Y-axis.
The ninth column of this table displays the Fck - grade of concrete taken for design of the column at
every floor level. This grade of concrete can be changed in the "Modify Column Design Window" and
can also be changed from Floor to Floor.
The tenth column of this table displays the Fy - grade of steel of main bars taken for design of the
column at every floor level.
The eleventh column of this table displays the width of the column at every floor level. Width of the
column is taken as the X dimension of the column.
The twelfth column of this table displays the depth of the column at every floor level. Depth of the
column is taken as the Y dimension of the column.
The thirteenth column of this table displays N1 - the number of bars of first type. In column design,
Struds provides two different bar diameters adjusting their numbers for optimum steel area.
The fourteenth column of this table displays D1 - the diameter of bars of first type.
The fifteenth column of this table displays N2 - the number of bars of second type.
The sixteenth column of this table displays D2 - the number of bars of second type.
The seventeenth column of this table displays the required area of steel in the column at every floor.
The required steel is the approximate steel required for Axial Loads and moments, base on the
assumptions that the steel is provided at the four corners.
The eighteenth column of this table displays the area of steel, which is actually provided in the
column at every floor. There may be some difference in the Steel area, which is required, as well as
the Steel area, which is actually provided. This is because, the steel Provided, is calculated using the
best possible detailing option, depending upon the bar diameters which are available. The Steel
required also does not take into consideration the check for minimum steel (This value is set in the
Design Parameters dialog box for Columns).
The nineteenth column of this table displays the percentage of steel with respect to gross cross
sectional area of the column at every floor.
The 20TH column of this table displays the ratio of steel area provided along X-axis to Y-axis in the
column at every floor.
The 21ST column of this table displays the biaxial factor adopted by Struds for the column at every
floor.
The 22nd column of this table displays the load combination for which the design of column is
performed by Struds at every floor. If you have specified more than one load combination, Struds
designs the columns at every floor for all load combinations and displays the load combination for
which worst condition / maximum steel is obtained in this column.
The Last Column displays the orientation angle for the selected column.
At the bottom of this window are several buttons to modify/view the results displayed in the table.
This dialog box offers several options, which have been discussed in detail
Change Effective Length
This option allows you to change the effective length of column. When you select this option, Struds
This window displays a list menu indicating the floor numbers in the building. Select the floor
number for which you want to modify the effective length of the selected column. Below this are
two fields indicating the factor for effective length about X and Y-axis for the column. By default the
factors for effective length are 1 for both axes. However you can modify this by specifying the factor
by overwriting the default values in the fields.
Units
This option allows you to modify the units for the values displayed in the table. When you select this
This window has two drop down menus. The left drop down menus displays the list of items in the
table for which you can change the units. The right drop down menu displays the list of unit types
available for selected item. Chose the unit you want to apply for the selected item and click on the
CLOSE button. Struds will change and display the values of the item in the table corresponding the
modified unit
Properties
This option allows you to modify the default properties of the selected column. When you select this
You can then modify the properties or design parameters of the selected column by using various
options in this window. For details, refer the section on RCC DESIGN - DESIGN PARAMETERS.
Cross Section
This option allows you to visualise the cross sectional diagram of a column. When you select this
option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select any of the columns by cursor. Struds displays the
cross section diagram of the column on screen.
In the left portion of screen, Struds displays the cross section of selected column with placing of
reinforcement. In the right portion of screen, Struds displays a list menu indicating the floor number.
You can select the floor number from this list menu to see the cross section of selected column at
that floor. Below this Struds shows the size of column, diameter + number of main bars and dia +
spacing of stirrups. Select on the CLOSE option from menu bar to put off the display of cross section.
Redesign
This option allows you to redesign the column if you change the properties of column by using any of
following options.
By selecting the PROPERTIES button
By changing the P, Mx, My values
By changing the dimensions of the column by overwriting in the table
By changing the combination of the number of bars, and the bar diameters
If you have used any of the above options, first click on the SAVE button and then use this option to
ask Struds to redesign the column with changed properties.
View Next
Select on this button, to see the design results of the column for other load combinations. When you
This window displays the list of defined load combinations. Select the load combination for which
you want to see the design results of selected column at all floors. Click on the OK button. Struds will
then display the design results due to this load combination in the table. You can click on the
CANCEL button to close the window without selecting the load combination. This change in table will
be for display purpose only. Whereas the design schedules will be prepared by Struds for worst load
combination.
Change
This option allows you to change the load combination for design results. Struds by default designs
all the column for worst load combination. In case you want to specify some other load combination
as worst load combination, you can use this option. This change will be reflected in the design
schedules by Struds. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
The "Select Load Combination" window displays the list of defined load combinations. Select the
load combination, which you want to apply to the selected column at selected floor. Click on the OK
button. Struds will then display the design results due to this load combination in the table. You can
click on the CANCEL button to close the window without selecting the load combination. This change
in table will be reflected in design schedules by Struds.
11.7.10 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - VIEW LOADS
This menu allows you to view the values of loads and moments on the columns. It has further
following options.
VIEW LOADS - CUMULATIVE LOADS

VIEW LOADS - FLOOR LOADS
VIEW LOADS - LOAD COMBINATION
VIEW LOADS - SELECT COLUMN - DESIGN LOADS
VIEW LOADS - SELECT COLUMN - END FORCES
VIEW LOADS - SELECT COLUMN - WORKING LOADS
11.7.10.1 VIEW LOADS - CUMULATIVE LOADS
This option allows you to visualise the cumulative axial loads on all the columns in plan geometry at
the set floor. You can navigate between the floors and levels, using the combo box, provided for
changing the floors and the levels, at the top left of the screen.
11.7.10.2 VIEW LOADS - FLOOR LOADS
This option allows you to visualise the loads on all the columns due to any one floor in the building.
You can navigate between the floors and levels, using the combo box, provided for changing the
floors and the levels, at the top left of the screen.
11.7.10.3 VIEW LOADS - LOAD COMBINATION
This option allows you to chose the load combination for which the loads on columns are displayed
on screen. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
This window displays the list of all defined load combinations. Select the load combination for which
you want to see the loads on the columns. Click on the OK button. Struds will then display the loads
on column due to this load combination when you use the CUMULATIVE LOAD, FLOOR LOAD or
SELECT COLUMN option.. You can click on the CANCEL button to close the window without selecting
the load combination.
11.7.10.4 VIEW LOADS - SELECT COLUMN - DESIGN LOADS
This option allows you to select a column to see the axial load and moment. When you select this
option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select any of the columns by the cursor. Struds displays
following window.
11.7.10.5 VIEW LOADS - SELECT COLUMN - END FORCES
After clicking this option we have to select the column for which we want to see the end forces. On
choosing the column the following window appears.
There is a dropdown menu at the bottom of the dialog box by which we can select the floor level.
This dialog box will give all the information pertaining to the column segment between the selected
Floors.
11.7.10.6 VIEW LOADS - SELECT COLUMN - WORKING LOADS
On clicking this option it will give us the working load on the column, which we choose.
11.7.11 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - CENTER LINE
This option allows you to obtain the centre line diagram for all the columns. Click on this option to
get a diagram as follows.
Struds finds out the X and Y co-ordinates of each column with respect to origin in the plan geometry.
The values of these are displayed diagrammatically along X and Y-axes. If you want to shift the origin
to recalculate centre line dimensions, use RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - CHANGE REFERENCE option from
the menu.
11.7.12 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - CROSS-SECTION
This option allows you to visualize the cross sectional diagram of a column. For details refer to the
explanation given for RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - VIEW DESIGN - CROSS SECTION option.
11.7.13 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - USER SECTION
This option allows you to define the dimensions, properties and placement of reinforcement in a
selected column while Struds performs redesign of the column and checks whether it is safe or not.
When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen.
Select any of the columns by the cursor. Struds displays following screen.
Struds shows the cross section of the column at the bottom most floors and the existing placement
of steel. The design load, design moments, cross sectional area etc. are also shown at the right side
of screen. At the top of screen is a pull down menu showing the list of floor numbers. You can select
the floor from this menu to get the diagram and details of column at that floor. The menu bar at the
top has following options to specify your own properties and parameters for this selected column.
SETTINGS
This option allows you to specify the basic parameters for design of selected column. It further has
following options.
SETTINGS - PROPERTIES
This option allows you to set the basic parameters for design of column. When you select this
option, Struds displays the window for `Design Parameters'. For details of this window, refer to the
explanation given for RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - VIEW
DESIGN - PROPERTIES.
SETTINGS - DIAMETERS
This option allows you to select the bar diameters for placing in the column. When you select this
Select the bar diameter that you want to provide for column main bars by mouse and press on the
SELECT button at the right side. The selected bar diameter is shown by Struds in the right text
column. This way you can specify the diameters that you want to provide for the column. You can
specify maximum two types of bar diameters. If you want to remove any bar diameter from the list
of selected bar diameters, select it by mouse and click on the DELETE button. Click on the OK button
to proceed for design with chosen bar diameters. You can also click on the CANCEL button if you
want to abandon the bar diameters' selection.
SETTINGS - STEP VALUE
This option enables you to select the grid size which is to be drawn within the column. Using these
grids, you can easily locate, any additional bars, if required.
BARS
This option allows you to specify the placing of reinforcement in the selected column. It has
following sub-options.
BARS - ADD DIA1 BAR
This option allows you to place the bars of first diameter type in the cross sectional geometry of the
column. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Move the cursor and click
it at the positions where you want to put the bars of first type in the cross section diagram of the
column.
BARS - ADD DIA2 BAR
This option allows you to place the bars of second diameter type in the cross sectional geometry of
the column. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Move the cursor and
click it at the positions where you want to put the bars of second type in the cross section diagram of
the column.
BARS - DELETE
This option allows you to remove the bars placed in the cross sectional geometry of the column.
When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Move the cursor and click it on the
bar positions which you want to delete from the cross section diagram of the column.
BARS - DELETE ALL
This option allows you to remove all the bars placed in the cross sectional geometry of the column.
When you select this option, Struds will remove all bar types placed in the column.
ZOOM
The details of this option are given in Appendix.
TOOLS
This option shows the tool bar.
SAVE
When you select this option Struds saves the changes.
PRINT
The details of this option are given in Appendix.

CLOSE
When you select this option Struds closes the Current window.
11.7.14 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - CHANGE MATERIALS
This option allows you to change the material properties of the columns for each storey. For
example, if you want to change the grade of concrete at a particular floor for all column and perform
the design; you can use this option. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
This window displays a drop down menu at top left indicating the list of all floors in the building.
Select the floor for which you want to change the material properties of all the columns. The already
assigned material properties to the columns in this floor are displayed by Struds at the top right.
Click on the check box for `Change materials' option. The pull down menus for grade of concrete and
grade of steel become active. Select the grade of concrete and steel that you want to assign to the
columns in selected floor and click on SAVE button. Now you can click on the OK button to redesign
the columns. You can also click on the CANCEL button to abandon the changing of material
properties.
11.7.15 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - CHANGE REFERENCE
This option allows you to change the origin for computing the centre line dimensions of columns.
This option is active only when you have obtained the display of centre line diagram on screen by
using CENTER LINE option from the menu bar. When you select this option, Struds displays following
window.
This window has two fields for X and Y offset by which you can shift the origin /reference point. Type
the value of X and Y distance by which you want to shift the origin and click on OK button. Struds will
recalculate the centre line dimensions of all the columns and display them on the screen.
11.7.16 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - REPORTS
This option allows you to generate the text reports for design results of the columns. This has further
following options.
SCHEDULE
QUANTITY
QUANTITY SUMMARY
LOAD
DETAIL REPORT
DESIGN DETAILS
11.7.16.1 SCHEDULE
This option allows you to get the design schedule of all the columns for the following options
GroupWise, Floor Wise, Worst Load Combination, All Load Combinations
Struds shows the results of design at every floor of all columns in table format. For the menu options
of Print, Settings, Page Control etc., refer to Appendix B.
GroupWise
When you select this option Struds displays a text report as follows.
This report displays the design results of each column group for worst load combination in text -
table format.
Floor Wise
This report displays the design results of each column at every floor for worst load combination in
text - table format.
Worst Load Combination
All Load Combinations
This report displays the design results of each column at every floor for all the defined load
combinations one by one in text - table format. The name of load combination and the column
number are displayed above every table.
11.7.16.2 QUANTITY
Select this option, to see the quantities of concrete and steel for all the columns after design. Struds
displays a text report as shown below.
Struds shows the concrete and steel quantity at every floor of all columns in table format. For the
menu options of Print, Settings, Page Control etc., refer to Appendix.
11.7.16.3 QUANTITY SUMMARY
Select this option, to see the summary report quantities of concrete and steel for all the columns
after design. In this report the quantities at every floor and for entire building are shown. The steel
quantities are sorted out for different bar diameters and grades. Struds displays a text report as
shown below.
Struds shows the total concrete and steel quantity for each column and the total quantities in table
format. For the menu options of Print, Settings, Page Control etc., refer to Appendix.
11.7.16.4 LOAD
Select this option, to see the report of axial load and moment on all the columns due to every
defined load combination. Struds displays a text report as shown below.
Struds shows the axial load (P), Moment about X axis (Mx), Moment about Y axis (My), Moment due
to slenderness about X axis (Sx) and Moment due to slenderness about Y axis (Sy) for each column at
every floor due to all defined load combinations in table format. For the menu options of Print,
Settings, Page Control etc., refer to Appendix.
11.7.16.5 DETAIL REPORT
Select this option, to see the report for design details of all the columns due to worst load
combination. Struds displays a text report as shown below.
Struds shows the design details such as size of column, reinforcement bar+dia combination, grade of
concrete (Fck), grade of steel(Fy), design axial load (Pu), design moment about X axis (Mx), design
moment about Y axis (My), moment due to slenderness about X axis (Mux1) and Moment due to
slenderness about Y axis (Muy1), load carrying capacity of column (Pux & Puy), moments due to
minimum eccentricity (Mux Min & Muy Min), value of alpha and biaxial factor for design for each
column at every floor due to the worst load combination in table format. For the menu options of
Print, Settings, Page Control etc., refer to Appendix.
11.7.16.6 DESIGN DETAILS
Select this option, to see the step-by-step Detailed design of the selected column due to worst load
combination. For the menu options of Print, Settings, Page Control etc., refer to Appendix.
11.7.17 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - HTML REPORTS
On clicking this option we get the HTML format for below stated reports
• COLUMN DESIGN DETAILS

• COLUMN LOAD DETAILS
• GROUPWISE SCHEDULE
• FLOORWISE SCHEDULE
• DETAIL REPORT
11.7.17.1 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - HTML REPORTS - COLUMN DESIGN

DETAILS
PROJECT :
PLAN : demo
DATE : 12/11/04 TIME : 11:23:08
Building Version : 1.410 Struds Version : 2005
Column Design Detail Report :
( Design by limit state method as per IS 456 : 2000)

Terms Used In Calculation :
In biaxial column design,
Pu = Puc + Pus(Total)
where, Pu = external axial compressive load,
Puc = axial compressive resistance offered by concrete,
Pus(Total) = total axial compressive resistance offered by steel
at different levels in the section.
Mu = Muc + Mus(Total)
where, Mu = external moment about centroidal axis,
Muc = moment of resistance offered by concrete in compression,
&nbspMus(Total) = total moment of resistance offered by steel at different
levels in the section.
i = serial no. of row of reinforcement,
Asi = cross-sectional area of reinforcement in the i th row,
fsi = stress in the reinforcement in the i th row (compression + ve, tension - ve),
fci = compressive stress in concrete at the level of i th row of reinforcement,
= strain at the i th row of reinforcement from the stress-strain curve of steel and
ei
concrete,
xi = distance of the bars in the i th row from the centroid of the section
Values of stress in steel :

Design strength in bending compression,(fyd) = 0.87 fy
For Fe 250,
For ei = fyd/Es, fsi = fyd
For ei < fyd/Es, fsi="ei" x fyd>
For Fe 415,
For ei = 0.8 x fyd/Es, fsi = value obtained from stress-strain curve
For ei < 0.8 x fyd/Es, fsi="ei" x fyd>
Stress Stress level Strain
(N/mm²)
0.80 fyd 288.7 0.00144

0.85 fyd 306.7 0.00163
0.90 fyd 324.8 0.00192
0.95 fyd 342.8 0.00241
0.975fyd 351.8 0.00276
1.00 fyd 360.9 0.00380
Values of stress in concrete :

For ei = 0.002, fci = 0.446 fck
For ei < 0.002, fci="(446.ei" x (1 - 250.ei)) x fck>
Values of strain :
Values of strain at different levels are obtained by taking maximum strain
as 0.002 as the reference value at the highly compressed edge.
Design of CG1 :
General Design Parameters :
Below Floor2 - Default Level at 6.000 m
Column size, (B x D) = 230 x 300 mm Column height,(L) = 2700 mm
From analysis results,loads on column

Axial load,(P) = 64.74 KN
MomentX,(Mx) = 28.11 KN-m MomentY,(My) = 16.25 KN-m
fck = 20.00 Newton/mm² fy = 415.00 Newton/mm²
Load combination = 1.50 DL + 1.50 LL
Column Name Orientation Angle
C1 0.00
Check For Slenderness :
Slenderness RatioX = ( Lo x Effective Length FactorX ) / Depth
= ( 2700 x 1.000 ) / 300 = 9.00 <>
column is not slender in this direction.
Slenderness RatioY = ( Lo x Effective Length FactorY ) / Width
= ( 2700 x 1.000 ) / 230 = 11.74 <>
column is not slender in this direction.
Mx_MinEccen = 1.295 kN.m , My_MinEccen = 1.295 kN.m
Mx = max(Mx,Mx_MinEccen) + MuaddX = 28.109 kN.m
My = max(My,My_MinEccen) + MuaddY = 16.253 kN.m
Calculation Of Eccentricities :
As per IS 456: 2000 /Clause 25.4,all columns shall be designed for minimum
eccentricity
equal to the unsupported length of the column/500 plus lateral dimension/30, subject to a
minimum of 20 mm.
Actual eccenX = Mx/P = 28.11/64.74 = 434 mm
Actual eccenY = My/P = 16.25/64.74 = 251 mm
eccenXMin = (L/500) + (D/30) = (2700/500) + (300/30) = 15 mm
eccenXMin = max(15,20)= 20 mm
eccenYMin = (L/500) + (B/30) = (2700/500) + (230/30) = 13 mm
eccenYMin = max(13,20) = 20 mm
eccenX = max(Actual eccenX,eccenXMin) = max(434,20) = 434 mm
eccenY = max(Actual eccenY,eccenYMin) = max(251,20) = 251 mm
As per IS 456: 2000 /Clause 39.3,

when the minimum eccentricity does not exceed 0.05 times the lateral dimension,
the column will be designed as an axially loaded column.
eccenX(434 mm) 0.05 x 230(12 mm)
and eccenY(251 mm) 0.05 x 300(15 mm)
Hence the column will be designed as a column with biaxial moments.
Provided steel :
Provide 20 Tor 4 nos. (1257 mm²)
Biaxial Check Calculations :
For X axis :
Row No. Asi ei fsi fci (fsi - fci) Pusi xi Musi
(i) (mm²) (Newton/mm²) (Newton/mm²) (Newton/mm²) (KN) (mm) (KN-m)
1 628 0.00131 261.59 7.85 253.74 159.43 100 15.94

2 628 -0.00746 -360.90 0.00 -360.90 -226.76 -100 22.68
Total -67.33 38.62
xuX = 80 mm Puc = C1.fck.B.D
C1 = 0.36 ku = 0.36 x 80/300 = 0.096
Puc = 0.096 x 20.00 x 230 x 300 = 132.21 KN
Pux1 = Puc + Pus(Total) = 132.21 + (-67.33) = 64.87 KN P ,hence O.K.
Muc = Puc.(0.5.D - C2.D)
C2 = 0.416 ku = 0.416 x 80/300 = 0.111
Muc = 132.21 x (0.5 x 300 - 0.111 x 300) = 15.44 KN-m
Mux1 = Muc + Mus(Total)= 15.44 + (38.62) = 54.06 KN-m
For Y axis :
(i) (mm²) (Newton/mm²) (Newton/mm²) (Newton/mm²) (KN) (mm) (KN-m)
1 628 0.00110 220.54 7.12 213.41 134.09 65 8.72

2 628 -0.00513 -360.90 0.00 -360.90 -226.76 -65 14.74
Total -92.67 23.46
xuY = 73 mm Puc = C1.fck.D.B
C1 = 0.36 ku = 0.36 x 73/230 = 0.114
Puc = 0.114 x 20.00 x 300 x 230 = 157.68 KN
Puy1 = Puc + Pus(Total) = 157.68 + (-92.67) = 65.01 KN P ,hence O.K.
Muc = Puc.(0.5.B - C2.B)
C2 = 0.416 ku = 0.416 x 73/230 = 0.132
Muc = 157.68 x (0.5 x 230 - 0.132 x 230) = 13.34 KN-m
Muy1 = Muc + Mus(Total)= 13.34 + (23.46) = 36.80 KN-m

Pu/Puz = 0.065
For Pu/Puz <> = 1.0
For Pu/Puz = 0.8,alpha = 2.0
For Pu/Puz = 0.065,alpha = 1.000
((Mux/Mux1)âlpha) + ((Muy/Muy1)âlpha) = ((28.11/54.06)^1.000)
+ ((16.25/36.80)^1.000)
= 0.962 < 1.0,hence O.K.>
Ties Details :
Load combination for ties design = 1.50 DL + 1.50 LL
Calculation of diameter of ties :
As per IS 456: 2000 /Clause 26.5.3.2 (c), the diameter of the polygonal links or
lateral ties shall be not less than the following
i)one-fourth the diameter of the largest longitudinal bar = 20/4 = 5 mm
ii)in no case less than = 6 mm
Required diameter = maximum of (5, 6) = 6 mm
Provide 6 mm diameter for ties.
Calculation of spacing of ties :
As per IS 456: 2000 /Clause 26.5.3.2 (c), the pitch of transverse reinforcement shall
be
not more than the least of the following distances:
i) the least lateral dimension of the compression member = 230 mm
ii) sixteen times the smallest diameter of the longitudinal reinforcement bar to be
tied
= 16 x 20 = 320 mm
iii) 300 mm
Required spacing = minimum of (230, 320, 300) = 230 mm
Provide ties 6 dia. @ 230 mm c/c
SUMMARY :
CG1 : Floor2 - Default Level at 6.000 m
Provide rectangular section : 230 x 300 mm
Provide 20 Tor 4 nos. (1257 mm²)
Provide ties 6 dia. @ 230 mm c/c
Provide 2 legged ties along width and
2 legged ties along depth.
11.7.17.2 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - HTML REPORTS - COLUMN - LOAD

DETAILS
Column Loads Detail Report :

Column No. Column Group Section Type Column size Axial Load Mx My Ast prov.
(mm) (KN) (KN-m) (KN-m) (mm²)
C1 CG1 Rect 230 x 300 134.63 10.86 7.53 679

230 x 300 64.74 28.11 16.25 1257
C2 CG2 Rect 230 x 300 172.82 5.78 2.66 679
230 x 300 84.97 13.23 5.98 679
C3 CG3 Rect 230 x 300 139.93 5.13 0.00 679
230 x 300 67.16 12.44 0.00 679
C4 CG4 Rect 230 x 300 172.82 5.78 2.66 679
230 x 300 84.97 13.23 5.98 679
C5 CG5 Rect 230 x 300 134.63 10.86 7.53 679
230 x 300 64.74 28.11 16.25 1257
C6 CG6 Rect 230 x 300 171.17 4.72 2.97 679
230 x 300 85.25 10.39 4.62 679
C7 CG7 Rect 230 x 300 153.26 5.01 0.00 679
230 x 300 74.91 12.39 0.00 679
C8 CG8 Rect 230 x 300 171.17 4.72 2.97 679
230 x 300 85.25 10.39 4.62 679
C9 CG9 Rect 230 x 300 138.09 10.82 7.91 679
305 x 375 66.90 28.17 17.59 905
C10 CG10 Rect 230 x 300 77.99 0.77 7.06 679
230 x 300 36.11 2.21 16.61 679
C11 CG11 Rect 230 x 300 77.99 0.77 7.06 679
230 x 300 36.11 2.21 16.61 679
C12 CG12 Rect 230 x 300 138.09 10.82 7.91 679
305 x 375 66.90 28.17 17.59 905
11.7.17.3 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - SCHEDULE - GROUP WISE
Column Design Schedule :
SPACEFRAME STRUCTURE
As Per IS 456 : 2000
Group Name : CG1

Column Section : Rectangular
Columns : C1
Floor-Level Concrete Main Steel Stirrup Steel Column size Main Steel Stirrup Steel
Grade Grade Grade (mm) (mm) (mm)
Floor1-Default Level M20 Fe415 Fe250 230 x 300 6 - #12 6 @190

Group Name : CG2

Columns : C2

Group Name : CG3

Columns : C3

Group Name : CG4

Columns : C4
Group Name : CG5

Columns : C5

Group Name : CG6

Columns : C6


11.7.17.4 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - SCHEDULE - FLOOR WISE
Column Design Schedule :
As Per IS 456 : 2000
Floor - Level : Floor1-Default Level

Column Columns Concrete Grade Column size Main Steel Stirrup Steel
Group (mm) (mm) (mm)
CG1 C1 M20 230 x 300 4 - #20 6 @230

CG2 C2 M20 230 x 300 6 - #12 6 @190
CG3 C3 M20 230 x 300 6 - #12 6 @190
CG4 C4 M20 230 x 300 6 - #12 6 @190
CG5 C5 M20 230 x 300 4 - #20 6 @230
CG6 C6 M20 230 x 300 6 - #12 6 @190
CG7 C7 M20 230 x 300 6 - #12 6 @190
CG8 C8 M20 230 x 300 6 - #12 6 @190
CG9 C9 M20 305 x 375 8 - #12 6 @190
CG10 C10 M20 230 x 300 6 - #12 6 @190
CG11 C11 M20 230 x 300 6 - #12 6 @190
CG12 C12 M20 305 x 375 8 - #12 6 @190
11.7.17.5 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - HTML REPORTS - DETAIL REPORT
On clicking this option, Struds displays the dialog box, as shown below:
Depending upon the options, which are selected, in this dialog box, Struds will display the
corresponding details, in the detailed report.
Column Detail Report:
As Per IS 456 : 2000

11.7.18 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - DRAFTING
This option enables you to generate working drawings of the column centreline, either in the DXF
format, or the STF format.
The detailed procedure, for both is explained in the respective topics.
RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - DRAFTING - CREATE DXF CENTERLINE
RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - DRAFTING - CREATE STF CENTERLINE
11.7.18.1 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - DRAFTING - CREATE DXF

CENTERLINE
This option is used to create the working drawings of the column centreline, in the DXF format.
On using this option, Struds displays the dialog box, showing the path, where the DXF file, has been
created. This file, would be created in the same folder, where your BLD file, has been saved.
Once this file, has been created, it can be opened in AUTOCAD, in the DXF file format.
11.7.18.2 RCC DESIGN - COLUMN - DRAFTING - CREATE STF CENTERLINE
This option enables you to generate the working drawings of the column centre line in the STF
format.
11.8 RCC DESIGN - SHEAR WALL
Select this option to design the Shear walls in your project. This option is activated only if the current
mode has been set as "RCC Design". You can set the mode, using the Mode option.
Once the mode has been set to RCC Design, set the Structure Type, Space Frame.
The next prerequisite before proceeding to the Shear wall design, is to set the Shear wall design
Properties, using the RCC Design - Design Parameters menu option.
This menu option, for Shear wall Design has several Sub Menu options, which have been listed
below. These options have been described in detail in the relevant pages:
ALL
OPEN
SAVE
CROSS SECTION
HTML REPORTS
11.8.1RCC DESIGN - SHEAR WALL – ALL
When you select this option, Struds will design All the Shear walls, in the structure.
It will design all types of walls that is straight walls, L type walls as well as C type of shear walls.
After completing the design it will display the message of Shear wall design completed.
You can select this icon to design all the shear walls present in the structure.
11.8.2RCC DESIGN - SHEAR WALL – OPEN
This option allows you to open the design results if the design has already been done. This option is
inactive if the previous design results are not saved by the user by using RCC DESIGN - SHEAR WALL -
SAVE option.
You can select this icon to open the shear wall design.
11.8.3RCC DESIGN - SHEAR WALL - SAVE
Select this option to save the design results for the selected structure type(Plane Grid / Plane Frame
/ Space Frame). This option will be active only if you have completed the design process for the
selected structure type.
You can select this icon to save the design of shear wall.
11.8.4RCC DESIGN - SHEAR WALL - CROSS SECTION
This option allows you to visualise the cross sectional diagram of a Shear Wall. In this option you
have two sub options to Display the cross-section and to close the cross section and return back to
floor plan.
You can select the display option to view the cross section. After giving this command cursor will be
displayed on the screen to select the wall of which you want the cross section.
After viewing the same you can click on the cross section and select the close option to close the
cross section and display the floor plan.
11.8.5 RCC DESIGN - SHEAR WALL - HTML REPORTS – DESIGN DETAILS
In this option the choice to display the report floorwise is given. You can select the floors for
which you want the report. When you select this option following dialog box comes on
screen.
Click in the floor levels of which you want the report. By default all floors are selected.
DESIGN DETAILS
LOAD DETAILS
FLOORWISE SCHEDULE
Shear Wall Design Detail Report :
Design By Limit State Method as per IS 456: 2000
Terms Used In Calculation:

In biaxial shear wall design,
Pu = Puc + Pus(Total)
where,
Pu = external axial compressive load,
Puc = axial compressive resistance offered by concrete,
Pus(Total) = total axial compressive resistance offered by steel
Mu = Muc + Mus(Total)
where,
Mu = external moment about centroidal axis,
Muc = moment of resistance offered by concrete in compression,
Mus(Total) = total moment of resistance offered by steel
i = serial no. of row of reinforcement,
Asi = cross-sectional area of reinforcement in the i th row,
fsi = stress in the reinforcement in the i th row (compression + ve, tension - ve),
fci = compressive stress in concrete at the level of i th row of reinforcement,
ei = strain at the i th row of reinforcement from the stress-strain curve of steel and concrete,
xi = distance of the bars in the i th row from the centroid of the section
Values of stress in steel :

Design strength in bending compression (fyd) = 0.87 fy
(a) Fe 250,
For ei = fyd / Es, fsi = fyd
For ei <>fyd / Es, fsi = ei x fyd
(b) Fe 415,
For ei = 0.8 x fyd / Es, fsi = value obtained from stress-strain curve
For ei < 0.8 x>fyd / Es, fsi = ei x fyd
Stress level
Stress Strain
(N/mm²)
0.800 fyd 288.7 0.00144
0.850 fyd 306.7 0.00163
0.900 fyd 324.8 0.00192
0.950 fyd 342.8 0.00241
0.975 fyd 351.8 0.00276
1.000 fyd 360.9 0.00380
Values of stress in concrete :
&nbspFor ei = 0.002, fci = 0.446 fck
&nbspFor ei < 0.002,>fci = (446.ei x (1 - 250.ei)) x fck
Values of strain :
Values of strain at different levels are obtained by taking maximum strain
as 0.0035 as the reference value at the highly compressed edge.
Shear Wall: SW1
Design of Component: A
General Design Parameters :
Below Floor1 - Default Level at 3.000 m

shear wall size (Lw x tw x Hw) = 3000 mm x 150 mm x 3000 mm
Load Combination 1.50 DL + 1.50 LL ,
Loads on shear wall
Pu = 634.21 kN
Mux = 6.77 kN-m
Muy = 149.53 kN-m
fck = 20.00 N/mm²
fy = 415.00 N/mm²
Design Moments Considering the effect of Eccentricity:
User defined minimum eccentricity factor

in X direction(feminx)
= 0.020
User defined minimum eccentricity factor
in Y direction(feminy)
= 0.020
eminx = feminx x tw
eminx = 0.020 x 0.150 = 0.003m
eminy = feminy x tw
eminy = 0.020 x 0.150 = 0.003m
Eccentricity due to axial load (eaxial_x) = Mux / Pu
eaxial_x = 6.771 / 634.207 = 0.011m
eaxial_y = Muy / Pu
eaxial_y = 149.531 / 634.207 = 0.236m
Design Eccentricity (ex) = maximum(eminx,eaxial_x)
ex = maximum(0.003,0.011)= 0.011m
Design Eccentricity (ey) = maximum(eminy,eaxial_y)
Design Eccentricity (ey) = maximum(0.003,0.236)= 0.236m
Design Moment(Mx) = 6.771kNm
(My) = 149.531kNm
Check For Thickness

[A]As per IS 456:2000
I) Clause 32. 1
tw 100 mm. Hence OK
II) Clause 32.2.3
Effective height Hwe = 3600 mm.
(Hwe / tw) = 24.0 < 30.>Hence OK
Vertical Reinforcement Details:

[A] As per IS 456:2000 Clause 32.5 (a)
The minimum ratio of vertical reinforcement to gross concrete area shall be:
1) 0.0012 for diameter <=16mm and fy >= 415 N/mm²,
2) 0.0015 for diameter >16mm,
3) 0.0012 for welded wire fabric diameter <=16mm.
Ast_reqd = 0.0012 x 3000 x 150 =540 mm²
Provide vertical reinforcement #8 - 22 nos. (1106 mm²>540 mm²)
Check For R / F Grid

One of the corner of shear wall at floor (Refer the design of Floor2 Component:-A-Default Level 6m )
is in tension, hence provide horizontal and vertical reinforcement in two grids,
one near each face of the wall.
Check For Section Capacity :

Biaxial Check Calculations :
For X axis :

(i) (mm²) (N/mm²) (N/mm²) (N/mm²) (kN) (mm) (kN-m)
1 553 -0.00031 -61.82 0.00 -61.82 -34.18 31 -1.06
2 553 -0.00568 -360.90 0.00 -360.90 -199.55 -31 6.19
Total -233.73 5.13
xu_x = 40 mm Puc = C1.fck.B.D
C1 = 0.36 ku = 0.36 x 40/150 = 0.097
Puc = 0.097 x 20.00 x 3000 x 150
= 873.28 kN
Pux1 = Puc + Pus(Total)
= 873.28 + (-233.73)
= 639.55 kN Pu. Hence OK.
Muc = Puc.(0.5.D - C2.D)
C2 = 0.416 ku = 0.416 x 40/150
= 0.112
Muc = 873.28 x (0.5 x 150 - 0.112 x 150) = 50.81 kN-m
Mux1 = Muc + Mus(Total)
= 50.81 + (5.13)
= 55.94 kN-m
For Y axis :

(i) (mm²) (N/mm²) (N/mm²) (N/mm²) (kN) (mm) (kN-m)
1 101 0.00330 356.51 8.92 347.59 34.94 1456 50.88
2 101 0.00196 326.26 8.92 317.35 31.90 1165 37.16
3 101 0.00062 124.35 4.68 119.67 12.03 874 10.51
4 101 -0.00072 -143.25 0.00 -143.25 -14.40 582 -8.39
5 101 -0.00205 -329.73 0.00 -329.73 -33.15 291 -9.65
6 101 -0.00339 -357.33 0.00 -357.33 -35.92 0 0.00
7 101 -0.00473 -360.90 0.00 -360.90 -36.28 -291 10.57
8 101 -0.00607 -360.90 0.00 -360.90 -36.28 -582 21.13
9 101 -0.00741 -360.90 0.00 -360.90 -36.28 -874 31.70
10 101 -0.00874 -360.90 0.00 -360.90 -36.28 -1165 42.26
11 101 -0.01008 -360.90 0.00 -360.90 -36.28 -1456 52.83
Total -186.00 238.99
xu_y = 762 mm Puc = C1.fck.B.D
C1 = 0.36 ku = 0.36 x 762/3000 = 0.091
Puc = 0.091 x 20.00 x 150 x 3000
= 822.66 kN
Puy1 = Puc + Pus(Total)
= 822.66 + (-186.00)
= 636.65 kN Pu. Hence OK.
Muc = Puc.(0.5.B - C2.B)
C2 = 0.416 ku = 0.416 x 762/3000
= 0.106
Muc = 822.66 x (0.5 x 3000 - 0.106 x 3000) = 973.31 kN-m
Muy1 = Muc + Mus(Total)
= 973.31 + (238.99)
= 1212.29 kN-m
For Pu / Puz <>n = 1.0
For Pu / Puz = 0.8,n = 2.0
For Pu / Puz = 0.145,n = 1.000
 
(Mux / Mux1) n+ (Muy / Muy1) n
1.000 1.000
= ((6.77 / 55.94) ) + ((149.53 / 1212.29) )
= 0.244<>Hence OK.
Horizontal Reinforcement Details :

Calculation of diameter of horizontal reinforcement :
As per IS 456: 2000 Clause 26.5.3.2 (c), the diameter shall not be less than the following
1)One-fourth the diameter of the largest longitudinal bar = 8/4 = 2 mm
2) In no case less than = 6 mm
Required diameter = maximum of (2, 6) = 6 mm
Provide Ø8 mm diameter for horizontal reinforcement.

Calculation for Spacing of Horizontal Reinforcement :
Calculation of shear stresses as per IS 456: 2000 Clause 32.4
Maximum shear stresscwmax= 0.17 x fck =0.17 x 20 = 3.40 N/mm²
(Hw / Lw) = 3000 / 3000 = 1.000
The design shear strength of concrete in wall cwas per Clause 32.4.3
a) Hw / Lw <>
cw = (3.0 - (Hw / Lw) K1 (fck)
where K1 = 0.2 in limit state method
cw = (3.0 - 1.000) x 0.20 x  20 = 1.79 N/mm²
But shall not be less than K3 (fck)

where K3 = 0.15 in limit state method
cw = 0.150 x 20 = 0.67 N/mm²
cw = maximum ( 1.79, 0.67) = 1.79 N/mm²
For X - axis :
[A] As per IS 456: 2000 Clause 32.5.d, the pitch of transverse reinforcement shall be
1) 3 x tw = 450
2) 300 mm
User defined maximum spacing = 300 mm
Required spacing = minimum of (450,300,300)= 300
User defined minimum spacing = 100 mm< 300 mm>
Provide spacing= 300 mm
Design shear force (Vud) = 3 kN (from analysis)
Effective depth of shear wall section = dw = 0.8 x Lw = 0.8 x 3000 = 2400 mm
Effective area of shear wall section = Area = dw x tw = 2400 x 150 = 360000 mm²
Capacity of concrete,(Vuc) = auc x Area = 644 kN
Vuc Vud, Hence OK
Provide horizontal reinforcement Ø8 dia. @ 300 mm c/c

For Y - axis :
[A] As per IS 456: 2000 Clause 32.5.d, the pitch of transverse reinforcement shall be
1) 3 x tw = 450
2) 300 mm
User defined maximum spacing = 300 mm
Required spacing = minimum of (450,300,300)= 300
User defined minimum spacing = 100 mm< 300 mm>
Provide spacing= 300 mm
Design shear force (Vud) = 3 kN (from analysis)
Effective depth of shear wall section = dw = 0.8 x Lw = 0.8 x 3000 = 2400 mm
Effective area of shear wall section = Area = dw x tw = 2400 x 150 = 360000 mm²
Capacity of concrete,(Vuc) = auc x Area = 644 kN
Vuc Vud, Hence OK
Provide horizontal reinforcement Ø8 dia. @ 300 mm c/c
SUMMARY:
SW1 - A : Floor1 - Default Level at 3.000 m

Provide rectangular section : 3000 x 150 mm
Provide vertical reinforcement #8 - 22 nos. (1106 mm²)
Provide horizontal reinforcement Ø8 @ 300 mm c/c
Provide horizontal and vertical reinforcement in two grids,
one near each face of the wall.
PROJECT :
PLAN : a1
DATE : 11/26/05 TIME : 11:54:13
Shear wall Load Detail Report:

Shear wall Component Type Size Axial Load Mx My Ast prov.
SW1 A Straight 3000 x 150 165.64 2.58 22.66 2488

L A L Type 2000 x 150 105.91 0.61 9.98 905
B 2000 x 150 121.76 0.47 6.61 905
C A C Type 3000 x 150 191.77 1.53 70.52 2488
B 3000 x 150 89.71 0.15 11.58 1244
C 3000 x 150 171.54 2.21 36.51 2488
SW1 A Straight 3000 x 150 110.51 3.40 20.70 2488

L A L Type 2000 x 150 71.74 0.98 8.68 1810
B 2000 x 150 80.16 0.77 6.52 1810
C A C Type 3000 x 150 127.22 2.17 48.14 2488
B 3000 x 150 58.73 0.11 8.15 2488
C 3000 x 150 114.94 3.20 32.06 2488
SW1 A Straight 3000 x 150 54.88 4.68 18.35 2488

L A L Type 2000 x 150 36.55 1.28 8.32 1810
B 2000 x 150 39.91 1.27 5.51 1810
C A C Type 3000 x 150 64.86 2.74 25.70 2488
B -- -- -- -- --
C 3000 x 150 59.12 3.99 27.83 2488
PROJECT :
PLAN : a1
DATE : 11/26/05 TIME : 12:14:03
Shear wall Design Schedule :

Shear wall Component Concrete Grade Size Vertical Horizontal Type
(mm) (mm) (mm)
SW1 A M20 3000 x 150 22 - #12 8 @150 Straight

L A M20 2000 x 150 8 - #12 10 @150 L
B M20 2000 x 150 8 - #12 10 @150 L
C A M20 3000 x 150 22 - #12 8 @150 C
B M20 3000 x 150 11 - #12 10 @150 C
C M20 3000 x 150 22 - #12 8 @150 C
Shear wall Component Concrete Grade Size Vertical Horizontal Type
(mm) (mm) (mm)
SW1 A M20 3000 x 150 22 - #12 8 @150 Straight

L A M20 2000 x 150 16 - #12 8 @150 L
B M20 2000 x 150 16 - #12 8 @150 L
C A M20 3000 x 150 22 - #12 8 @150 C
B M20 3000 x 150 22 - #12 8 @150 C
C M20 3000 x 150 22 - #12 8 @150 C
11.9 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING
Select this option to design all the footings of the building. It has following options.
FOOTING - PLANE GRID Select this option to design the footings in the building by plane grid method.
Struds reads the analysis results of all floor grids and the design results of column
due to Plane grid method. It is obvious that you must have first designed & saved
the results for all the columns in the building. The loads at the bottom of the
column are taken by Struds to compute the design load on footing. When you
design footings by this method, they will be designed for axial load only.
FOOTING - PLANE FRAME Select this option to design the footings of the building by plane frame method.
Struds reads the analysis results of all plane frames in X and Y directions and the
design results of column due to Plane frame method. The reactions and moments
at supports due the plane frame in both X and Y directions are summed up by
Struds to compute axial loads and moments about both axes on footings. You can
then design footings for axial load and moments along both X and Y axes.
Note : Do not use this option for raft footing design
FOOTING - SPACE FRAME Select this option to design the footings of the building by space frame method.
Struds reads the values of axial loads and moments about both axes on footings
from the analysis results of the space frame and the design results of column due
to Space Frame method. You can then design footings for axial load and moments
along both X and Y axes.
This option has several sub options, which have been listed below:
RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - NEW

RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - OPEN
RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - SAVE
RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - GROUPING
RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - VIEW DESIGN
RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - VIEW LOADS
RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - VIEW RAFT DESIGN
RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - VIEW RESULTS
RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - VIEW PLAN + ELEVATION
RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - CENTERLINE
RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - REPORTS
RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - HTML REPORTS
RCC DESIGN - FOOTING – DRAFTING
All these options have been discussed in the relevant topics
11.9.1RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - NEW
When you select this option, Struds will perform the design of all the footings in the building. You
must have designed the column of the building to use this option.
In case of combine footing, Struds displays following window:
While designing, if any check is not satisfied, Struds displays following messages.
MESSAGE 1.
If the Development length check for column bars is not satisfied, Struds displays the above message.
At the top Struds shows the footing group number for which the check has failed. Below this the
required and available development length for column bars embedded in footing is displayed in two
fields. To satisfy the checks, you can use following options.
You can change the grade of concrete and steel and redesign the footing. To do this select
button. Struds then displays following window.
This window shows two drop down menus for grade of concrete and grade of steel. Select the grade
of concrete and steel that you want to apply for design. Click on the OK button. Struds will redesign
the footing and again perform the checks.
You can ask Struds to increase the depth of footing for present group or for all groups.Select on the
FOR ONE GROUP or FOR ALL GROUPS option and click on the button.
You can ignore the check for present or all groups. Select on the FOR ONE GROUP or FOR ALL
GROUPS option and click on the button.
MESSAGE 2.
If the development length check for footing bars is not satisfied, Struds displays above message. At
the top Struds shows the footing group number for which the check has failed. Below this the
required and available development length for footing bars is displayed in two fields. To satisfy the
checks, you can use following options.
You can change the grade of concrete and steel and redesign the footing. To do this select
button. Struds then displays following window.
This window shows two drop down menus for grade of concrete and grade of steel. Select the grade
of concrete and steel that you want to apply for design. Click on the OK button. Struds will redesign
the footing and again perform the checks.
You can ask Struds to increase the size of footing for present group or for all groups. Select on the
FOR ONE GROUP or FOR ALL GROUPS option and click on button. You can ignore the
check for present or all groups. Select on the FOR ONE GROUP or FOR ALL GROUPS option and click
on the button.
11.9.2RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - OPEN
This option allows you to open the designed results if the design has already been done. This option
is inactive if the previous design results are not saved by the user by using DESIGN - SAVE option.
11.9.3RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - SAVE
Select this option to save the design results of the selected structure type. This option will be active
only if you have completed the design process for the selected structure type.
11.9.4RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - GROUPING
This option allows you to group the footings for design. The default groups for footings will be same
as that of columns. It has further three options.
GROUPING - INDIVIDUAL FOOTING

GROUPING - COMBINED FOOTING
GROUPING - PILES
GROUPING - INDIVIDUAL FOOTING
You can group the footings as Individual footings by using this option. When you select this option
Struds displays following screen.
At the right of screen are various options that let you group the footings. There is a drop down menu
that indicates the footing groups present. You should select the footing group number to add
columns or delete columns from it.
GROUP – ADD
Select this button to define a new Footing group. When you select this button, Struds automatically
takes up the id number for new footing group.
GROUP – DELETE
You can use this option to delete a footing group from existing footing groups. When there are
already some footing in this group, Struds will remove these footing from this group.
GROUP - DEL EMPTY GROUP

When you remove all the footing from a group, that group becomes empty. This option allows you
to delete the empty groups. It is necessary that there should not be any empty group while saving
the file. So you should use this option after removing columns from existing groups.
GROUP - AUTO GROUPING
By using this option, Struds will automatically create footing groups.

COLUMN - ADD
By using this option, you can add columns in a group. First select the group in which you want to add
columns from the drop down menu and then select this option. A box cursor appears on the screen.
Select the columns by the cursor one by one to add them in the selected group.
COLUMN - DELETE
This option allows you to remove a column from its group. First select the group from which you
want to remove columns from the drop down menu and then select this option. A box cursor
appears on the screen. Select the columns by the cursor one by one to remove them from the
selected group.
CLOSE
Click on this button to save and come out of the Grouping option.
GROUPING - COMBINED FOOTING
You can group the footings as Combined footings by using this option. This option is working on the
same line of Grouping-Individual Footing. This option allows you to combine two columns into one
footing. The screen, which appears, is shown below:
GROUPING - PILES
By using this option the Footings can be grouped into Pile footings. This option is working on the
same line of Grouping-Individual Footing. When we add the columns to the Pile footing groups then
while going for the footing design it will design them as Pile footing. The following screen is
displayed
11.9.5 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - VIEW DESIGN
This option allows you to visualise the design results of any footing on screen. When you select this
option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the footing of which you want to see the design
results by cursor. Struds displays following window. This window displays the design results of
selected footing in table form. At the top Struds shows the footing group number, the shape type of
footing and the worst load combination for design. Below this the design table is shown.
Isolated Footing:
The design table shows X and Y Dimensions of footing, minimum and total depths, diameter and
number of bars along x and y dimensions of footing.
Combined Footing
The design table shows Length, Width, Left and Right Projections, Footing Slab thickness, diameter
and number of bars along x and y dimensions of footing.
Pile Footing
In case of Pile Footings, the design table shows the loads acting, No of Piles present, Pile Length,
Number of Bulbs, the diameter of the Under reamed bulb, the properties of the material, and the
Ultimate capacity of the pile, under compression, Uplift, and Lateral Thrust.
At the bottom of these window several buttons are present, to modify/view the results displayed in
the tabular format.
All these options have been discussed below:
View Next
Select on this button, to see the design results of the footing for other load combinations. When you
This window displays the list of defined load combinations. Select the load combination for which
you want to see the design results of selected footing. Click on the OK button. Struds will then
display the design results due to this load combination in the table. You can click on the CANCEL
button to close the window without selecting the load combination. This change in table will be for
display purpose only. Whereas the design schedules will be prepared by Struds for worst load
combination.
Change
This option allows you to change the load combination for design results. Struds by default designs
all the footings for worst load combination. In case you want to specify some other load combination
as worst load combination, you can use this option. This change will be reflected in the design
schedules by Struds. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
This window displays the list of defined load combinations. Select the load combination which you
want to apply to the selected footing. Click on the OK button. Struds will then display the design
results due to this load combination in the table. You can click on the CANCEL button to close the
window without selecting the load combination. This change in table will be reflected in design
schedules by Struds.
Units
This option allows you to modify the units for the values displayed in the table. When you select this
This window has two drop down menus. The left drop down menu displays the list of items in the
table for which you can change the units. The right drop down menu displays the list of unit types
available for selected item. Chose the unit you want to apply for the selected item and click on the
CLOSE button. Struds will change and display the values of the item in the table.
Properties
This option allows you to modify the default properties of the selected footing. When you select this
You can then modify the properties or design parameters of the selected footing by using various
options in this window. For detail explanation of this window, refer to the pages for RCC DESIGN -
DESIGN PARAMETERS menu in Footing Design Module.
Redesign
This option allows you to redesign the footing if you change the properties of footing by using any of
following options.
By selecting PROPERTIES button
By changing X and Y dimension of footing in the table.
If you have used any of the above options, first click on the SAVE button and then use this option to
ask Struds to redesign the footing with changed properties.
Recompute Worst Load Combination
If we want to recompute the worst load combination and design the footing for it then we will have
to click the above button.
View Design Pressures
If we want to see the pressures at the bottom of the footing due to different load combinations then
we click the above button. On clicking it we get the following window
Save
Select this option to save any of the changes you have made in the values in the table. You should
also select this option, if you have changed any of the properties of the footing to redesign it.
Close
Select this option to close the window of VIEW DESIGN.
11.9.6RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - VIEW RAFT DESIGN
If we have already added the Raft floor as has been discussed in the Preprocessor, then to design the
raft footing, click on the option RCC Design - Footing - New. On doing this, it first designs the Raft
footing Slab and then the Raft beams. After the design has been done, to view the design results, we
can go to "View Raft Design" option, and then click on the Slab Design to view the "Slab design" of
the raft footing. To see the beam design we click on "View Raft Design" then on "Beam Design". This
will take us to the similar environment to that of normal beam design which we have already
discussed.
To see the complete details of the soil pressures acting on the raft, you can use the option, View Raft
Design - Pressure Report.
11.9.7RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - VIEW RESULTS
This option allows you to see the Strap Beam Design results for a Rectangular/ Trapezoidal combined
footing, having a Strap Beam. To use this option, you must have designed a combined footing (with
Beam) in the building. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select either
of the column for which you have designed combined footing on screen. Struds displays following
window, same as BEAM DESIGN - SELECT GRID
The working of this has been explained in the beam design.
11.9.8RCC DESIGN - FOOTING VIEW PLAN + ELEVATION
This option allows you to visualise the reinforcement plan and cross sections about X and Y axis for
the selected footing. When you select this option, a box cursor appears on the screen. Select the
footing node by the cursor. Struds displays for
• Isolated Footing
• Combined Footing
• Piles
In the left portion of screen, Struds graphically displays the reinforcement plan of footing. The X & Y
dimensions of footing, number of bars along both sides, diameter of bars and spacing between bars
is also displayed in the drawing.
In the right portion of the screen, Struds displays the cross sectional diagrams of the selected footing
about both X and Y axis. The dimensions of footing are also displayed in the drawing.
At the top Struds displays following menu options.

SETTINGS
This option allows you to change the parameters for display on the screen. It further has following
two options.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
This option allows you to put on/off the display of footing bars in the graphics. Click on the
respective options to put on/off the display of bars.
FONT SETTINGS
This option allows you to change the font size and font type of the text matter on screen. For detail
explanation of this option see Appendix.
ZOOM
This option allows you to enlarge the display of graphics on screen. For detail explanation of this
option see Appendix.
PAN
This option allows you to move the display of graphics on screen. For detail explanation of this
option see Appendix.
PRINT
This option allows you to get a print out of the display of graphics on screen. For detail explanation
of this option see Appendix.
CLOSE
This option allows you to close the screen of plan and cross section of the footing.
Isolated Footing
Combine Footing
11.9.9 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - CENTERLINE
CENTERLINE - DRAW CENTERLINE

CENTERLINE - CHANGE REFERENCE
CENTERLINE - DISPLAY SETTINGS
11.9.9.1 CENTERLINE - DRAW CENTERLINE
This option allows you to get the center line diagram of footings. When you select this option, Struds
displays following screen.
Struds displays the foundation plan on the screen showing the pit size for footings, footing geometry
in plan, the footing numbers, footing group numbers, the reinforcement along both axes and the
center line dimensions. You can put on/off the display of the entities in this diagram by selecting
CENTERLINE - DISPLAY SETTINGS options.
11.9.9.2 CENTERLINE - CHANGE REFERENCE
This option allows you to change the origin for computing the center line dimensions of footings.
This window has two fields for X and Y offset by which you can shift the origin /reference point. Type
the value of X and Y distance by which you want to shift the origin and click on OK button. Struds will
recalculate the centre line dimensions of all the columns/footings and display them on the screen.
11.9.9.3 CENTERLINE - DISPLAY SETTINGS
This option allows you to put on/off the display of entities in the centre line diagram.
FOOTINGS
You can put on/off the display of footings in the centre line diagram by selecting this option. The
status of display on is indicated by the presence of check mark before the option. This is a toggle
options, hence you can put on/off the display by alternatively clicking on it.
FOOTING GROUPS
You can put on/off the display of footing group numbers in the centre line diagram by selecting this
option. The status of display on is indicated by the presence of check mark before the option. This is
a toggle options, hence you can put on/off the display by alternatively clicking on it.
FOOTING BAR-X
You can put on/off the display of footing bars along X axis in the centre line diagram by selecting this
FOOTING BAR-Y
You can put on/off the display of footing bars along Y axis in the centre line diagram by selecting this
11.9.10 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - REPORTS
This option allows you to get the text reports for design results of the footings. This has following
options.
REPORT - SCHEDULE
REPORT - QUANTITY
REPORT - DETAIL REPORT
11.9.10.1 REPORT - SCHEDULE

Select this option, to see the design schedule of footings. Struds displays a text report as shown
below.
Struds shows the results of design for all footings in table format. This schedule is prepared for the
worst load combination. For the menu options of Print, Settings, Page Control etc., refer to
Appendix.
11.9.10.2 REPORT - QUANTITY
Select this option, to see the quantities of concrete and steel for all the footings after design. Struds
displays a text report as shown below.
Struds shows the concrete and steel quantity for all footings in table format. For the menu options of
Print, Settings, Page Control etc., refer to Appendix.
11.9.10.3 REPORT - DETAIL REPORT
Select this option, to see the report for design details of all the columns due to worst load
combination. Struds displays a text report as shown below.
11.9.11 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - HTML REPORTS
This option is used to display all the footing reports, in the HTML format. The following reports can
be generated in the HTML format:
HTML REPORTS - SCHEDULE

HTML REPORTS - DETAIL DESIGN
HTML REPORTS - DETAIL REPORT
HTML REPORTS - LOAD REPORT
11.9.11.1 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - HTML REPORTS - SCHEDULE
This report displays the details of the footing schedule, in the HTML format.
FOOTING DESIGN SCHEDULE
(As Per IS 456 : 2000)

Schedule of Footings -Trapezoidal Footings:
Footing Column Concrete Steel PCC Size Footing Size Minimum Total Steel
Group Nos Grade Grade || to X || to Y || to X || to Y Depth (d) Depth (D) || to X (mm) || to Y (mm)
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
FG1 C2 M20 Fe415 1350 x 1400 1050 x 1100 150 225 6 - #10 6 - #10
FG2 C3 M20 Fe415 1350 x 1400 1050 x 1100 150 225 6 - #10 6 - #10
FG3 C4 M20 Fe415 1350 x 1400 1050 x 1100 150 225 6 - #10 6 - #10
FG4 C5 M20 Fe415 1350 x 1400 1050 x 1100 150 225 6 - #10 6 - #10
FG5 C6 M20 Fe415 1350 x 1400 1050 x 1100 150 225 6 - #10 6 - #10
FG6 C7 M20 Fe415 1350 x 1400 1050 x 1100 150 225 6 - #10 6 - #10
FG7 C8 M20 Fe415 1350 x 1400 1050 x 1100 150 225 6 - #10 6 - #10
FG8 C9 M20 Fe415 1350 x 1400 1050 x 1100 150 225 6 - #10 6 - #10
FG9 C10 M20 Fe415 1350 x 1400 1050 x 1100 150 225 6 - #10 6 - #10
FG10 C11 M20 Fe415 1350 x 1400 1050 x 1100 150 225 6 - #10 6 - #10
11.9.11.2 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - HTML REPORTS - DETAIL DESIGN
PROJECT : D.I.E.T. AT BHUJ - KACHCHH.

PLAN : DIETB
JOB NO. : 282 REF. NO. : SA/282/04
DATE : 12/11/04 TIME : 14:29:10
Building Version : 1.410 Struds Version : 2005
Foundation Design Detail Report :
(Design by Limit State Method as per IS 456 : 2000)

Standard Conventions:
Design of FG1
Size of col./ped, (l x b) = 0.375 x 0.700 m
SBC of soil = 250.00 KN/m²
SBC incr.factor = 1.250
SBC of soil = 312.50 KN/m²
fck = 20.00 Newton/mm²
fy = 415.00 Newton/mm²
Load combination = 1.50DL + 1.50EQL Y-
Loads On Footing
Factored axial load on column,(P) = 449.47 KN
Working axial load on column,(Pw) = 299.65 KN (From analysis results)
Self Weight of footing assumed = 10.00 % of Pw = 29.96 KN
Total load,(P1) = 329.61 KN
BM @ x-x,(WMx) = 33.28 KN-m
BM @ y-y,(WMy) = 5.48 KN-m
Factored BM @ x-x,(Mx) = 49.92 KN-m
Factored BM @ y-y,(My) = 8.22 KN-m
In Loadcombination with DL load case :

If load factor for DL loadcase is less than 1.0,this factor will be retained while computing the
working load.
Footing Area
Area for axial load,(Af) = P1/SBC = 329.61 / 312.50 = 1.055 m²
Eccentricity @ x-x,(ex) = WMx/P = 0.1111 m
= 0.111 m
Eccentricity @ y-y,(ey) = WMy/P = 0.0183 m
= 0.018 m
Footing sizeY,(B) = (0.5 x (b-l))
+ (sqrt((((0.5 x (b-l)) x (0.5 x (b-l)))+Af)))
= 1.202 m
Footing sizeX,(L) = Af/B = 0.877 m
Modified area for Mx,(Afx) = (P/SBC) x (1 + 6.ex/B)
= (329.61/312.50) x (1 + 6 x 0.1111/1.202 )
= 1.639 m²
Modified area for My,(Afy) = (P/SBC) x (1 + 6.ey/L)
= (329.61/312.50) x (1 + 6 x 0.0183/0.877 )
= 1.187 m²
Size,(L x B) = 1.175 x 1.500 m
Area provided ,(Ap) = 1.762 m² Af.
SBC Check:
Upward pressure due to axial load,(Pr1w) = P / (L x B) = 170.01 KN/m²
Upward pressure due to Mx,(Pr2w) = Mx / (L x B x B/6) = 75.5245 KN/m²
Upward pressure due to My,(Pr3w) = My / (B x L x L/6) = 15.8706 KN/m²
Maximum upward pressure,(UpMaxw) = Pr1w + Pr2w + Pr3w = 261.41 KN/m²
Minimum upward pressure,(UpMinw) = Pr1w - Pr2w - Pr3w = 78.62 KN/m²
UpMaxw(261.41 KN/m²) < SBC (312.50 KN/m>
Pressures for Different Load Combinations :
Design Pressures(kN/m²) Working Pressures(kN/m²)
Load Combination
Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum
1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 358.55 197.86 239.03 131.91

1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 EQL X+ 260.69 178.67 217.24 148.89
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 EQL X- 319.13 131.76 265.94 109.80
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 EQL Y+ 240.23 197.83 200.19 164.85
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 EQL Y- 333.44 118.75 277.87 98.96
1.50 DL + 1.50 EQL X+ 296.90 197.10 197.93 131.40
1.50 DL + 1.50 EQL X- 374.22 134.19 249.48 89.46
1.50 DL + 1.50 EQL Y+ 275.60 216.77 183.73 144.51
1.50 DL + 1.50 EQL Y- 392.11 117.93 261.41 78.62
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 WL X+ 268.20 174.57 223.50 145.47
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 WL X- 306.98 140.44 255.82 117.03
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 WL Y+ 275.35 168.58 229.46 140.49
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 WL Y- 297.02 149.28 247.52 124.40
1.50 DL + 1.50 WL X+ 306.28 191.97 204.19 127.98
1.50 DL + 1.50 WL X- 359.03 145.04 239.36 96.69
1.50 DL + 1.50 WL Y+ 319.50 180.21 213.00 120.14
1.50 DL + 1.50 WL Y- 346.58 156.08 231.06 104.06
0.90 DL + 1.50 EQL X+ 182.99 110.52 178.95 116.97
0.90 DL + 1.50 EQL X- 240.68 67.25 227.22 78.30
0.90 DL + 1.50 EQL Y+ 180.77 111.12 163.80 131.03
0.90 DL + 1.50 EQL Y- 258.57 50.99 239.15 67.46
0.90 DL + 1.50 WL X+ 192.38 105.40 185.20 113.55
0.90 DL + 1.50 WL X- 225.49 78.10 217.10 85.53
0.90 DL + 1.50 WL Y+ 185.95 113.28 190.74 108.99
0.90 DL + 1.50 WL Y- 213.04 89.15 208.80 92.90
Bending Moment Calculations :
&nbspAs per IS 456: 2000 /Clause 34.2.3.2,critical section for checking bending
moment
in the design of an isolated concrete footing which supports a column shall be
a section located at the face of the column or pedestal.
Upward pressure due to axial
= P / (L x B) = 255.02 KN/m²
load,(Pr1)
Upward pressure due to Mx,(Pr2) = Mx / (L x B x B/6) = 113.2868 KN/m²
Upward pressure due to My,(Pr3) = My / (B x L x L/6) = 23.8059 KN/m²
Maximum upward pressure,(UpMax) = Pr1 + Pr2 + Pr3 = 392.11 KN/m²
Minimum upward pressure,(UpMin) = Pr1 - Pr2 - Pr3 = 117.93 KN/m²
Projection-X,(xProj) = (L - l)/2
= (1.175 - 0.375)/2
= 0.400 m
Critical upward pressure,(UpCr) = UpMin + (L - xProj) x ((UpMax - UpMin)/L)

= 117.93 + (1.175 - 0.400) x ((392.11 - 117.93)/1.175)
= 298.77 KN/m²
Upward pressure area,(UpPrArea) = xProj x (UpCr + UpMax)/2

= 0.400 x (298.77+ 392.11)/2
= 138.18 KN/m
CG distance from column

= xProj x (UpCr + (2 x UpMax))
face,(CGDist)
/(3 x (UpCr + UpMax))
= 0.400 x (298.77 + 2 x 392.11)
/ (3 x (298.77 + 392.11))
= 0.209 m
Design BMx,(MuX) = UpPrArea x CGDist x B

= 138.18 x 0.209 x 1.500
= 43.32 KN-m
Projection-Y,(yProj) = (B - b)/2
= (1.500 - 0.700)/2
= 0.400 m
Critical upward pressure,(UpCr) = UpMin + (L - yProj) x ((UpMax - UpMin)/L)

= 117.93 + (1.500 - 0.400) x ((392.11 - 117.93)/1.500)
= 319.00 KN/m²
Upward pressure area,(UpPrArea) = yProj x (UpCr + UpMax)/2

= 0.400 x (319.00+ 392.11)/2
= 142.22 KN/m
CG distance from column

= yProj x (UpCr + (2 x UpMax))
face,(CGDist)
/(3 x (UpCr + UpMax))
= 0.400 x (319.00 + 2 x 392.11) / (3 x (319.00 +
392.11))
= 0.207 m
Design BMy,(MuY) = UpPrArea x CGDist x L

= 142.22 x 0.207 x 1.175
= 34.57 KN-m
Depth Calculations :
Depth required for punching shear :
As per IS : 456 - 2000 - Clause 31.6.3.1,the calculated shear stress at the
critical section shall not exceed ks x TauC
where,
ks = 0.5 + betaC, but not greater than 1,betaC being the ratio of
short side to the long side of column, and
TauC = 0.25 x sqrt(fck )in limit state method of design.
Depth required for punching shear is calculated by equating the actual stress
to permissible stress and by solving the resulting quadratic equation.
Depth assumed,(D) = 0.700 m

Bottom cover = 0.050 m
Effective Depth Calculation :
Effective depth,(deffX) = 0.645 m
Effective depth,(deffY) = 0.635 m
Effective depth,(deff) = 0.645 m
Depth || to X axis at critical section,(dPunchX) = 0.645 m
Depth || to Y axis at critical section,(dPunchY) = 0.645 m
Resisting area || to X axis,(ArX) = dPunchX x 2 x (l + deff)

= 0.645 x 2 x (0.375 + 0.645)
= 1.316 m²
Resisting area || to Y axis,(ArY) = dPunchY x 2 x (b + deff)

= 0.645 x 2 x (0.700 + 0.645)
= 1.735 m²
Resisting area,(Ar) = ArX + ArY

= 3.051 m²
Shear force,(V) = (P / Ap) x (Ap -((l + deff) x (b + deff)))
= (449.47 / 1.762) x (1.762 - (1.020 x 1.345))
= 99.61 KN
Actual shear stress = V / Ar

= 99.61 / 3.051
= 32.65 KN/m²
Permissible shear stress = 0.25 x sqrt(fck) x ks

ks = 0.5 + betaC
betaC = short column side/ long column side
= 0.375 / 0.700 = 0.536
ks = 0.5 + 0.536 = 1.036 1 ,ks = 1
Permissible shear stress = 0.25 x 4.4721 x 1.000

= 1.118 N/mm²
= 1118.03 KN/m²
Actual shear stress < Permissible shear stress.>
&nbspHence,Safe in punching shear.
Calculation Of Moment Of Resistance :
Total depth,(D) = 0.700 m
Minimum depth,(Dmin) = 0.150 m
For (Fe415),k = 0.479
R = 0.36 x fck x k x (1 - 0.42 x k)
= 0.36 x 20.000 x 0.479 x (1 - 0.42 x 0.479)
= 2.756
Moment of resistanceX = R x width at NA x deffX x deffX

= 2.756 x 1.197 x 0.645 x 0.645
= 1347.62 KN-m 43.32 KN-m
Moment of resistance Y = R x width at NA x deffY x deffY

= 2.756 x 0.873 x 0.635 x 0.635
= 862.88 KN-m 34.57 KN-m
Steel Calculations :
For MuX :
Cross sectional area,(csArea) = width at NA x deffX
= 1.197 x 0.645
= 0.772 m²
val = 1 - [(4.6 x MuX)/(fck x B x deffX²)]
Required steel area,(AstX) = [0.05 x (1 - sqrt(val))] x csArea/(fy/fck)
= 0.000233 m²
= 233 mm²
Required steel pt. = 0.03020 %
< minimum steel pt.(min-pt="0.120" %)>
Required steel area,(AstX) = min-pt x csArea/100
= 0.120 x 0.772/100
= 0.000926 m²
= 926 mm²
Provide 10 Tor 14 nos.(1100 mm²)

Spacing = (L - dia. - (2 x end cover))/(no - 1)
= (1.500 - 0.010 - (2 x 0.050))/(14 - 1)
= 0.107 m < maximum spacing(0.200 m)>
For MuY :
Cross sectional area,(csArea) = width at NA x deffY
= 0.873 x 0.635
= 0.554 m²
val = 1 - [(4.6 x MuY)/(fck x B x deffY²)]
Required steel area,(AstY) = [0.05 x (1 - sqrt(val))] x csArea/(fy/fck)
= 0.000185 m²
= 185 mm²
Required steel pt. = 0.03333 %
< minimum steel pt.(min-pt="0.120" %)>
Required steel area,(AstY) = min-pt x csArea/100
= 0.120 x 0.554/100
= 0.000665 m²
= 665 mm²
Provide 10 Tor 10 nos.(785 mm²)

Spacing = (B - dia. - (2 x end cover))/(no - 1)
= (1.175 - 0.010 - (2 x 0.050))/(10 - 1)
= 0.118 m < maximum spacing(0.200 m)>
Check For One Way Shear :
As per IS 456: 2000 /Clause 33.2.4.1,the critical section for this
condition shall be assumed as a vertical section located at a distance equal to the effective
depth
of the footing from the face of the column or pedestal.
For X-axis :
Projection-X,(proj) = (L - l)/2 - deffX
= (1.175 - 0.375)/2 - 0.645
= -0.245 m
As the critical section for one way shear falls outside

the footing,oneway shear check is not required to be taken in this direction.
For Y-axis :
Projection-Y,(proj) = (B - b)/2 - deffY
= (1.500 - 0.700)/2 - 0.635
= -0.235 m
As the critical section for one way shear falls outside

the footing,oneway shear check is not required to be taken in this direction.
Check For Bearing :
As per IS 456: 2000 /Clause 34.4, the bearing pressure on the loaded area shall not exceed
the permissible bearing stress in direct compression multiplied by a value
equal to sqrt(A1/A2), but not greater than 2.
Supporting area for bearing of footing,(A1) = (l + (4 x D))*(b + (4 x D))
= (0.375 + (4 x 0.700)) x
(0.700 + (4 x 0.700))
= 11.112 m² footing area(1.762 m²)
= 1.762 m²
Loaded area at the column base,(A2) = 0.262 m²
sqrt(A1/A2) = sqrt(1.762/0.262) = 2.591 2
= 2.000
Actual bearing stress = P/A2
= 449.47/0.262
= 1712.27 KN/m²
Permissible bearing stress = 0.45 x fck x sqrt(A1/A2)
= 0.25 x 20.00 x 2.000
= 18.000 N/mm²
= 18000.00 KN/m²
Actual bearing stress < Permissible bearing strees.>
Hence, Safe in bearing.
Check For Sliding Along X axis :
Load combination = 0.90DL + 1.50WL X-
Self wt. of footing = 20.18 KN

Stabilizing force,(W) = 287.72 KN
Horizontal force,(H) = 11.71 KN
Soil resistance,(S) = 168.74 KN H
Hence, check for sliding is not required.
Check For Sliding Along Y axis :
Load combination = 0.90DL + 1.50EQL Y-
Self wt. of footing = 20.18 KN

Stabilizing force,(W) = 292.98 KN
Horizontal force,(H) = 33.51 KN
Soil resistance,(S) = 121.16 KN H
Hence, check for sliding is not required.
Bond Check Calculations For Footing Bars

As Per I.S 456 : 2000, Clause 26.2.1,The Required Development Length, Ld is given as
Ld = (phi * sigmaS) / (4 * toubd)
where,
phi = Nominal diameter of the footing bar in X or Y direction,
= Stress in the bar at the section considered, at design load
sigmaS
and
= Design bond stress, as specified in Clause 26.2.2.1 of I.S 456 :
toubd
2000
Hence, LdX = (10 * 0.87 * 415.00) / (4 * 1.89)
= 478.085 mm
LdY = (10 * 0.87 * 415.00) / (4 * 1.89)
= 478.085 mm
Available Development
= (Fd - Cd) / 2 - End Cover + End Anchorages(If required)
Length
Where,
Fd = Footing size in X / Ydirection
Cd = Column size in X / Y direction
End Anchorage = 4 * phi, for a L hook
= 8 * phi, for a 90 degrees bend
In X direction = (1.175 - 0.375) * 0.5 - 0.050 + 0.130

= 480.000 mm
In Y direction = (1.500 - 0.700) * 0.5 - 0.050 + 0.130
= 480.000 mm
Hence, the Bond check for footing bars is satisfied
Bond Check Calculations For Column Bars in Tension

Ld = (phi. sigmaS) / (4 * toubd)
where, other terms remaining same,
phi = Dia of column bars
toubd = Design bond stress in Tension for column bars
Diameter of Column bar d1 = 12 mm
Required Development Length for 'd1' = (12 * 0.87 * 415.00) / (4 * 1.89)
= 574 mm
Diameter of Column bar d2 = 16 mm
= 765 mm
Available development length = Min(deffx/deffy) + Hproj
Where,
Hproj = Horizontal projection of columns bars in footing
= Min(645.000 / 635.000) + 300.000
= 935.000 mm
Hence, the Bond check for column bars in tension is satisfied
Bond Check Calculations For Column Bars in Compression

Required Development Length For Column Bars
Ld = (phi. sigmaS) / (4 * toubd)
where, other terms remaining same,
phi = Dia of column bars
toubd = Design bond stress in compression for column bars
Here,
Diameter of Column bar 'd1' = 12 mm
= 459 mm
Diameter of Column bar 'd2' = 16 mm
= 612 mm
Available Development length = Min(deffx/deffy)
= Min(645.000 / 635.000)
= 635 mm
Hence, the Bond check for column bars in compression is satisfied
Summary :
Provide isolated sloped footing of size
1.175 x 1.500 x 0.700 / 0.150 m
Provide 10 Tor 14 nos along the length of footing.
Provide 10 Tor 10 nos along the width of footing.
(Bars should be bent and carried to top.)
11.9.11.3 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - HTML REPORT - DETAIL REPORT
PROJECT : college bld

PLAN : 3sample
DATE : 11/22/04 TIME : 12:26:12
FOOTING DESIGN SCHEDULE
(As Per IS 456 : 2000)

Schedule of Footings -Trapezoidal Footings:
Footing Column Concrete Steel Axial load Mx My PCC Size Footing Minimum Total Steel Load
Group Nos Grade Grade (KN) (KN-m) (KN-m) || to X || Size Depth (d) Depth || to X || to Y Combination
to Y || to X || (mm) (D) (mm) (mm)
(mm) to Y (mm)
(mm)
FG1 1350 x 1050 x 7- 7- 1.50 DL +

C1
M20 Fe415 58.674 8.514 0.298 1400 1100 150 525 #10 #10 1.50 LL
FG2 1350 x 1050 x 7- 7- 1.50 DL +
C2
M20 Fe415 79.760 9.476 0.230 1400 1100 150 525 #10 #10 1.50 LL
FG3 1350 x 1050 x 7- 7- 1.50 DL +
C3
M20 Fe415 80.045 9.974 0.090 1400 1100 150 525 #10 #10 1.50 LL
FG4 1350 x 1050 x 7- 7- 1.50 DL +
C4
M20 Fe415 81.466 10.188 0.022 1400 1100 150 525 #10 #10 1.50 LL
FG5 1350 x 1050 x 7- 7- 1.50 DL +
C5
M20 Fe415 80.304 10.224 0.008 1400 1100 150 525 #10 #10 1.50 LL
FG6 1350 x 1050 x 7- 7- 1.50 DL +
C6
M20 Fe415 80.305 10.225 0.010 1400 1100 150 525 #10 #10 1.50 LL
FG7 1350 x 1050 x 7- 7- 1.50 DL +
C7
M20 Fe415 81.514 10.228 0.000 1400 1100 150 525 #10 #10 1.50 LL
FG8 1350 x 1050 x 7- 7- 1.50 DL +
C8
M20 Fe415 80.305 10.225 0.010 1400 1100 150 525 #10 #10 1.50 LL
FG9 1350 x 1050 x 7- 7- 1.50 DL +
C9
M20 Fe415 80.304 10.224 0.008 1400 1100 150 525 #10 #10 1.50 LL
11.9.11.4 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - HTML REPORT - LOAD REPORT
Footing Loads Report

Footing Load Combination Working Loads Factored Loads
Group P(KN) Mx(KN-m) My(KN-m) P(KN) Mx(KN-m) My(KN-m)
FG1 1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 39.116 5.676 0.199 58.674 8.514 0.298
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 EQL X+ 39.116 5.676 0.199 46.939 6. 811 0.238
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 EQL X- 39.116 5.676 0.199 46.939 6. 811 0.238
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 EQL Y+ 39.116 5.676 0.199 46.939 6. 811 0.238
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 EQL Y- 39.116 5.676 0.199 46.939 6. 811 0.238
1.50 DL + 1.50 EQL X+ 30.984 4.203 0.120 46.476 6. 304 0.180
1.50 DL + 1.50 EQL X- 30.984 4.203 0.120 46.476 6. 304 0.180
1.50 DL + 1.50 EQL Y+ 30.984 4.203 0.120 46.476 6. 304 0.180
1.50 DL + 1.50 EQL Y- 30.984 4.203 0.120 46.476 6. 304 0.180
0.90 DL + 1.50 EQL X+ 27.886 3.782 0.108 27.886 3. 782 0.108
0.90 DL + 1.50 EQL X- 27.886 3.782 0.108 27.886 3. 782 0.108
0.90 DL + 1.50 EQL Y+ 27.886 3.782 0.108 27.886 3. 782 0.108
0.90 DL + 1.50 EQL Y- 27.886 3.782 0.108 27.886 3. 782 0.108
FG2 1.50 DL + 1.50 LL 53.173 6.317 0.153 79.760 9.476 0.230
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 EQL X+ 53.173 6.317 0.153 63.808 7. 581 0.184
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 EQL X- 53.173 6.317 0.153 63.808 7. 581 0.184
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 EQL Y+ 53.173 6.317 0.153 63.808 7. 581 0.184
1.20 DL + 1.20 LL + 1.20 EQL Y- 53.173 6.317 0.153 63.808 7. 581 0.184
1.50 DL + 1.50 EQL X+ 39.953 4.562 0.073 59.930 6. 842 0.110
1.50 DL + 1.50 EQL X- 39.953 4.562 0.073 59.930 6. 842 0.110
1.50 DL + 1.50 EQL Y+ 39.953 4.562 0.073 59.930 6. 842 0.110
1.50 DL + 1.50 EQL Y- 39.953 4.562 0.073 59.930 6. 842 0.110
0.90 DL + 1.50 EQL X+ 35.958 4.105 0.066 35.958 4. 105 0.066
0.90 DL + 1.50 EQL X- 35.958 4.105 0.066 35.958 4. 105 0.066
0.90 DL + 1.50 EQL Y+ 35.958 4.105 0.066 35.958 4. 105 0.066
0.90 DL + 1.50 EQL Y- 35.958 4.105 0.066 35.958 4. 105 0.066
11.9.12 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - DRAFTING
This option is used to create working drawings for the design details of all the footings. The drawings
can be generated using, either the DXF format, or the STF format.
The following sub options are available for generating the drawings:
DRAFTING - CREATE DXF CENTERLINE

DRAFTING - CREATE DXF SECTIONS
DRAFTING - CREATE STF CENTERLINE
DRAFTING - CREATE STF SECTIONS
11.9.12.1 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - DRAFTING - CREATE DXF CENTERLINE
This option is used to generate the centerline diagram of the footings, along with the Footing
Schedule, in the DXF format. On using this option, a dialog box showing the details of the location of
the DXF drawing is displayed. The drawing is created in the same working folder, where your BLD
file, is stored.
The DXF file generated can then be opened in AUTOCAD, as shown below.
11.9.12.2 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - DRAFTING - CREATE DXF SECTIONS
This option is used to generate the sectional details of the footings, in the DXF format. On using this
option, a dialog box showing the details of the location of the DXF drawing is displayed. The drawing
is created in the same working folder, where your BLD file, is stored.
The DXF file generated can then be opened in AUTOCAD, as shown below.
11.9.12.3 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - DRAFTING - CREATE STF CENTERLINE

After selecting the proper Paper size and after specifying the Scale, we click on Ok. So it will generate
all the drawing templates, which have an extension *.stf. We can open in this Template file
AutoCAD.
11.9.12.4 RCC DESIGN - FOOTING - CREATE STF SECTIONS
After selecting the proper Paper size and after specifying the Scale, we click on Ok. So it will generate
all the drawing templates, which have an extension *.stf We can open in this Template file AutoCAD.
11.10 .1 RCC Design – Inclined Members – New
Using this option one can design all the inclined members in the building file.
3D element will be designed as element with axial load considering the biaxial moments
acting on it. It is divided in 10 numbers of divisions and the shear force and bending
moment in each part is calculated. Accordingly the main and shear reinforcement is
provided.
11.10.2 RCC Design – Inclined Members – Open
Using this option one can open the already saved design for inclined members.
11.10.3 RCC Design – Inclined Members – Save
Using this option user can save the design of inclined members.
RCC Design – Inclined Members – HTML Reports
Using this option one can open the following reports in HTML format related to inclined
member design.
a) Detail report
b) Schedule
c) Load report
Under detail report all the calculations in detail are given.

Under schedule the sizes and steel in short are given in table format.
Under load report the axial loads, Moments in both directions and shear forces in both
directions in every segment of the member is given for every load combinations.
11.11.1 RCC DESIGN – DESIGN DATA REPORT
This gives the design parameters set for designing the structure. Normally required for
submitting with design for approval.
Design Data Report :
Footing Data:
Soil Parameters :
SBC of soil = 250.00 kN/m²
SBC Increment Factor for Seismic Load = 1.250

SBC Increment Factor for Wind Load = 1.250
Angle of friction,(phi) = 30.00 degrees
Cohesion = 60.00
Permissible factor of safty = 1.400
Depth From Ground = 2000 mm
fck = 20.00 N/mm²
fy = 415.00 N/mm²
Footing Parameters :
Minimum steel Percentage = 0.12
Minimum spacing between bars = 100 mm
Maximum spacing between bars = 200 mm
Diameters of selected bars = 10 mm , 12 mm .
Bottom Cover = 50 mm
End Cover = 50 mm
Minimum Footing Depth = 150 mm
Top Offset = 50 mm
Bottom PCCOffset = 150 mm
Bottom PCCDepth = 150 mm
Pedestal Offset = 150 mm
Pedestal Depth = 150 mm
Size RoundingFactor = 25 mm
Depth RoundingFactor = 25 mm
Column Data:
fck = 20.00 N/mm²
fy = 415.00 N/mm²
fy - Stirrups = 415.00 N/mm²
Column Parameters :
Effective Length Factor (X - Axis) = 1.00
Effective Length Factor (Y - Axis) = 1.00
Minimum Eccentricity @ X-Axis = 20 mm
Minimum Eccentricity @ Y-Axis = 20 mm
Clear Cover = 40 mm
Design Considerations :
Design is done as per IS 456.
IS 13920 provisions are not considered for detailing.
Live Load reduction is not considered.
Minimum steel percentage is based on provided section.
Reinforcement Details :
Steel Ratio(AstX/AstY) = 1.00
ReinForcement Placing (on two sides or on four sides) = 2
Minimum steel Percentage = 0.80
Maximum steel Percentage = 2.00
Minimum spacing between main bars = 25 mm
Maximum spacing between main bars = 300 mm
Minimum spacing between Stirrups = 150 mm
Diameters of selected bars =
Slab Data:
RCC Grade = M20
Main Steel Grade = Fe415

Distribution Steel Grade = Fe415
Slab Parameters :
Effective Cover = 25 mm
Minimum spacing between Main bars = 75 mm
Maximum spacing between Main bars = 200 mm
Minimum spacing between Dist.bars = 75 mm
Maximum spacing between Dist.bars = 300 mm
Maximum Main/Dist. bar Diameter = 32 mm
Minimum Main bar Diameter = 8 mm
Minimum Dist.bar Diameter = 8 mm
Maximum Dimension to be used for Trapizoidal Slab = Average of two parellel sides
Use Bent-up bars for steel detailing.
Beam Data:
Shear Design Data :

Minimun Stirrup Dia = 8 mm
Stirrup Legs =2
Minimum Stirrups Spacing = 100 mm
Stirrups Steel Grade Name = Fe415
Effect of Concrete in shear considered
Beam Covers :
Tension Cover = 33 mm
Compression Cover = 33 mm
Side Cover = 25 mm
Beam sections are designed as Doubly Reinforced Section
Main Bars Detailing Straight + Curtailed
Detailing provision As per IS 13920 not followed
End Moments are calcultaed at c/c distance of the beam span for
design
Torsion Moments are considered in beam design
Anchor bar Dia = 8 mm
Main Steel Grade = Fe415
No. of division of the beam = 10
Max. Aggregate size = 20
11.12 RCC DESIGN - COST
This option allows you to set the cost of various items. This will be reflected in summary of
quantity reports. After selecting this option you will get following dialog box.
For all values you have edit boxes only for materials you have drop down selection boxes.
After setting the grades and diameters click on define button to select the particular option.
On clicking OK button the costs will be saved. On clicking Cancel the command will be
stopped.
11.13 RCC DESIGN - DISPLAY SETTINGS
On clicking this option, you get the dialog box, as displayed below:
In this, you have checkboxes pertaining to the various entities. If you check the checkbox, pertaining
to any one of them, that entity would be displayed on screen.
11.14 RCC DESIGN - FONT SETTINGS
This option allows you to control the display of size and style of the fonts for the text appearing on
screen.
Select the text for entities like Nodes, Elements, Slabs, Slab Properties, Loads and Sections from the
menu. Struds then displays the standard windows options for fonts. You can change the font size,
type etc. as per your requirement.
11.15 RCC DESIGN - DRAWING SETTINGS
User interactive detailing in DXF output is introduced using drawing settings option its use is as given
below.
Above dialogue box is having five objects viz. Slab, Beam, Column, Shear Wall, Footing
This Dlg. Box basically having two parts 1] Layer Specification 2] Dimension Specification
1] Layer Specification
a) Drawing Object
In this Combo Box you have to select drawing object i.e. PLAN OR SECTION
b) Default Color Setting
This is the Check Box Because of which u can decide Color setting what you want or Default Color
setting stored in software and after clicking on Create Library Button you will get expected result
c) Default Font Setting
This is the Check Box Because of which u can decide Font setting what you want or Default Color
setting stored in software and after clicking on Create Library Button you will get expected result
d) List Control Dialogue Box
In this there are No. of columns because of which you can get Color, Font Height, Font Style, Line
Type, Layer ON/OFF for respective Layer.
These options you can handle from respective Combo Box which are bellow the List Control.
2] Dimension Specification
Because of this you can make dimension arrow, text alignment as per your requirement and for that
what type data is required that you have to enter into Combo box. Near to that we provide
diagrammatical representation of that.
12. STEEL DESIGN
This mode is invigorated, if you want to perform the steel design, of trusses, as well as steel beams,
you can set the current mode, to STEEL DESIGN, using the option MODE.
Once this mode has been set as the current mode, all the menu options, under this will be activated.
12.1 STEEL DESIGN - PLANE TRUSS - SELECT
Using this option, If you have multiple trusses created, in a single BLD file, you can select the truss,
which you would like to design.
On clicking this option, Struds displays the dialog box, as shown below.
Towards the top of this dialog box. Struds displays a list of all the trusses present in the BLD file. You
can select, any one of them, to proceed to its design.
12.2 TRUSS DESIGN - Design Parameters
Design Parameters:
On clicking it we get the following dialog box.
In the above dialog box we have to specify the Effective length factor along x and y, Permissible
deflection along x and y and the Stress increase Factor.
We also have to check on the Steel sections. The ticked steel sections will be considered in the
design if the already attached section fails during design. Here we check on only those sections,
which we want to be considered for design.
12.3 TRUSS DESIGN - Load Combination
Load Combination:
This option displays the following dialog box
Select the desired Load Combination and change the Factors (if required)
12.4 TRUSS DESIGN - Design Truss

DESIGN TRUSS >> NEW
Struds provides two methods of design viz. Batch wise and Interactive.
In the Batch wise method, the software will design all the elements and show the results in batch
wise, like Rafter, Main Tie, and Strut etc. Here for any group the software will give the safest section.
In the interactive method of design the Software will give the optimum design for each element
depending on the Axial or Tensile forces acting on it.
Design Truss>>New>>Batch
After we click on "Batch" the design proceeds and then if any element fails during design, we get the
following Dialog box.
The above dialog Box shows the element numbers, which fails with the Predefined section. To see
the list of the failed elements, we click on the drop down menu .It also shows the section ID which
was attached to it, its compression capacity and Tension capacity and the axial forces acting on it.
The above dialog box gives us only the list of the failed elements. To see the batch wise Design we
click on "Go to element Design".
Design Truss>>New>>Interactive
On clicking Interactive, the design proceeds and then we get the following dialog box.
The above dialog box shows the elements that failed during design with the predefined section.
To see the element design we click on "Go to element Design".
DESIGN TRUSS >> OPEN
This option allows us to open a earlier design.
DESIGN TRUSS >> SAVE
This option allows us to save the Truss design
12.5 TRUSS DESIGN - Go To Element Design

When the Truss is designed by Design Truss>>New>>Batch
View Design>>Group
In the above menu we click on 'group'. On clicking it we get the following dialog box
In the above dialog Box we just have to select the Batch to view the design results. For example, if
we click on Rafter, then it will show the section of the Rafter Group.
If you want the report on the Design, click on Report>>Design Details/Element Details. Struds
Provides HTML reports on the above. You can also see the Batch wise design element wise. Here the
design is done batch wise but you can see the design of each element of the group. Say elements
from 1 to 10 are main rafters .So you can see each element although it will give same section.
When the Truss is designed by Design Truss>>New>>Interactive
The above menu is same only the "Group" is inactive here.
View Design>>Individual
To see the Individual design results, we click on 'Individual' in the above menu. On clicking it we get
the following dialog box.
In the following dialog box we can choose the element numbers from the drop down menu. For each
element it will also show the Length of the element, design axial compression or Tension, the group
to which that particular element lies, and all the configuration of the sections that we had chosen
earlier.
Against each section it will show its compressive capacity and tensile capacity, its weight and the
weld length required by it and also the status of the design.
If we want to edit the design, say we want to edit the design for the Double Angle, then we click on
the radio button corresponding to double angle and then click on Modify. On clicking "Modify" we
get the following dialog box.
Here we can select the alternative section that we would like to provide .If the selected section is
insufficient, then it will give a message "Selected section is insufficient, select a new section".
If the selected section is sufficient, then it will be accepted.
Inquire
If you want to inquire about any element, Click on it and select the element. Struds shows the detail
of that element as shown below
Report
If you want the report on the Design, click on it. Struds Provides HTML reports for.
Design Details
Element Details
12.6 TRUSS DESIGN - CLOSE
Use this option to exit from TRUSS DESIGN window.

13. TOOLS
This menu contains the following sub menus:
TOOLS - ZOOM
TOOLS - PAN
TOOLS - OBJECT SNAP
TOOLS - SNAP
TOOLS - DRAWING AIDS
TOOLS - UCS
TOOLS - ORTHO
TOOLS - UNIT
TOOLS - CHANGE LIMITS
TOOLS - SHIFT CO-ORDINATES
TOOLS - CHANGE PICK BOX APERTURE
TOOLS - DISPLAY CONTROL BARS - DISPLAY TREE MENU
TOOLS - MODE SHAPES - VIBRATION MODE
TOOLS - UTILITIES
TOOLS - WINDOW
TOOLS DEFAULT PATHS
Each of these has been discussed in greater detail, in the respective topics.
13.1 TOOLS - ZOOM
Select this option to enlarge a part or whole of the plan geometry for viewing.
TOOLS - ZOOM - WINDOW
TOOLS - ZOOM - PREVIOUS
TOOLS - ZOOM - ALL
TOOLS - ZOOM - SCALE
13.1.1 TOOLS - ZOOM - WINDOW
This option is used to enlarge a portion of the modeled geometry. Using the option available,
select the portion of the geometry, which is to be enlarged.
The response by Struds is as follows.
'Enter First Corner of Zoom Window':
Select the first point by cursor anywhere on the screen.
'Enter Second Corner of Zoom Window':
Select the diagonally opposite corner of the zoom window of which you want to enlarge the
geometry.
Struds will then display the enlarged geometry covered inside the zoom window.
13.1.2 TOOLS - ZOOM - PREVIOUS
This option is inactive until you have used the Zoom - Window or Zoom - scale option. When you
select this option, Struds displays the previous zoom status of the screen. For example, if you use the
Zoom - Window option and want to see the whole portion again; click on this option. If you have
used the Zoom - Window option more than once, Struds will display the last zoom status on screen.
13.1.3 TOOLS - ZOOM - ALL
When you select this option, Struds displays the full geometry as per the original display. You can
also use this option to see the entire geometry when you have used Zoom - Scale option or PAN
option.
13.1.4 TOOLS - ZOOM - SCALE
When you select this option, Struds asks you the scale by which the plan geometry is to be enlarged
or reduced. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
By default the scale is 1. Which means that the display of geometry is as per the limits of screen
extent as specified by you. If you type 2 in the field provided for Scale Factor, the geometry will be
enlarged twice and displayed on screen. If you type 0.5, the geometry will be reduced to half and
displayed on screen.
13.2 TOOLS - PAN
This option allows you to move the plan geometry to any direction. When you select this option, a
box cursor appears on the screen. The response by Struds is as follows.
'Enter First Point for Panning':
Select first point by cursor from which you want to move the plan geometry.
'Enter Second Point for Panning':
Select the second point by cursor where you want to move the plan geometry. Struds will move the
entire geometry by the distance and direction specified by these two points.
TOOLS - OBJECT SNAP
The object snap mode can be activated by clicking this option. You can select a point in the geometry
with respect to the existing nodes / elements by using object snap mode. It has following sub-
options.
MID POINT
When you select this option and select any element, the cursor will be located exactly at the mid-
point of that element.
For example, if you want to draw a slab having its first corner at the midpoint of an element, you
adopt following steps.
I) Select `CREATE' - `SLAB' option from the menu.

II) A box cursor appears on the screen and Struds asks you Ènter First Point of Slab'.
III) Select `Tools' - Òbject Snap' - `Midpoint' option.
IV) Select the element by cursor the midpoint of which is the first corner of slab.
END POINT
By using this option you can locate your cursor at the nearest end point (node) of an element.
For example, if you want to draw a slab having its first corner at the end point of an element, you
adopt following steps.
I) Select `CREATE' - `SLAB' option from the menu.

II) A box cursor appears on the screen and Struds asks you Ènter First Point of Slab'.
III) Select `TOOLS' - ÒBJECT SNAP' - ÈND POINT' option.
IV) Select the element by cursor the end point of which is the first corner of slab.
PERPENDICULAR
By using this option you can locate your cursor perpendicular to the X co-ordinate from the selected
node.
For example, if you want to draw a element, you adopt following steps.
I) Select 'Create' - 'Element'- option from the menu.

II) A box cursor appears on the screen and Struds asks you
Ènter First Point of Element'.
III) Select `TOOLS' - ÒBJECT SNAP' - `PERPENDICULAR' option.
IV) Struds asks you ÈNTER NOAD ID/ SELECT A NOAD FOR X COORD' you can select node directly by
cursor and then give offset it will select then first point of element which perpendicular to selected
node then select second point of element.
CENTER
By using this option you can select centre of curve as a reference for creation of slab, element, etc.
NODE
This option allows you to locate your point exactly on an existing node. The response by Struds is as
follows.
OFFSET
This option allows you to select a point with respective to an existing node by providing the
respective co-ordinates. The response by Struds is as follows.
Ènter Node Id / Select a Node' :
Type the node number with respect to which you want to define the point or select that node by
cursor.
Ènter X - co-ordinate'
Type the value of X co-ordinate of the point to be defined with respect to the selected node.
Ènter Y co-ordinate'
Type the value of Y co-ordinate of the point to be defined with respect to the selected node.
Ènter Z co-ordinate'
Type the value of Z co-ordinate of the point to be defined with respect to the selected node.
Struds will locate the cursor at the desired point for selection.
NOTE - The object snap menu can also be activated by pressing F2 key from the key board. When you
press F2 key, Struds displays following sub menu.
You can select the option in this menu in the similar way as that of Object Snap mode.
13.3 TOOLS - SNAP
This option is similar to the Tools-Object Snap-Node option. This option allows you to locate your
point exactly on an existing node. The response by Struds is as follows.
Ènter Node Id / Select a Node' :
Type the node number at which you want to locate your cursor for selection of a point. Or, you can
select the node by the cursor. It should be noted that Struds will locate the node only if it lies
between the box of the cursor. If the node does not lie between the box of cursor, Struds displays
following message.
`Node not found. Enter Again.'
13.4 TOOLS - DRAWING AIDS
This option allows you to set the parameters for snapping on nodes and grids. When you select this
Click the check box for Snap - On and type the value of X spacing in meters (cursor step distance
along X axis) and value of Y spacing in meters (cursor step distance along Y axis) in their fields. The
box cursor will move with the spacing distance you have specified along X and Y axis when you use
up, down, left and right arrow keys from the cursor.
13.5 TOOLS - UCS
This option allows you to change the Co-ordinate system from ortho to inclined for generation of
plan geometry. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
WCS - This denotes World Co-ordinate system which is orthogonal on the screen and is available by
default.
UCS - Click on this option to define a new User Co-ordinate System. This is useful for drawing slab
panels that are inclined in plan. The UCS can be specified by either providing the angle of the X and Y
axis with respect to those of WCS or by selecting an inclined element of whose angle with WCS axes
is taken automatically by Struds.
ANGLE - Select this option and type the value of angle in degrees such as 30, 48, 92 etc. Struds will
then follow this UCS for further generation of plan geometry.
ELEMENT - When you select the option, the button for `Select Element' is activated. Click on this
button. A box cursor appears on screen. The response by Struds is as follows.
`Select Element for Setting UCS Angle':
Move the cursor and select an inclined element in plan. Struds find out the angle of this element
with respect to WCS axes and sets the UCS with this angle.
13.6 TOOLS - ORTHO
This option allows you to move the cursor along the vertical and horizontal axis of a selected point.
For example suppose you are creating an element. In that case, you select the first point of the
element. Now if you select Òrtho' option to locate the second point, the cursor will move along the
axes so the element drawn will never be inclined.
13.7 TOOLS - UNIT
This option allows you to set the unit for all the properties you use in Struds. When you select this
The window shows the default units for all the parameters. You can modify the units of these
parameters by selection. You should set your units before creating a plan geometry. You can change
the units midway, too. But this may create confusion while using the program.
Here you can also specify your own conversion factor from inch to meter just by stating it in the edit
box.
13.8 TOOLS - CHANGE LIMITS
This option allows you to change the limits of display on screens. Initially while you feed the `Project
Information' window, the default limits are 20m X 20m for both X and Y axis. When you select this
The window displays the maximum building dimensions along X and Y axis which you have specified
in the `Project Information' window at the start of creating a building file. If you increase the
dimensions in this window, the plan geometry on screen will be reduced in scale. Similarly if you
decrease the dimensions in this window, the plan geometry shall be enlarged in scale and displayed
on screen.
13.9 TOOLS - SHIFT CO-ORDINATES
This option allows you to move the entire plan geometry along x and y co-ordinates on the screen.
You should type the value of X offset (the distance by which you want to move the plan geometry
towards left or right on screen) and Y offset (the distance by which you want to move the plan
geometry towards up or down on screen) in their respective fields. If you want to move the
geometry towards left the value of X offset should be negative. Similarly if you want to move the
plan geometry downwards of screen, the Y value should be negative.
13.10 TOOLS - CHANGE PICK BOX APERTURE
This option allows you to modify the size of the pick box of cursor for selection. Whenever you select
an entity like node or element, it will be selected only if it lies within the pick box. When you have
drawn a large plan with close entities, picking by box will be difficult if more than one entity lie
within the pick box. In such case you can either zoom the plan geometry or change the size of pick
box aperture. When you select this option, Struds displays following window.
The default size of pick box is 5 pixels. You can change this size either by moving the side bar
indicator up and down or by typing the value for size of aperture in its field.
13.11.1 TOOLS - DISPLAY CONTROL BARS - DISPLAY TREE MENU
When you select this option Struds will display the tree menu on left side of the window from which
you can select the necessary options. After selecting this option Struds will give you the following
display.
13.11.2 TOOLS - DISPLAY CONTROL BARS - COMMAND PROMPT
When you select this option Struds will give you the command log at the bottom of the window. By
this selecting this option you can see the log of the command which you have already used. After
selecting this option Studs will give you the following window:
13.11.3 TOOLS - DISPLAY CONTROL BARS - TOOLBARS
When you select this option, Struds will display a list of the available toolbars. Corresponding to
every toolbar name, there is a checkbox, to control the availability of these toolbars.
If you check the checkbox, corresponding to any of these toolbars, that toolbar will be available for
the creation, as well as modeling of the entities.
The names of the various toolbars, which are available in Struds are listed below.
Create Slab
Create Element
Create Column
Create Node
Modify
Change Floor
Inquire
Zoom
Display
Gridline
Mode And perform Analysis

13.12.1 TOOLS - MODE SHAPES - VIBRATION MODE
This option gives you the visualization of behavior of structure when it subjected to EQ load. When
you apply the EQ load using Response Spectrum Method then after that you can see the behavior of
building under the EQ load. When you go to the All Floors view and select the option of vibration
mode, Struds will display the following window:
In the dialog box you have to give the Mode ID & Scale Factor.
By clicking on the Animation option and giving all the animation detail, you can see the moving
structure.
13.12.2 TOOLS - MODE SHAPES - UNDEFORMED SHAPE
When you click on this option Struds will stop the animation.
13.13 TOOLS DEFAULT PATHS

By using this option you can see and change the default paths which are used in Struds. When you
select this option Struds show you the following dialog box:
From this dialog box you can change the version of AutoCAD or Acrobat Reader.
14. STEEL MANUAL
The most important Steel structure that Struds can analyse and design is TRUSS. Creation of Trusses
in Struds as well as designing is explained in short in the previous part of this manual few more steps
in detail are explained here.
Here all the parameters are shown in the diagram for the convenience of the user.
After putting all the values we click on “OK”. On clicking on OK the Truss gets drawn as
shown below.
After the Truss is drawn with the required dimension, we can also edit it. We can delete or
construct any element. To delete any element we click on Edit >>Delete and then select the
proper element to be deleted .To construct a new element, we click on Create>>Element
wise>>Two Point
>>Point, dx, dy
>>Point, angle, L
After the editing has been done (if at all required) we attach material and section to the
Plane truss.
To attach material we click on Property>>attach >>material. On doing so, we will get a

dialog box as shown below.
In the above the selected material is Steel, so after selecting the material to be attached we
can either click on “All” or on “Locate” or “Rest” or “range”.
If we click on ALL then all the elements will be attached with the selected material. If we
click on “locate” then we will have to pick each element to attach it with the material. On
selecting “Range” another dialog box pops up over the above dialog box .In this dialog box
we have to enter the element number range, which we want to attach the selected
material.
After that we make a library of steel sections, which we intend to attach to the plane frame.
For this we at first click on Property >>Create>>Section.
On clicking the above, we get the following dialog box.
In the above dialog box if we click on the “Library” button then the other dialog box pops up
as shown above. In this dialog box we make the selection of the steel sections and then click
on “Define”. On clicking Define, it gets selected. In this way we can make any number of
sections.
After the library has been created we can view the sections created in the following dialog
box just by clicking on the section ids as shown below.
After that we will attach the sections from the library. For this we click on Property
>>Attach>>section. On clicking section we will get the following dialog box.
In the above dialog box we click on the drop down menu to select the created section. After
that we attach the highlighted section to the elements in the same way as we attach
material.
On attaching the section to the elements the section Ids are displayed near the attached
elements.
We can similarly create a library of Nodal loads .For this we click on

Property>>Create>>Load>>Nodal load. On clicking Nodal Load we get the following Dialog
box.
In the above dialog box we have two fields Fx and Fy. If we want to define a nodal load,
which will have both components of force, then we write the magnitude on both the fields.
If we want to create a horizontal force or a vertical force, then we enter in the Fx or Fy fields
respectively.
To attach the created load we click on Property>>Attach >>Load>>Nodal Load. On clicking

Nodal load we get the following Dialog box.
To attach the nodal loads on the proper nodes, we select the nodal load from the drop
down menu, then again we have to select whether we want to attach it as LL or DL to the
truss .For this we select it from the next “Define load Case” drop down menu. After that we
click on “Locate” and then select the Truss nodes with the help of the mouse to attach the
selected nodal load on that particular node.
To Detach the nodal Loads, we click on Property>>Detach>>Nodal Loads. On clicking Nodal

Loads, we get the following dialog box.
In the first dropdown menu in the above dialog box we click on the node number from
which we want to detach the nodal load. Then in the second dropdown menu we select the
Nodal load ID which we want to remove from the selected node. Then we click on Detach
load button to detach the nodal load from that particular node.
Loading Parameters: To generate the DL due to the truss material, the Purlins and that due
to roofing material, we at first click on Load >>Set Parameters. On clicking “Set Parameters”
we get the following dialog box.
In the above dialog box the first part is for the self-weight of the truss, load from the Purlin
and roofing material. Here we have to put the self-weight of the Truss in KN/m2, the self-
weight of the roofing material in KN/m2 and self-weight of Purlin in KN/m.
After that we will also have to specify the Truss position. If it is an intermediate truss, then it
will be loaded by purlin and roofing material from both the sides .If it happens to be a gable
end truss then half of the above load will be transferred to the Truss.
In the second part of the above dialog box we have to put the wind parameters.
After filling up these data we click on OK. Then we again go to Load>>Generate

On clicking “Generate” the load is generated on the specified parameters.
After the load is generated, a flag shows the completion of the load generation.
After the load is generated we can view the generated load .For this we go to View and click
on Loads.
On clicking on “Loads” we get the following dialog box. If we want to see the dead loads on
the Truss then we click on the DL in the Load Category list and then tick on the sources of
the dead load whose magnitude we want to see.
After selecting the “Load source for the Current load Category” we click on OK. On clicking
OK we see the loads acting on the Truss along with their magnitudes.
To see the loads acting due to other load cases we select it in a similar way.
Support Condition: By default one end of the Truss is hinge supported and the other end is
simply supported where only the vertical movement is restrained.
If we want to change the support conditions, we click on Support on the main menu bar. On
clicking it we get a new screen .On the right side of the screen is the control panel as shown
below.
If we want to create a new support group, then we click on
the “Define Group” button. On clicking it we get the following dialog box.
Here if we click on the icons showing different support conditions, then the check boxes for
the respective support and rotation get checked automatically.
Once the new group is defined it can be found on the drop down menu on the above shown
dialog box.
After selecting the proper support group we click on “Add Node” and then we click on the
nodes where we want to attach the chosen support condition.
Saving the File: After the above has been done, we click on Truss >>Analysis Files>>Current
Truss/All Trusses.
When we do this, the analysis files for Type Truss is also saved.
This can also be done coming out from the Truss module under the preprocessor menu.
On clicking Building >>saving properties we get the following dialog box

Here we check on the Plane truss checkbox and then click on “OK”.
On clicking Ok the Analysis files are saved.
Then we click on Building >>Save, and save the Truss File.
Analysis:
To analyse the Truss we go to the main “Struds” on Windows Menu, click on Analysis and
then click on Open to open the file where you have saved the truss.
After opening the file you click on Plane Truss in the above menu.
On clicking Plane Truss we get the following dialog box:

In the above dialog box we can see two windows. One is for Available file and the one below
is for Selected files.
After all the files are selected which you want to analyse, click on OK.
On clicking on Ok the analysis proceeds and once the analysis is done successfully, it gives
the following flag indicating the completion of analysis.
Post Processor: After the analysis is done, we go to the post processor where we can see
the analysis results .We click on Analysis in the main “Struds” on Windows menu. Then we
open the file where we saved the Truss .On opening the file, we get the following dialog
box.
In the above dialog box the List Box under Truss ID shows the Trusses available. (This is
when you create many Trusses under one file). Whichever Truss you select will be displayed
on the right hand window in the Dialog box along with its span, its starting and the end
points. After selecting the Truss we click on OK.
On clicking on OK the Truss is displayed.
Editing Load Combinations: To edit the load combination we click on Load Combination in
the menu bar of Postprocessor. On clicking it we get the following Dialog box.
Here we can see that the software has already made some load combinations .If we want to
edit the Factor of safety of any load combination, we click on that particular load
combination and edit the factor of safety and click on the “Save Factors” button.
To see the analysis results for any of the above load combinations we at first click on
Control >>Load Combinations in the Post processor menu. On clicking it we get the
following dialog box.
In the above dialog box we get all the load combinations .We select the load combination
for which we want to see the results and then click on OK. After that we can see the Axial
Forces, Reactions and reports for elemental results and nodal results.
Design: For the design of Truss we click on Steel Design in the main menu of “Struds” on Windows
as shown below.
After that we open the file where we had saved the Truss .On opening the file we get the
Design Menu .We click on Truss>>Plane Truss>>Select as shown below.
On clicking Select we get the following dialog box.

Here we select the Truss we want to design and then click on OK. On clicking Ok the Truss is
displayed.
The Truss design Procedure: We go to the Truss Design Menu as shown below.
In the above menu we click on Design Parameters .On clicking it we get the following dialog
box.
In the above dialog box we have to specify the Effective length factor along x and y,
permissible deflection along x and y and the stress increase Factor.
We also have to check on the Steel sections .The ticked steel sections will be considered in
the design if the already attached section fails during design. Here we check on only those
sections, which we want to be considered for design.
Then we go to design the Truss sections. Struds provides two methods of design .Viz Batch
wise and Interactive.
In the Batch wise method, the software will design all the elements and show the results in
batch wise, like Rafter, Main Tie, and Strut etc. Here for any group the software will give the
safest section.
In the interactive method of design the Software will give the optimum design for each
element depending on the Axial or Tensile forces acting on it.
To design the Truss Batch wise, we click on Design Truss>>New>>Batch as shown below.
After we click on “Batch” the design proceeds and then if any element fails during design,
we get the following Dialog box.
The above dialog Box Shows the element numbers which fails with the Predefined section
.To see the list of the failed elements, we click on the drop down menu .It also shows the
section ID which was attached to it, its compression capacity and Tension capacity and the
axial forces acting on it.
The above dialog box gives us only the list of the failed elements. To see the batch wise
Design we click on “Go to element Design”. On clicking it we get the following menu.
In the above menu we click on View Design>>Group. On clicking it we get the following
dialog box
In the above dialog Box we just have to select the Batch to view the design results. For
example, if we click on Rafter, then it will show the section of the Rafter Group.
If you want the report on the Design, click on Report>>Design Details/Element Details.
Struds Provides HTML reports on the above. You can also see the Batch wise design element
wise. Here the design is done batch wise but you can see the design of each element of the
group. Say elements from 1to 10 are main rafters .So you can see each element although it
will give same section.
To design the Truss interactively we click on Design Truss>>New>>Interactive.

On clicking Interactive, the design proceeds and then we get the following dialog box.
The above dialog box shows the elements that failed during design with the predefined
section.
To see the element design we click on “Go to element Design”. We get the following menu.
The above menu is it only the “Group” is inactive here .To see the Individual design results;
we click on Individual in the above menu. On clicking it we get the following dialog box.
In the following dialog box we can choose the element numbers from the drop down menu
.For each element it will also show the Length of the element, design axial compression or
Tension, the group to which that particular element lies, and all the configuration of the
sections that we had chosen earlier.
Against each section it will show its compressive capacity and tensile capacity, its weight
and the weld length required by it and also the status of the design.
If we want to edit the design, say we want to edit the design for the Double Angle, then we
click on the radio button corresponding to double angle and then click on Modify. On
clicking “Modify” we get the following dialog box.
Here we can select the alternative section that we would like to provide .If the selected
section is insufficient, then it will give a message “Selected section is insufficient, select a
new section”.
If the selected section is sufficient, then it will be accepted.
If you want the report on the Design, click on Report>>Design Details/Element Details.
Struds Provides HTML reports on the above.

STRUDS v11 Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

STRUDS v11 Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Struds v11

The recommended minimum hardware requirements for smooth running of Struds on

• IBM PC Pentium IV, faster the better.

To install Struds, follow these steps.

1. Insert the Struds CD in your CD drive and close the drive.

Introduction - ANALYSIS MODE

Introduction - DESIGN MODE

FILE - BUILDING INFORMATION

FILE - SAVE BUILDING MODEL

FILE - IMPORT STAAD.PRO (.Std) FILE

FILE - IMPORT ETAB (.$ET) FILE

FILE -EXPORT - STAAD FILE ( *.std)

FILE -EXPORT - ETAB FILE ( *.$ET)

FILE - DELETE PROJECT FILES

FILE - SET PRINT AREA

FILE - PRINT PREVIEW

FILE - PRINT SETUP

1.01 FILE - NEW

By using this option you can create a new building project.

1.02 FILE - OPEN

1.03 FILE - RETRIEVE

To open the retrieved file, use the File - Open option.

1.04 FILE - CLOSE

1.05 FILE - BUILDING INFORMATION

On clicking this option, the following dialog box is visible

1.06 FILE - SAVE

1.07 FILE - SAVE AS

1.09 FILE - IMPORT STAAD.Pro (.std) FILE

1. While Importing STAAD file following points should be considered.

1.10 FILE - IMPORT- ETAB (.$ET) FILE

Steps for importing ETAB file are given below.

1.11 FILE – EXPORT – STAAD FILE (*.std)

1.12 FILE – EXPORT – ETABS FILE (*.$ET)

1.13 FILE - DELETE PROJECT FILES

1.14 FILE - PRINT

1.15 FILE – PRINT SETTINGS

1.16 FILE - PRINT PREVIEW

1.17 FILE - PRINT SETUP

1.18 FILE – RECENT FILES PATH

1.19 FILE - EXIT

VIEW - SHOW / HIDE

VIEW - FLOOR PLAN

VIEW - PLANE FRAME

VIEW - SPACE FRAME

VIEW - PLANE TRUSS

VIEW - SHOW/HIDE - GRID POINTS

VIEW- SHOW/HIDE - GRID LINES

VIEW - SHOW/HIDE- ELEMENTS

VIEW - SHOW/HIDE- SLABS

VIEW - SHOW/HIDE- NODES

VIEW - SHOW/HIDE- WALLS

2.1.1 VIEW-SHOW/HIDE-GRID POINT

2.1.2 VIEW-SHOW/HIDE-GRID LINES

Select this icon to put the grid lines display on or off.

Select this icon to put the element display on or off.

This option allows you to on or off the display of slabs.

Select this icon to put the slab display on or off.

This option allows you to on or off the node display.

Select this icon to put the node display on or off.

This option allows you to on or off the column display.

Select this icon to put the column display on or off.

This option allows you to on or off the display of mesh.

Select this icon to put the node display on or off.